Fundamental of Speech Test Bank

Test Bank

for

Beebe, Beebe, and Ivy

Communication

Principles for a Lifetime

Portable Edition

prepared by

Sue L. Stewart Texas State University, San Marcos

Boston New York San Francisco Mexico City Montreal Toronto London Madrid Munich Paris

Hong Kong Singapore Tokyo Cape Town Sydney

Copyright © 2009 Pearson Education, Inc. All rights reserved. The contents, or parts thereof, may be reproduced with Communication: Principles for a Lifetime, Portable Edition, by Steven A. Beebe, Susan J. Beebe, and Diana K. Ivy, provided such reproductions bear copyright notice, but may not be reproduced in any form for any other purpose without written permission from the copyright owner. To obtain permission(s) to use the material from this work, please submit a written request to Allyn and Bacon, Permissions Department, 501 Boylston St., Suite 900, Boston, MA 02116 or fax your request to 617-671-2290. ISBN-13: 978-0-205-61152-2 ISBN-10: 0-205-61152-4 Printed in the United States of America 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 09 08

Contents Volume 1: Chapter 1.1: Foundations of Human Communication....................................................1

Volume 1: Chapter 1.2: Self Awareness and Communication ........................................................18

Volume 1: Chapter 1.3: Understanding Verbal Messages ...............................................................36

Volume 1: Chapter 1.4: Understanding Nonverbal Messages ........................................................51

Volume 1: Chapter 1.5: Listening and Responding ..........................................................................67

Volume 1: Chapter 1.6: Adapting to Others: Bridging Culture and Gender Differences............84

Volume 2: Chapter 2.1: Understanding Interpersonal Communication......................................101

Volume 2: Chapter 2.2: Enhancing Relationships...........................................................................118

Volume 3: Chapter 3.1: Understanding Group and Team Performance .....................................136

Volume 3: Chapter 3.2: Enhancing Group and Team Performance .............................................151

Volume 4: Chapter 4.1: Developing Your Presentation .................................................................168

Volume 4: Chapter 4.2: Organizing and Outlining Your Presentation........................................185

Volume 4: Chapter 4.3: Presenting Your Speech.............................................................................202

Volume 4: Chapter 4.4: Speaking to Inform ....................................................................................220

Volume 4: Chapter 4.5: Speaking to Persuade ................................................................................236

VOLUME 1Chapter 1.1: Foundations of Human Communication

1) The process of acting upon information is the definition of ________.A) intrapersonal communication B) communicationC) interpersonal communication D) human communication

Answer: BDiff: 1 Page Ref: 3

2) In the textbook, the primary distinction between the definition of communication and humancommunication involves ________.

A) acting upon information B) managing relationshipsC) interacting simultaneously D) making sense out of the world

Answer: DDiff: 3 Page Ref: 3

3) Dr. Johnson posts an announcement on her course web page that she is administering an examon Thursday. On Thursday, she is surprised to find that over half of her students did notprepare for the exam or did not study the correct material. This misunderstanding illustrateswhat aspect of communication competence?

A) The message should be ethical.B) Emotions are expressed unintentionally.C) Communication is a linear process.D) The message should achieve its intended effect.


4) To avoid potential misunderstandings, Dave prepares for a presentation to a group of businesspeople from Japan by researching Japanese culture. Daveʹs preparation demonstrates which ofthe following?

A) other-oriented communication B) ethnocentric communicationC) nonverbal communication D) interactive communication

Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 4

5) According to the textbook, which of the following is a criteria for determining communicationcompetence?

A) The message is grammatically correct.B) The message is free from too much emotion.C) The message achieves the intended effect.D) The message is well-received.

Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 5

1

6) Andrew intentionally withholds information about his car being in a wreck whencommunicating with a potential buyer. He makes the sale. Andrewʹs communication is________.

A) competent B) unethical C) other-oriented D) ineffectiveAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 6-8

7) Another word for decoding is ________.A) interpretation B) speaking C) creating D) noise


8) Ejike listens to his instructorʹs lecture. He makes sense out of the lecture by translating it in hismind. Ejike would represent what part of the communication model?

A) source B) receiver C) channel D) originatorAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 15

9) Prior to class, Ralitza received a phone message alerting her to call home immediately. As aresult of receiving this message, Ralitza is unable to focus on the class discussion. Whichcomponent of the communication process does this describe?

A) receiver B) feedback C) noise D) contextAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 16

10) Imagine that you are listening to a speech about AIDS and HIV. One of the speakerʹs mainpoints describes ways to respond to the devastating news that you or someone in your familyis HIV Negative. You are confused by this, because you know that HIV Negative means thatsomeone isnʹt infected with the virus that leads to AIDS. What is happening in this situation?

A) The speaker obviously plagiarized the speech, because he/she doesnʹt know the correctterms.

B) The channel of the message is faulty, or else the correct term would be sent and received.C) The speakerʹs encoding and the listenerʹs decoding are interfering with communication.D) External noise is keeping the message from being sent and received accurately.


11) The model of communication referred to as ʺcommunication as actionʺ may be summarizedwith the phrase ________.

A) communication takes place when messages are sent and receivedB) communication takes place when messages are exchangedC) communication takes place when meanings are created and maintainedD) communication takes place when human beings are affected by each other


2

12) The terms feedback and context are introduced in which of the communication models?A) communication as action B) communication as interactionC) communication as reaction D) communication as transaction


13) When people communicate, their thoughts, their past relationship, and their communicationgoals are examples of ________.

A) verbal communication B) physical contextC) psychological context D) channel


14) On the day Janet was scheduled to give her speech, her class was relocated into an auditorium.Janet couldnʹt quite overcome the feeling of isolation she felt as she spoke to her twentyclassmates in a room that could seat 500. Which of the following elements is most responsiblefor Janetʹs reaction?

A) feedback B) contextC) information source D) channel


15) Maddy is speaking to a group about his experiences in Iraq. As he finishes his presentation,the audience breaks into applause. This applause represents the ________ element ofcommunication.

A) context B) noise C) decoding D) feedbackAnswer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 15

16) Jenny is speaking to Madina about her ideas for a speech. While Jenny is speaking, Madinasimultaneously shakes her head and has a puzzled look on her face. Jenny notices thisresponse and stops and explains her ideas in another way. This example is most closelyrelated to which model of communication?

A) communication as action B) communication as feedbackC) communication as interaction D) communication as transaction

Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 16-17

17) Gilberto makes a negative comment about Kristenʹs new haircut. He quickly recants saying,ʺIʹm sorry, Kristen. You know I didnʹt mean it.ʺ Unfortunately, Kristen still feels hurt. Thisexample demonstrates that communication is ________.

A) inescapable B) intentional C) irreversible D) complicatedAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 19-20

3

18) The fact that we communicate with others nonverbally even when we may not intend to do sodemonstrates that communication is ________.

A) inescapable. B) irreversible.C) emphasizing content. D) emphasizing relationships.


19) Dean Barnlund suggested that when we communicate with one other person, there are at leastsix other ʺpeopleʺ involved. This statement suggests that communication is ________.

A) relational B) complicatedC) governed by rules D) inescapable


20) The aspect of communication that focuses on WHAT is said, including new information, ideas,and suggested actions, is referred to as ________.

A) contentB) relationalC) intentionD) implicationE) context


21) The aspect of communication that focuses on HOW something is communicated, and refers toemotions, attitudes, and power, is describing the ________.

A) content of the message B) context of the messageC) interaction dimension D) relationship dimension


22) All communication involves rules that define appropriate behavior. What factors influencethese rules?

A) The people involved.B) The placement of the people involved.C) The culture in which people are communicating.D) The length of the message.E) Both A and C

Answer: EDiff: 3 Page Ref: 22

23) Chinh knows that when he visits his friend, Rob, he must always call ahead. Rob has neverdirectly told Chinh to do this. This example illustrates a/an ________.

A) explicit rule B) implicit rule C) content rule D) relational ruleAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 22

4

24) Which of the following is an example of intrapersonal communication?A) talking to a friend about biology classB) telling your your roommate about a personal problemC) mentally reviewing what you have to do that dayD) ordering a pizza over the phone


25) Sondra is conscious of her tendency to be soft-spoken and withdrawn in communicationsituations. Based on this example, what characteristic of a competent communicator doesSondra have?

A) She effectively interprets verbal messages.B) She appropriately adapts her communication.C) She is aware of her own communication.D) She listens and responds thoughtfully.


26) Our unspoken messages are significant because ________.A) they should follow rulesB) they are the primary way we communicate feelings and attitudesC) they are easy to understandD) they are easy to use effectivelyE) they are the primary way we communicate content


27) Which of the following is an example of nonverbal communication?A) reading an essay silently B) smiling at a friendC) sending an e-mail D) talking on the phone


28) Which of the following statements is accurate concerning listening?A) Psychological noise helps make effective listening possible.B) Listening is primarily a passive task.C) Listening is the easiest communication skill to develop.D) Effective listeners are other-oriented.


29) Karaʹs friend states that she did not understand what Kara meant by her previous statement.Kara restates her message by giving an example that is personally relevant to her friend.Karaʹs behavior best illustrates which of the principles of communication?

A) Effectively using and interpreting nonverbal messages.B) Appropriately adapting your messages to others.C) Being aware of your communication.D) Effectively adapting to the context of the communication.


5

30) Which of the following is an attribute of interpersonal communication?A) Interpersonal communication is linear.B) Interpersonal communication is a monologue.C) Interpersonal involves responding to peopleʹs roles.D) Interpersonal communication involves mutual influence.


31) Which of the following could best be described as an example of impersonal communication?A) Asking the teller at the bank to cash a check.B) Discussing skydiving with your English professor after class.C) Reviewing your notes for your history exam.D) Talking to your best friend about your job interview.


32) Which of the following is included in the definition of interpersonal communication asdiscussed in the textbook?

A) managing relationships B) impersonalC) one-to-many D) common goal


33) Which of the following is an example of presentational communication?A) a radio talk showB) Oprah Winfrey delivers a graduation speech.C) A faculty awards committee meets to select scholarship recipients.D) muttering to yourself as you study your French


34) Your text describes small group communication as a transactional process among three tofifteen people who ________.

A) meet often. B) work in the same context.C) are ʺin syncʺ with each other. D) share a common purpose.


35) The primary difference between a team and a group is ________.A) a team is more highly structured than a groupB) a team involves mutual influence, while a group does notC) a team involves face-to-face communication, while a group does notD) a team has a goal, while a group does not

Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 25-26

6

36) Aristotleʹs definition of rhetoric includes ________.A) the process of discovering all the available means of persuasionB) the use of gimmicks to get what you wantC) another term for public communicationD) the process of learning about language and symbols


37) When you send an e-mail to a business associate you are utilizing ________ communication.A) massB) moderatedC) presentationalD) mediatedE) printed


38) According to the textbook, a characteristic of competent communication is to achieve acommon understanding of the message.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 5

39) The other-oriented perspective is essential for a message to achieve its desired effect.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 4

40) Someone who is distracted by the thought of an upcoming exam and misses the professorʹsadvice on how best to study is experiencing literal noise.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 15

41) Personnel managers cite oral communication skills as a top factor in helping graduatingcollege students obtain employment.Answer: TRUEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 10

42) According to the textbook, the key problem with the ʺcommunication as actionʺ model ofcommunication is that it overlooks the various channels of communication.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 16

43) The ʺcommunication as transactionʺ model fails to take into account the simultaneous natureof communication.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 17

44) The helical model of communication suggests that communication can be reversed.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 20

7

45) The relationship aspect of communication is usually explicit in a personʹs verbal messages.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 21

46) You can unintentionally send a message to others.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 19

47) A nonverbal message may contradict a personʹs verbal message.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 19

48) Adapting to listeners means telling a listener what he or she wants to hear.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 28

49) According to research cited in the textbook, communication plays a role in maintaining yourphysical and emotional health.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 12

50) The relationship dimension of a messages offers cues about the amount of power and controlthe speaker feels toward the other person involved in the communication.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 21

51) According to the textbook, an important aspect of a successful group is having a sense ofbelonging among its members.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 26

52) Bert, Ernie, and Oscar are in a serious discussion about their highway trash pickup contract.This is an example of dyadic communication.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 26

53) The primary difference between groups and teams is that teams have a common purpose.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 25-26

54) Communication that is sent to many people at the same time using a radio describes publiccommunication.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 27

8

Match these terms to the definitions given below.

A. Group communicationB. Impersonal communicationC. Interpersonal communicationD. Intrapersonal communicationE. Mass communicationF. Mediated communicationG. Nonverbal communicationH. Presentational communicationI. Relational dimension

55) The process of creating meaning among three to fifteen people who share a common goal.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 25

56) Part of the message that offers cues about the emotional attitudes of the speaker.Answer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 21

57) Communication that occurs when a speaker addresses a large audience in person.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 26

58) The process of interacting simultaneously with another person and mutually influencing eachother, usually for the purpose of managing relationships.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 24

59) Unspoken communication that is the primary means for conveying feelings and attitudes.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 28

60) Process of communicating that responds to peopleʹs roles rather than who they are asindividuals.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 24

61) Communication that occurs within yourself.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 28

62) Communication that is carried out using some channel other than face to face.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 27

9


A. ChannelB. ContextC. DecodingD. EncodingE. FeedbackF. MessageG. NoiseH. ReceiverI. Source

63) Response to a message.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 15

64) A process of translating ideas, feelings, and thoughts into a code.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

65) Encompasses the physical and psychological environment.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 15

66) Person who decodes a message and attempts to make sense out of what the source hasencoded.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

67) Originator of a thought or emotion who puts it into a code that can be understood by areceiver.Answer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

68) Interference with the accurate reception of the message.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 15

69) Pathway through which messages are sent.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

70) The process of interpreting ideas, feelings, and thoughts that have been translated into a code.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

71) To be ________ is to consider the needs, motives, desires, and goals of our communicationpartners while still maintaining our integrity.Answer: other-orientedDiff: 2 Page Ref: 4

10

72) A followable prescription that indicates what behavior is expected, preferred, or prohibited ina specific situation is a ________.Answer: ruleDiff: 2 Page Ref: 22

73) The beliefs, values, and moral principles by which we determine what is right or wrong arecalled our ________.Answer: ethicsDiff: 2 Page Ref: 6

74) The written, spoken, and unspoken elements of communication to which we assign meaningare called ________.Answer: messagesDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

75) Thoughts, worries, and feelings that distract us from the communication process are called________ ________.Answer: psychological noiseDiff: 2 Page Ref: 15

76) The communication as interaction perspective added two dimensions to the study ofcommunication that were not a part of the communication as action model. Those two are________, which is a response to a message, and ________, which is the communicationenvironment.Answer: feedback; contextDiff: 2 Page Ref: 15

77) Communication that occurs within yourself is referred to as ________ communication.Answer: intrapersonalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 28

78) The process of using symbols to influence or persuade others is ________.Answer: rhetoricDiff: 2 Page Ref: 26-27

79) The pathway through which messages are sent is the ________.Answer: channelDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

80) ________ communication occurs when we treat other people as objects, or when we respond totheir roles rather than who they are as unique people.Answer: impersonalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 24

81) Rules that are specifically spelled out are ________ rules.Answer: explicitDiff: 2 Page Ref: 22

11

82) Discuss three of the four elements of the definition of small group communication given in thetextbook.Answer: A small group should contain these elements: (1) verbal and nonverbal message

transactions (2) approximately 3 to 15 people (3) a common purpose or goal (4) a senseof belonging among group members (5) the ability of group members to exert influenceupon one another.

Diff: 2 Page Ref: 25-26

83) Explain and give an example of what is meant by the term ʺcontextʺ.Answer: Context is the environment in which a communication interaction takes place. It may

either be a physical environment, such as the room you are in, a historical environment,such as your past relationships and culture, or a psychological environment, whichwould be what is going on in the minds of the communicators.

Diff: 2 Page Ref: 15

84) Explain the concept that meaning is co-created.Answer: According to the textbook, all individuals involved in the communication process shape

how a message is understood by drawing on their own experiences to make sense of themessage. The meaning comes from the hearts and minds of both the sender andreceiver of the message rather than just one or the other.

Diff: 2 Page Ref: 3

85) What is the definition of human communication as discussed in the textbook?Answer: Human communication is defined in the book as making sense out of the world and

sharing that sense with others through verbal and nonverbal messages. We make senseof the world conveyed to us through our senses and attempt to share that meaning withother people. Human beings use both verbal and nonverbal means to share theirunderstandings.

Diff: 2 Page Ref: 3

86) Explain the criteria for ethical communication by defining ethics and explaining some sourcesfor ethical views.Answer: Because communication can be used for either honorable or dishonorable objectives, the

authors of the textbook feel that effective communication should go beyond beingunderstood and accomplishing oneʹs goals. So, an effective message should also beethical. Ethics are the beliefs, values, and moral principles by which we determine whatis right or wrong. Precepts for ethical behavior are communicated through philosophyand religion as well as professional codes of ethical behavior.


87) Explain the basic assumption of the ʺcommunication as transactionʺ model.Answer: This model looks at communication as the creation of meaning. In addition to the

components of the earlier and simpler models, it assumes that communicators interactsimultaneously, adapting constantly to each other so that the meaning for thetransaction is created together. This is a contrast to the earlier models, which assumedmeaning is transferred from one person to another.


12

88) Explain what concept of feedback. What are some possible sources for feedback?Answer: The communication as interaction model adds the component of feedback which is the

response to the message. Without feedback, communication is less likely to be effective.Feedback can be intentional (a verbal response such as a question or paraphrase ornonverbal response such as applause or a head nod) or unintentional (such as blushingor a yawn or sigh).


89) What three criteria should be used to judge communication competence?Answer: The message should be understood and it was intended. The message should achieve

the intended effect of the communicator. The message should be ethical.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 5

90) List and explain the three reasons why we study communication as outlined in the text.Answer: It is important to study communication in order to improve employability. In fact, a

survey shows that personnel managers consider communication skills the top factor ingraduating college students obtaining employment. Communication can also helpimprove our relationships whether they be work-related, friendships, romantic, or withfamily members. Good communication can lead to strong, lasting relationship. Finally,communication can improve physical and emotional health. The lack of closerelationships can lead to illness or even death. Good communication can lead to strongrelationships that can help us combat stress.


91) Briefly list and explain the three communication contexts discussed in the text.Answer: Interpersonal communication is simultaneous communication with another person in

an attempt to mutually influence one another in order to manage relationships.Small-group communication are when communication occurs between a group of threeto fifteen people who share a common purpose, feel a sense of belonging, and exertinfluence upon one another. Presentational communication occurs when a speakeraddresses a large audience in person.


92) Compare and contrast the definitions of communication and human communication. Give anexample of each.Answer: According to the text, communication is the process of acting upon information. When

you offer your dog a treat and he or she excitedly responds with a wagging tail, it canbe said they are acting on information. Human communication is communication thatfocuses on people communicating with other people by making sense of the worldaround them and sharing that understanding with others.


13

93) Compare and contrast the differences between impersonal and interpersonal communication.Answer: Interpersonal communication is a particular type of human communication that focuses

on simultaneous interaction between people in relationships in which they attemptmutually influence one another, usually for the purpose of managing their relationship.For example, a discussion between best friends about the state of their friendship wouldbe an interpersonal exchange. Impersonal communication is the type of communicationthat occurs when we treat others as objects or that responds only to the role the personis playing. When you order pizza, you are communicating on a impersonal level.


94) Compare and contrast the three models of communication presented in the textbook:communication as action, communication as interaction, communication as transaction.Explain the basic components of each model and identify how each model is different and/ormore realistic than the other models.Answer: The communication as action model is comprised of a source or the originator of a

thought or emotion who encodes a messages and sends it to the receiver via a channel.This message may encounter noise or interference which may prevent clearunderstanding. The receiver decodes the message by trying to make sense out of it.Interpretation of the message may be affected by literal or psychological noise. Thecommunication as action model is flawed because it views communication as a linearinput/output process. It does not take into account that the receiver may or may notunderstand the message the way the source intended. Essentially, the source transfersthe message into the receiver without regard for the receiverʹs level of understanding.The model does not account for the complexity of the communication process.

The communication as interaction model is similar to the communication as actionmodel, but it adds in the concepts of feedback and context. Feedback is the response toa message. Context is the physical and psychological communication environment.Unlike the communication as action model, this model allows the receiver to respond tomessage to ensure that mutual understanding has occurred. While this model appearsto take into account all the factors in communication, it fails to acknowledge the fact thatcommunication is a simultaneous process with both senders and receiverssimultaneously encoding and decoding messages rather than a step by step linearprocess.

The communication as a transaction model again takes into account all the concepts ofthe previous two models but also acknowledges that we are constantly reacting to whatour communication partner is saying. In other words, we send and receive messagessimultaneously. Both communication partners work together to clarify and co-createmeaning. This is the most accurate description of human communication.


14

95) List and discuss the components included in the definition of human communication.Answer: Communication is about making sense, sharing sense, creating meaning, using verbal

and nonverbal messages, and being other oriented. In making sense, we use our sensesto identify patterns in what we experience and share this understanding with others byusing words, art, music, clothing, or other means. Rather than just sending andreceiving messages, we create meaning together as communicating partners based onour own experiences, characteristics of the message, the situation, and our ownperceptions and backgrounds. We may use symbols such as words to convey ourmessages but we also rely on gestures, posture, vocal expressions, tone of voice,clothing, and artifacts to express feelings and attitudes, power, and interest. To beeffective communication must also acknowledge the perspective and needs of others(being other oriented).


96) In a well-developed essay, explain why it is useful to study interpersonal communication. Useexamples taken from the life of a typical college student to illustrate the points you make.Answer: Studying interpersonal communication may help you improve your relationships with

family, friends, and colleagues, and improve your own physical and mental health. Thecommunication of our family helps to shape our self-concept and influences how weinteract with others. If our parents have been patient and supportive, we will likelyhave a positive self-concept and treat others with patience and support. Outside of ourfamily, developing friendships and loving relationships with others is a major source ofsatisfaction and happiness for the individual. Friends and lovers can help us weatherstressful situations and provide guidance in times of decision. Being able to establishsupportive and caring relationships with others is vital to our overall well-being. Eventhough we do not always have a choice in our professional relationships, we can help toimprove those relationships to make our jobs easier. Effective interpersonalcommunication can help us manage conflict, improve problem solving, and generate aless stressful environment. We also know that loneliness can have disastrous effects on apersonʹs health. People who feel alone and alienated are more prone to stress relateddiseases, depression, and even death. Strong relationships with caring partners canimprove oneʹs physical and mental health.

Diff: 3 Page Ref: 8-10, 24

15

97) Explain and give examples of the 5 characteristics of communication as discussed in thetextbook.Answer: (1) Communication is inescapable. For all people, communication is everywhere and we

cannot live without it. From the messages we needed for physical survival when wewere infants, to social and professional needs we have as adults, communication isalways an essential part of any human process. Even if we decide not to talk to anyone,they may judge from our nonverbal expression what our mood might be.

(2) Communication is irreversible. You can never take back a received message.Whether you apologize for an insult or try to explain away a slip of the tongue, ifanother person has attended to what you have said or done, you cannot undo it. Forexample, if you have a fight with your friend, and out of anger mention something youknow is a sensitive area, then she will not forget it.

(3) Communication is complicated. If it were simple we would be better at it withouthaving to study and practice it. There is not a simple list of communication ʺhow toʺprinciples that can guarantee you will be a successful communicator. That is becausethere are so many variables in the communication process. No one method will fit allsituations.

(4) Communication emphasizes both content and relationship information. Sometimesthe unstated message is what is most important. When we communicate, we do so ontwo levels. The first, the content level, focuses on the new information or ideas that thecommunicator wishes to share. It is the obvious, surface level meaning. The relationshiplevel is usually implied, and addresses emotional states and control issues.

(5) Communication is governed by rules. Communication is not just a random activity,it is governed by a number of rules, most of which are implicit. We do learn a fewexplicit rules, such as ʺSay please and thank you.ʺ However, we learn most rulesthrough the positive and negative feedback we get from other people, or from observingothers in interaction.


16

98) Explain the five fundamental principles of human communication outlined in your text andgive an example of each principle.Answer: (1) Principle one deals with being aware of your communication with yourself and

others. Intrapersonal communication or communication with self impacts ourcommunication with others. Competent communicators are aware of theircommunication with others and with self, and they are able to monitor their behaviorrather than reacting mindlessly. For example, Kara is aware that her tendency to useanimated facial expressions and gestures is often overwhelming to some people.

(2) Principle two encompasses being able to effectively use and interpret verbalmessages. Verbal messages include words that form a language. It is important that ascommunicators, we can use words that create an accurate meaning in the minds of ourlisteners, and that we can accurately interpret the words of others. This results inshared meaning. An example of verbal communication include using words such as, ʺIlove you,ʺ to convey a message to a listener.

(3) Principle three is effectively using and interpreting nonverbal messages. Nonverbalcommunication is communication other than written and spoken language. Nonverbalcommunication is the primary way we communicate feelings, is more believable thanverbal communication, and is often difficult to understand because it is continuous. Anexample of nonverbal communication would be making eye contact with someone toconvey an interest in talking to him/her.

(4) Principle four is listening and responding thoughtfully to others. This principletakes into account that both the receiver and the source bear the responsibility forcommunication. Listening is an active process that requires an other-orientedperspective. An example of effective listening would be listening to a friend tell youabout her problem and attempting to see the problem from her perspective.

(5) Principle five is appropriately adapting messages to others. Adapting deals withtailoring your communication to reach your communication goals while maintainingyour integrity and honesty. It means that you must take your audience into account.For example, in presenting your position in a persuasive presentation, you relate theinformation to your audienceʹs experiences and background, but you do not provideinformation that is false to persuade your audience.


17

VOLUME 1Chapter 1.2: Self Awareness and Communication

1) Merielle is conscious of the fact that she is mentally rehearsing what she will tell her professorafter class. This example illustrates which dimension of self-awareness?

A) material self-awareness B) subjective self-awarenessC) objective self-awareness D) symbolic self-awareness


2) Jenny sees herself as a caring person. She communicates this perception of herself to a careercounselor, therefore, the counselor recommends that she enter the field of nursing. Jennyʹsinteraction with the counselor demonstrates what dimension of Jennyʹs self-awareness?

A) material self-awareness B) subjective self-awarenessC) objective self-awareness D) symbolic self-awareness


3) What dimension of self-awareness is unique to humans and only a few primates?A) material self-awareness B) subjective self-awarenessC) objective self-awareness D) symbolic self-awareness


4) Maria does not feel confident with her academic abilities in Calculus class; however, she feelsat ease with her abilities in her drawing class. This example illustrates which of the following?

A) self B) self-conceptC) self-image D) self-fulfilling prophecy


5) Danielle consistently describes herself as a confident, outgoing woman. Her descriptioncoincides with which of the following terms?

A) self-concept B) self-imageC) self-expectations D) self-fulfilling prophecy


6) Brian expresses his dislike for Chinese food. Brianʹs dislike demonstrates which component ofself-concept?

A) belief B) attitude C) value D) behaviorAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

18

7) Jaclyn thinks life exists on other planets. This example illustrates which component ofself-concept?

A) belief B) attitude C) value D) behaviorAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

8) Athena thinks that killing animals for food is morally wrong. Athenaʹs convictions would bewhich of the following?

A) an attitude B) a belief C) a value D) a behaviorAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

9) Jason spends hours every day working out at the gym. He also takes great care in keeping hissports car well maintained and spotless. According to Jamesʹ theory of the self, Jason is takingcare of his ________.

A) material self B) social self C) spiritual self D) emotional selfAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 38

10) Which of the following statements most accurately describes the social self?A) You are represented by the things you own.B) You are what you have.C) You have different selves in relation to different people.D) You attempt to answer for yourself, ʺWhy am I here?ʺ

Answer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 39-40

11) Madeline contemplates how the universe was created and her place in it. Madeline isexploring which component of self?

A) material self B) social self C) spiritual self D) emotional selfAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 40

12) Aisha noticed at work that Vincent and Michelle kept asking her advice on office procedures.Soon, she began to see herself as competent and knowledgeable. Which of the followingstatements best describes the means by which Vincent and Michelle influenced Aishaʹsself-concept?

A) communication with others B) association with groupsC) roles we assume D) self-labels


19

13) Jose was raised in a Cuban-American community. Although he had many college friends fromother co-cultures, he proudly maintained his Cuban roots by sprinkling his speech withSpanish phrases. In addition, he enjoyed sharing examples of cultural norms from his familyand neighborhood in his communication class. These examples show which kind of influenceon Joseʹs self-concept?

A) communication with others B) association with groupsC) roles we assume D) self-fulfilling prophecy


14) When Maury is asked to describe herself, her first response is that she is an overachiever. Thisdescribes her ________.

A) avowed identity B) assumed roleC) ascribed identity D) aspect of her spiritual self


15) As Ellen was nearing graduation, ,she thought back over her college career. Although she hadwanted to be more involved in extra curricular activities, she had focused more on her studiesand tended to describe herself first as a student. What aspect of the formation of self conceptdoes this describe?

A) assumed role B) cyber selvesC) avowed identity D) association with groups


16) Megan spends a lot of time thinking about her goals for the future. She learned from her lastjob that she would prefer to work outdoors. She learned from being in the Student Council inhigh school that she would prefer to work alone than with many people. This situationdescribes Megan using which of the following processes?

A) self-reflexiveness B) self-comparisonC) self-fulfilling prophecy D) self-consciousness


17) Priscilla feels that she is unattractive and unlovable following a break-up with her boyfriend.Prior to this incident, Priscilla had a healthy view of her worth. Priscilla experienced adecrease in which of the following?

A) self-reflexiveness B) self-conceptC) self-esteem D) self-consciousness


18) According to research, one powerful source for social comparison that may contribute to selfesteem loss in girls is ________.

A) self analysis B) communication with othersC) images in the media D) groups


20

19) The statement, ʺIʹm not intelligent because my roommate makes better grades than I do,ʺillustrates which of the following?

A) self fulfilling prophecy B) social comparisonC) self-expectations D) social expectations


20) Andrew had plans to be married by the age of 25, however, he turned 30 and was stillunmarried. He concluded that he was incapable of maintaining a healthy relationship.Andrewʹs self-esteem was impacted by which of the following?

A) gender differences B) social comparisonC) self-expectations D) self-fulfilling prophecy


21) Timothy was not doing well in his algebra class. In considering how well he could do in class,he began to ask other students about their algebra grades. This is an example of ________.

A) social comparison B) self-expectationC) self-consciousness D) self-fulfilling prophecy


22) Christa experienced extreme anxiety about the thought of giving a presentation to herclassmates. On the day of the presentation, she repeated in her mind statements such as , ʺYouare well-prepared.ʺ and ʺYou have valuable information to share with your audience.ʺ Whattechnique was Christa using to boost her self-esteem?

A) positive self-talk B) visualizationC) reframing D) losing your baggage


23) Larry grew up in a family where his mother and father were constantly fighting and insultingeach other. Their divorce was especially messy and mean. The poor quality of theirrelationship caused Larry to avoid commitment in a loving relationship for many years. Larryfinally decides that he can no longer allow his feelings about love and marriage to be coloredby his parentsʹ failures. Which technique for improving self-esteem did Larry use?

A) developing honest relationships B) visualizingC) positive messages D) losing your baggage


21

24) Aaron was asked to give a speech to the incoming freshmen about the advantages of servingin student government. He had never given a speech before and was very nervous. A speechprofessor suggested that in addition to practicing, he could picture himself delivering thespeech successfully, and receiving favorable feedback from his audience. Which method didthe professor recommend to help Aaron manage his communication apprehension?

A) visualizationB) positive self-talkC) reframingD) surrounding himself with positive people


25) Lakesha received a lower grade than she expected on her first history paper. At first she wasupset, then she realized that the paper was only 10% of her total grade for that class. Whichmethod did she use in enhancing her self-esteem?

A) visualization B) reframingC) self-fulfilling prophecy D) social comparison


26) Paul and Patty are able to talk to one another candidly about one anotherʹs faults andstrengths. Their self-esteem is improved because of which of the following factors?

A) They are reframing their experiences.B) They surround themselves with positive people.C) They have developed an honest relationship.D) They engage in positive intrapersonal communication.


27) If you want to develop a healthy self-esteem, it is often helpful to do which of the following?A) compare yourself to othersB) place a label on yourself based upon one incidentC) mentally rehearse all possible scenarios, positive and negativeD) surround yourself with positive people


28) The assessment of your worth or value as reflected in your perceptions of such things as yourskills, abilities, appearance and talents is ________.

A) self esteem B) self expectationsC) material self D) ascribed identity


22

29) Perception involves ________.A) the arousal of our sensesB) making generalizations about peopleC) mentally rehearsing future communication eventsD) looking at experiences from a different perspective


30) Barry is driving Suzie home from a party. Barry notices that Suzie has her arms crossed andshe is looking out the window of the car and making no attempt to communicate with him.Based on Suzieʹs nonverbal behavior, Barry infers that she is upset with him. Barryʹs inferenceabout Suzieʹs behavior illustrates which stage of the perceptual process?

A) attending and selecting stimuliB) interpreting and attributing meaningC) responding and expressing understandingD) organizing stimuli


31) The stage of perception in which we put information into patterns is called ________.A) attention B) reframing C) interpretation D) organization


32) Assuming a person belongs to a particular group because of his or her clothing is an exampleof which of the following?

A) selection B) reframing C) closure D) attentionAnswer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 58

33) Pat is watching TV, and his roommate walks in and tells Pat that he wishes to talk to him. Patturns off the TV in order to focus on the conversation with the roommate. Patʹs decision tofocus on the roommate rather than the television illustrates what stage of the perceptualprocess?

A) attention and selection B) organizationC) interpretation D) closure


34) Chris and Bryan are having a conversation. After a while, Chris stands up to leave, puts on hiscoat, and moves toward the door. Bryan sees him moving toward the door but continuestalking with no signs of wrapping up the conversation. What problem is Bryan having withhis perception of the situation?

A) attention and selection B) organizationC) closure D) interpretation


23

35) Which of the following statements is most accurate concerning stereotypes?A) All stereotypes are negative.B) We stereotype people because of our nature to simplify and categorize.C) People who use stereotypes are usually doing so intentionally.D) It is fairly easy to rid ourselves of harmful stereotypes.

Answer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 61-62

36) A generalization applied to a person because you perceive him or her to have attributesassociated with a specific group is an example of ________.

A) reframing B) self-fulfilling prophecyC) social comparison D) stereotyping


37) Robin suspected that her roommate, Julie, wanted to break up with her boyfriend. Rather thanasking her specifically, Robin paid close attention to how Julie complained about him, avoidedhis phone calls, and was late getting ready for dates with him. What method was Robin usingto check her perception of Julieʹs feelings?

A) direct perception checking B) indirect perception checkingC) social comparison D) self-fulfilling prophecy


38) Veronica noticed that her roommate responded with short, one-word answers to herquestions. She suspected that her roommate was upset with her, but she didnʹt know why. Sheasked her, ʺIt seems like you have been avoiding me all day. When I ask you a question, you answerwith only a few words. Have I done something to make you mad at me?ʺ This statement is anexample of ________.

A) direct perception checking B) indirect perception checkingC) social comparison D) self-fulfilling prophecy


39) The psychological and emotional characteristics of individuals that cause them to bemasculine, feminine, or androgynous is ________.

A) sex B) gender C) ethnicity D) cultureAnswer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 45-46

40) Which of the following statements is most accurate concerning direct perception checking?A) It relies only on observation and listening.B) It can involve asking others for their interpretation of a situation.C) It involves asking people to interpret their own actions.D) It is primarily a passive process.E) Both B and C

Answer: EDiff: 3 Page Ref: 58-60

24

41) When Melinda describes herself as being a student, she is discussing her ascribed identity.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 42

42) Your self concept is your view of yourself in a particular situation.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 36-37

43) Conscious competence is when we are aware that we know or can do something, but it has notyet become an integrated habit.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 36

44) According to the textbook, your self-concept varies from situation to situation, and actuallychanges on a regular basis.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 36-37

45) According to the textbook, your self-image is how you view yourself in a particular situation.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

46) A value is a learned predisposition to respond to a person, object, or idea in a favorable orunfavorable way.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

47) ʺI think honesty and truth are important in a relationship.ʺ This statement is an example of anattitude.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

48) Keeping up with others in relation to our possessions reflects our view of our social self.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 38

49) Women in American culture experience more negative feelings about their bodies than men.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 47-48

50) According to William James, having a ʺsocial selfʺ means that you communicate differentlywith different people.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 39-40

51) Your spiritual self is the part of you that attempts to answer, ʺWhy am I here?ʺAnswer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 40

25

52) You have been described by your significant other as a ʺcontrol freak.ʺ This description is anexample of an avowed identity.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 42

53) The term sex is more broad and inclusive than the term gender.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 45-46

54) Self-reflexiveness is the human ability to think about what weʹre doing while weʹre doing it.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 43-44

55) When we derive our sense of self-worth by comparing ourselves to others, we are using socialcomparison.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 47

56) Maya believes she will make new friends in college, and her predictions come true. This is anexample of reframing.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 52-53

57) Visualization has been shown by research to reduce speaking anxiety.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 52

58) If you mentally try to suppress a stereotypical thought, it is highly likely that these thoughtswill not reappear.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 61-63

59) The interpretation stage of perception involves superimposing structure and consistency onwhat we observeAnswer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 58-59

60) Closure is the process of filling in missing information by imposing a pattern or structure.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 58

26


A. Ascribed identityB. AttitudeC. Avowed identityD. BeliefsE. Material selfF. Self conceptG. Self imageH. Social selfI. Spiritual selfJ. Value

61) The way a person consistently describes himself/herself to others.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

62) How you describe yourself or identity you act out.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 42

63) Learned predisposition to respond to something or someone in a favorable or unfavorableway.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

64) The concept of self that develops through your personal interaction with others and than canbe unique with each relationship.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 38

65) The ways in which you structure your understanding of reality what is true and what isfalse.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

66) Enduring concepts of good and bad, right and wrong.Answer: JDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

67) The way you view yourself in a particular situation.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 38

68) The elements of self reflected in all our tangible things.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 38-39

27

69) Your sense of who you are in relationship with other forces in the universe.Answer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 39


A. ReframingB. Self conceptC. Self-esteemD Self expectationsE Self-fulfilling prophecyF. Self reflectivenessG. Self-talkH. Social comparison

70) Your subjective description of who you are, how you see yourself as a person.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

71) The human ability to think about what you are doing while you are doing it.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 38

72) Goals you set for yourself.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49

73) Word referring to oneʹs inner speech, including communication with the self.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 50-51

74) Measuring your abilities in relation to other people around you.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 47

75) The idea that predictions about your future actions are likely to come true because you believethey will come true.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49

76) Process of redefining events and experiences from a different point of view.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 52

28

Match the correct definition with the following terms.

A. GenderB. Material selfC. SelfD. SexE. Social selfF. Spiritual selfG. Subjective self awarenessH. Symbolic self awareness

77) Considers who you are in relationship to other forces in the universeAnswer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 40-41

78) The sum total of who a person is.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

79) Can be characterized by the statement, ʺYou are what you have.ʺAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 38-39

80) Changes depending on with whom you are interacting.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 39

81) Biological and physiological characteristics that make a person male or female.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 45

82) A unique human ability to develop and communicate a representation of oneself to others.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 35

83) The ability to differentiate the self from the social and physical environment.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 35

84) According to William Jamesʹ model of the self, the ________ self the part of yourself that isdefined through the process of your introspections about your values and moral standards.Answer: spiritual selfDiff: 2 Page Ref: 39

85) A method for reducing anxiety or boosting your sense of self esteem by mentally imaginingyou are performing a particular task in a certain way is ________.Answer: visualizationDiff: 2 Page Ref: 52

29

86) ________ is the process of handling a negative event by redefining it, or looking at it from adifferent point of view.Answer: ReframingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 52

87) Your ________ identity is one you personally assign to yourself and act out.Answer: avowedDiff: 2 Page Ref: 42

88) The activity involved in perception when we choose specific stimuli in our environment tofocus on is ________.Answer: selectionDiff: 2 Page Ref: 57

89) The stage of perception in which we convert information into patterns that are moreconvenient and understandable is called ________.Answer: organizationDiff: 2 Page Ref: 57

90) A generalization that we apply to persons because we perceive them to have attributescommon to a particular group is called ________.Answer: stereotypingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 61-62

91) Looking for cues in nonverbal behavior, listening carefully to the language a person is using,and paying close attention to the tone of voice of another person are examples of ________perception checking.Answer: indirectDiff: 2 Page Ref: 63

92) Mandi effectively uses public speaking skills without having to concentrate heavily on whatshe is doing. Mandi is functioning at a level of ________ ________ on Maslowʹs framework.Answer: unconscious competenceDiff: 2 Page Ref: 36

93) An evaluation of oneʹs worth or value that can fluctuate is known as ________.Answer: self-esteemDiff: 2 Page Ref: 38

94) A social construction that encompasses biological sex, psychological characteristics, attitudesabout the sexes, and sexual orientation is know as ________.Answer: genderDiff: 2 Page Ref: 45-46

95) Our ________ self awareness is our ability to differentiate ourselves from the social andphysical environment.Answer: subjectiveDiff: 2 Page Ref: 35

30

96) Briefly explain the four levels of self-awareness as described by Abraham Maslow.Answer: The four levels of competence are based on whether or not we are competent in a given

situation, and our awareness of that competence and what is required to becomecompetent. Level one is unconscious incompetence, in which we are not aware of ourown incompetence. Level two is conscious incompetence, in which we are incompetent,but we are aware of that fact. Level three is conscious competence, in which we areaware we can do something, but we donʹt have the integrated skill or habit. Level fouris unconscious competence, in which skills are second nature, so we can use themwithout concentrating on them.


97) Name and explain William Jamesʹ three components of the self.Answer: The three components of the self are the material self, the social self, and the spiritual

self. The material self is concerning with all of the external, or tangible belongings. Thesocial self consists of that part of you that originates in the various interactions you havewith people you know. You interact differently with different people, so you havemulti-dimensional selves. Your spiritual self is a result of personal introspection onyour values and morals. It asks the question, ʺWho am I?ʺ and considers yourrelationship to other forces in the universe.


98) How can reframing help someone improve his or her self-concept?Answer: Reframing involves the re-interpretation of negative criticism in realistic ways. While

not ignoring the negative, one puts the criticism into perspective by recognizing thatmistakes happen but do not make up the sum total of who you are.


99) Define self-talk and visualization. How are they different from each other?Answer: Self-talk is intrapersonal communication where the person speaks to him or herself in

either a positive or negative way. Visualization is a technique of imagining you areperforming a task in a certain way. It involves imagining yourself in the situation andacting effectively.


100) Explain the concept of mediated social comparison.Answer: This concept is based on images of physical attractiveness provided by the media.

These pervasive and accessible images can affect self esteem in both men and women byreinforcing the image of what is considered to be physically attractive. Since this imageis next to impossible to attain, this comparison can have a negative effect on men andwomen.


101) What is self-fulfilling prophecy, and how is it related to self-esteem?Answer: Self-fulfilling prophecy is the tendency to make a prediction, and then observe it

coming true because of your strong expectations. People with high self-esteem tend tomake positive predictions about themselves. People with low self-esteem tend to expectthe worst. These predictions are often reinforced, producing a positive or negative spiralof self-esteem and prophecies.


31

102) Explain the role that communicating with others plays in developing a personʹs self-esteem.Answer: A big part of how we see ourselves comes from the type of interactions we have with

other people. This begins at birth, with the names and nicknames we may be given, andhow the family communicates with us. The feedback we receive on our actions tells ushow well we are doing. We make inferences about ourselves based on how other peopletreat us.


103) Explain the difference between the terms sex and gender as described in the textbook.Answer: Sex is a biological designation of being male or female. Gender is a broader term, which

encompasses biological sex(male or female); the psychological characteristics ofmasculinity, femininity, and androgyny; attitudes about sex; and sexual orientation.


104) Describe the differences between direct and indirect perception checking.Answer: Indirect perception checking involves passively seeking information such as carefully

observing nonverbal cues and listening closely to verbal messages. This information isused to either confirm or refute your interpretations. Direct perception checking, on theother hand, involves asking others or asking the person you are observing directlywhether you interpretations of a perception are correct.


105) Briefly explain the three components of self-concept (attitudes, beliefs, and values).Answer: An attitude is a learned favorable or unfavorable response to a person, object, or idea.

A belief deals with what you view to be either true or false. A value is an enduringconcept of good and bad, right and wrong.


32

106) Define and discuss self-concept. Explain the four basic means through which we develop ourself concept.Answer: Self-concept is how we consistently describe ourselves to others; it is deeply rooted and

slow to change. Self-concept is not a one-dimensional attribute, but ismulti-dimensional. That is, we have many selves. One of the many frameworks fordescribing who you are is William Jamesʹ framework of the three selves: material self,social self, and spiritual self. Basically there are four means through which we developour self-concept. The first is through communication with others. Other people give usfeedback about ourselves, either by directly telling us something or through reactions toour behaviors. Because of the strong impact of others on our self concept, people whoare raised in a loving, supportive environment may have a higher self-concept thanpeople who are raised in a harsh, over-critical environment. The second influence onour self-concept is our association with groups. We label ourselves according to thegroups we belong to. We may see ourselves as a Republican, a Catholic, a Texan, oridentify with any other group we belong to. In addition, our peer groups have a stronginfluence on how we see ourselves. The third influence on our self-concept is ourassumed roles. The roles that we have in society in part determine how others treat us.Therefore, we come to see ourselves in light of that role. Gender is a role that affectshow people respond to us from birth, thus our gender role becomes a powerfulcontributor to our self-concept. The fourth influence on our self-concept is ourself-labels. Humans are capable of thinking about themselves (self-reflexiveness), sothe labels we use become part of our self-concept. In addition, our beliefs, attitudes, andvalues become part of our self-labels.


107) John Stewart describes four characteristics of the self or oneʹs identity. Identify and discussthese four characteristicsAnswer: According to Stewart, identities are multidimensional and changing. While some

aspects of our identities such as gender are stable, others change due to circumstancesand our interaction with others. Second, identity involves responsiveness to others andwe construct our identities and come to know ourselves through interaction andcommunication with others. Third, both past and present relationships have aninfluence on our identities. The early messages (including nicknames) and interactionswith our families significantly influence our view of self as do the current relationshipswe have with friends, coworkers, and significant others. Finally, Stewart found that wehave both avowed identities (those we assign to ourselves and act out) and ascribedidentities (those assigned to us by others) which we may not agree. These identities arenegotiated through our interaction with others.


33

108) Felicia is going to start a new job tomorrow as an assistant to the dean. On her last job she hada boss who found fault with everything that she did, co-workers who backstabbed each other,and the overall atmosphere was hostile and negative. In addition, she heard that the lastperson in her new job left suddenly, and no one really would tell her why. Now, Felicia isextremely nervous about starting her job tomorrow. The textbook discusses seven strategiesfor enhancing oneʹs self esteem. Apply at least four of those strategies to Feliciaʹs situation toshow how she might improve her confidence in her new job.Answer: Just as negative self-talk can increase our apprehension and decrease our motivation,

positive self-talk can give us confidence to fulfill our goals. Felicia needs to tell herselfshe can do the job, and that she was hired because she is competent. She can extend theself-talk by using visualization. She can picture herself getting ready for work in themorning, looking good! Then, see herself entering the office, smiling confidently andshaking hands with her new co-workers. She can picture herself throughout the dayhaving successful interactions with everyone. A third method she might use isreframing, in which she redefines a situation. For example, she might note that her lastboss was critical of all his workers, so his harsh criticism did not mean that her job wasinadequate. She might think that the person who left the job as deans assistant hadpersonal problems. It probably had nothing to do with the dean. A fourth method is todevelop honest relationships . She needs to seek a friend who can give her realisticfeedback about her skills. The fifth method is to surround yourself with positivepeople. Felicia can do this by avoiding people at work who are cynical and sit aroundcomplaining, politely engaging in small talk with them, but not participating in gripesessions. She can also seek out the people at work who are positive about the job.Finally, Felicia can lose her baggage. Chalk up her experiences at her last job as alearning experience, not as a reflection on who she is and what she is capable of.


109) Daniel is filming a script that he has written for his directing class. He asked his friend, Fred,to help with the camera equipment during the shoot. During the filming, Daniel gets thefeeling that Fred is taking over the project. Daniel feels hurt but wants to continue to workwith Fred without having any misunderstandings. Describe at least two ways, giving specificexamples, that Daniel can use to enhance his perceptual accuracy of Fredʹs behavior in thissituation.Answer: First, Daniel could simply increase his awareness by not being consumed by his own

negative emotions and taking the time to fully listen and be more verbally andnonverbally aware, so he can interpret Fredʹs behavior more accurately. For example,Fred may just view his behavior as being helpful. Daniel may also become more awareof his own communication. Perhaps Daniel is not clearly communicating Fredʹs role inthe project. Secondly, Daniel should be careful to avoid stereotypes. For example, it maybe tempting for Daniel to stereotype Fred as a pushy and controlling individual.Finally, Daniel could check his perceptions by either performing an indirect or directperception check. In order to use an indirect perception check, Daniel simply needs tocarefully observe Fredʹs behavior and determine if his perception of Fred wanting totake over his project is true. He could also use a direct perception check by eitherasking another person who knows about the situation or asking Fred himself. If Danielasks Fred himself, Daniel should describe Fredʹs behavior, offer his interpretation ofFredʹs behavior, and ask whether or not his perception is correct.


34

110) Derek is attending a large class in an auditorium setting with an enrollment of 400 students.This course is important to his major field of study and he wants to do well. Discuss the waysDerek can use the perception process to improve his performance in class.Answer: Perception is the arousal of any of our senses, and Derek will certainly be using his

senses as he attends the lectures in class. The first stage in the perception process isattention and selection in which we notice and choose to pay particular attention tocertain sensations in our environment. For example, when Derek walks in theclassroom, there are numerous stimuli to which he can attend such as the space, themusic being played, the multitude of people, and the instructions of the teachingassistants. Derek chooses to attend to the teaching assistants rather than the students.He does this by focusing his gaze at his TA and tuning about people talking aroundhim. Next is the stage of organization which involves converting information intounderstandable patterns. Derek conveniently organizes the lecture into concepts he isfamiliar with and those that are new to him. In the concepts he doesnʹt know, he makesnotes to review later. Finally, he moves to interpretation. In other words, he assignsmeaning to what he has observed. Derek interprets from the lecture that heunderstands several points well, needs to review and reread others and can combineseveral concepts he has learned in previous lectures. These steps will help focus hisperception and improve his performance in class.


35

VOLUME 1Chapter 1.3: Understanding Verbal Messages

1) A word, sound, gesture, or visual signal that represents a thought, concept, or object is a(n)________.

A) symbol B) meaning C) trigger D) actionAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 74-75

2) ________ is a personʹs interpretation of a symbol.A) Behavior B) Action C) Meaning D) Emotion


3) The Sapir-Whorf Hypothesis suggests which of the following?A) Language and thought are exclusive of one another.B) Thought is rooted in and controlled by language.C) Language is rooted in and controlled by thought.D) Language does not impact our world view.


4) Judonna and Candice were shopping at the mall. Judonna needed to go to the other end of themall to get something. She said to Candice, ʺMeet me at 2:00 in front of Sears.ʺ Candicethought that ʺin frontʺ meant outside in front of the parking lot entrance. Judonna thought thatʺin frontʺ meant in front of the entrance on the inside of the mall. Judonna and Candice spenttwo hours waiting for each other. What language problem is reflected in this situation?

A) allness B) polarizationC) bypassing D) denotative meaning


5) ________ meaning conveys the content of what a word means, and the ________ meaningcontains the feelings behind words.

A) Connotative; denotative B) Denotative; connotativeC) Abstract; concrete D) Concrete; abstract


36

6) When Carol and Marcia talked about going home for spring break, Carol thought ofhome-cooked meals, free laundry, and time to spend with old friends. Marcia thought only ofthe bickering and fussing between her parents. Which of the following statements describesthis situation?

A) Carol and Marcia are bypassing when they discuss where they are going to spend theirvacations.

B) Carol and Marcia have different denotations for the word ʺhome.ʺC) Carol and Marcia have different connotations for the word ʺhome.ʺD) Carol and Marcia are polarizing the word ʺhome.ʺ


7) Which of the following words is the most concrete?A) sport B) activity C) competition D) sailing


8) Which of the following words is the most abstract?A) education B) college degreeC) African-American literature D) Toni Morrison


9) The more abstract a word, the ________.A) easier it is for other people to understand youB) more difficult it is for other people to agree with your meaningC) clearer the messageD) more it can be experienced with one of your senses


10) Bill was visiting his friend Carolʹs parents in Chicago. They offered him some tea; he was verythirsty, so he said he would love some. He was very surprised when they brought him a cupof hot tea. In Arkansas where he was from, the word ʺteaʺ always meant iced tea. If youwanted a cup of hot tea, you asked for ʺhot tea.ʺ Which of the following characteristics oflanguage best describes this situation?

A) Words have denotative and connotative meanings.B) Words reflect abstract and concrete meanings.C) Words are culture-bound.D) Words are powerful.


37

11) Sarah confides in Elizabeth saying, ʺMr. Smith is inflexible when it comes to certain issues. Ilike a boss who can stand his ground and be firm in enforcing company policy.ʺ Elizabethreports what Sarah said to Mr. Smith saying, ʺElizabeth said that you were inflexible.ʺ Mr.Smith is offended by this comment. This example best illustrates which of the following?

A) Meanings are culture-bound.B) Concrete words are preferable to abstract words.C) Meanings are context-bound.D) Connotative meanings may be misunderstood.


12) Select the phrase below that uses the least biased language:A) When greeting your new boss, be sure and shake his hand.B) Due to the bravery of the fireman, the young child was rescued.C) Mankind should celebrate this invention.D) The linguists received their training at Oxford.


13) Pam and Terry were discussing their current relationship. Pam digressed from the currentsituation and began to talk about what Terry had done in the past to hurt her feelings. Thisbehavior is referred to as ________.

A) bafflegab B) bypassing C) allness D) gunny sackingAnswer: DDiff: 3 Page Ref: 94

14) Chris and Ryan are having a huge argument. Chris said to Ryan, ʺEither you love me or youdonʹt!ʺ Which of the following barriers to effective communication does this statementrepresent?

A) denotation B) polarization C) abstraction D) sexismAnswer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 81

15) When words reflect unqualified, often untrue generalizations that deny individual differencesamong people, they become the language barrier of ________.

A) bypassing B) polarization C) allness D) denotationAnswer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 83

16) Bias in language can be directed against ________.A) ageB) classC) sexual orientationD) abilityE) all of the above


38

17) Using the terms ʺhusband and wifeʺ rather than ʺpartnerʺ demonstrates ________.A) heterosexist bias B) homophobic languageC) generic language D) sexist language.


18) According to the textbook, the problem with using ʺmanʺ as a generic reference to all people, isit ________.

A) makes women seem to be the standard B) maintains sex based perceptionsC) is more awkward D) is not a problem


19) According to the textbook, which of the following is an acceptable way to use pronouns inwriting and speaking?

A) When referring to both genders, replace all ʺhesʺ with ʺshes.ʺB) When referring to both genders, use both pronouns ʺshe or heʺ rather than ʺhe.ʺC) Use the generic ʺheʺ because it refers to all human beings.D) It depends on the gender of people with whom you are speaking.


20) Using the term ʺchairmanʺ for both men and women who serve as the presiding officer at ameeting would be an example of ________.

A) generic language B) sexist languageC) allness D) bypassing


21) Using language that assumes that the world is heterosexual and that same -sex attractions donot apply is called ________.

A) sexist B) racist C) heterosexist D) homophobicAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 84

22) Jack announces at the fraternity meeting that there will be a dance next weekend, andeveryone is invited to bring their girlfriend. This is an example of ________.

A) sexist language B) heterosexist languageC) homophobic language D) generic language


23) Fred tells inappropriate jokes that make fun of people who are gay or lesbian. What type oflanguage is Fred using?

A) heterosexist language B) homophopic languageC) sexist language D) generic language


39

24) If what a word refers to can be experienced with our senses, it is described as ________.A) denotative B) connotative C) concrete D) abstract


25) ________ is the pattern and arrangement of words in a language.A) Allness B) Syntax C) Grammar D) Bypassing


26) The term ʺfriends with benefitsʺ reflects which attribute of language?A) heterosexual biasB) power to create and label relationshipsC) allnessD) power to make or break and relationships


27) Fergis is angry about the results of her English exam. She tells her roommate. ʺThe professorgypped me out of points on the essay question.ʺ Which type of bias is reflected in thisstatement?

A) allness B) bypassingC) political correctness D) sexist


28) Bafflegab is ________.A) reflective of sexual biasB) reflective of class biasC) words used in a repetitive patternD) using words as shorthand that no one can understand but you


29) Which of the following would be less likely to be considered a co-culture in the United States?A) people with disabilities B) Asian AmericansC) gays and lesbians D) U.S. citizens

Answer: DDiff: 3 Page Ref: 75, 79

30) Generic language is language that ________.A) reveals biasB) uses general terms that stand for all persons or things within a given categoryC) reflects untrue generalizationsD) reveals the assumption that the word is heterosexual


40

31) The text discusses consideration of the term ʺyou guysʺ as a generic reference. What is theproblem with this term?

A) None. It is an appropriate term to use.B) It is not generic, it contains the word ʺguys.ʺC) It is widely used and no one takes offense.D) It would be generic if you substituted the word ʺgals.ʺ


32) It is important to use nonsexist, inclusive language because ________.A) it helps you become more other orientedB) language reflects attitudesC) it demonstrates sensitivityD) All of the above are correct.


33) The term ʺmanual laborʺ reflects a ________ bias.A) gender B) age C) class D) ability


34) John uses vocabulary that most of his colleagues donʹt understand in order to appear moreintelligent. What John is doing is an example of ________.

A) manipulation B) rigidity C) superiority D) detachmentAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 93

35) ʺShe never misses a day of church. Sheʹs a real holy roller.ʺ This statement illustrates________.

A) polarization B) bypassing C) allness D) trigger wordsAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

36) In response to this sonʹs request, Tom said, ʺI donʹt care what you want! Youʹll do what I tellyou to do because I am your father!ʺ How would you most accurately categorize thisresponse?

A) It is being manipulative rather than genuine.B) It is being flexible rather than rigid.C) It is being superior rather than equal.D) It is focusing on the problem.


37) Which of the following would be considered to be a supportive response?A) evaluation B) description C) rigidity D) detachment


41

38) Billie Jo is 17 and a junior in high school. She has approached her parents about changing hercurfew from 11:30 to 1:00. When she brings up the topic, her motherʹs response is, ʺOK. Letʹssit down and talk about it. What are the reasons you think your curfew should be changed?ʺBillie Joʹs mother is treating her with

A) detachment B) rigidity C) equality D) manipulationAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 93-94

39) Stewart is upset with his roommate about the state of their dirty apartment. When they sitdown to talk, Stewart says, ʺIt upsets me when I have to pick up dirty clothes before I caninvite anyone over to the apartment.ʺ This is an example of ________.

A) evaluating others B) empathizing with othersC) controlling others D) describing feelings


40) Greg has just started his new job and is feeling overwhelmed with projects that are comingdue in a short time. He is talking with Julia, his friend and co-worker. Julia responds byrelating the frustration and confusion she felt when she started the job and offers to help Gregget back on track with his projects. This is an example of ________.

A) control B) empathy C) manipulation D) apathyAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 92

41) The Sapir-Whorf Hypothesis maintains that our thoughts are rooted in and controlled bylanguage.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 74

42) A gesture can be interpreted as a symbol.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 74

43) Meanings reside in words.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 75

44) Bypassing rarely occurs between two people who are fluent in English.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 75-76

45) The denotative meaning of the word ʺhomeʺ can be found in the dictionary.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 76

46) The textbook recommends minimizing the use of abstract words when you are trying to clarifya message.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 77

42

47) Polarization is the tendency to describe something in terms of the middle ground.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 81

48) Allness is the tendency to describe individuals in terms of their unique traits rather than theirsimilarities to others in their groups.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

49) The correct term to use when referring to an ethnic or cultural group should be determined bywhat is most commonly used.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 83

50) Allness is the tendency to describe things in extremes as though no middle ground exists.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 83

51) According to the textbook, using words such as ʺfiremanʺ and ʺpostmanʺ to represent allpeople in those professions make women seem invisible.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 84

52) Words have both connotative and denotative meanings.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 76

53) Your words and corresponding outlook have the power to affect your physical health.Answer: TRUEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 79

54) Abstract language is easier to understand than concrete language.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 95

55) The context of the communication is NOT important in determining the meaning.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 77

56) Co-cultures sometimes develop unique languages of their own.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 80-81

57) Language can be used as a method to support solidarity among groups.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 80

58) Polarization is using words to describe things in the extreme.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 81

43

59) One way to communicate flexibility is to qualify your statements with phrases such as ʺThis isjust my opinion but...ʺAnswer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

60) Being flexible mean that you are willing to agree with whatever your partner wants.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83-84


A. Abstract meaningB. BypassingC. Concrete meaningD. Connotative meaningE. Denotative meaningF. Exclusive languageG. Gunny sackingH. Heterosexist languageI. Homophobic language

61) Related to being able to experience a referent with one of the senses.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 77

62) The same words mean different things to different people.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 75-76

63) Related to an inability to experience a referent with one of the senses.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 77

64) Language that overtly denigrates persons of non-heterosexual orientations.Answer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 84

65) A personal and subjective meaning of a word.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 76

66) A restrictive or literal meaning of a word.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 76

67) Language that reveals an assumption that the world is heterosexual.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 84

44

68) Language that assumes that a given subgroup in a population is invisible or nonexistent.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 84


A. AllnessB. CultureC. GenericD. Gunny sackingE. LanguageF. MeaningG. PolarizationH. Symbol

69) General terms that stand for all persons or terms within a category.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 85

70) Language that reflect unqualified or untrue generalizations without acknowledging individualvariations within a group.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

71) Word, sound, gesture, or visual signal that represents a concept, thought, object or expression.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 74-75

72) The tendency to describe things in terms of extremes.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 81

73) A learned system of knowledge, behavior, attitudes, beliefs, values, rules, and norms sharedby a group.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 77

74) System of symbols shared by a group of people.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 74

75) Dragging up someoneʹs past mistakes and linking them to the current situation.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 94

76) The ________ Hypothesis suggests that our language and thought are so interrelated, that howwe think is based in and controlled by the language we speak.Answer: Sapir-WhorfDiff: 2 Page Ref: 74

45

77) One person describes arriving ʺearlyʺ as 15 minutes before class and another describes ʺearlyʺas 5 minutes before class. The discrepancy in the understanding of the word ʺearlyʺ is knownas ________.Answer: bypassingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 75-76

78) The ________ meaning is the level that conveys feelings, and is personal and subjective ratherthan literal.Answer: connotativeDiff: 2 Page Ref: 76

79) When we can experience the referent of a word through our senses: i.e., by touching, tasting,hearing, smelling, or seeing it, the word is described as being ________.Answer: concreteDiff: 2 Page Ref: 77

80) When we cannot experience the referent of a word through our senses; that is, we cannottouch it, hear it, see it, taste it, or smell it, the word is described as being ________.Answer: abstractDiff: 2 Page Ref: 77

81) ________ is the tendency to describe things in extremes or opposites without any middleground.Answer: PolarizationDiff: 2 Page Ref: 81

82) Language that uses general terms that stand for all persons or things within a given category is________.Answer: genericDiff: 2 Page Ref: 85

83) People who do not view themselves in terms of standard cultural constructions of male andfemale are described as ________.Answer: transgenderedDiff: 2 Page Ref: 86

84) A(n) ________ climate is one in which people experience trust, caring, and acceptance, and iscreated through the use of descriptive, empathetic, and/or genuine communication.Answer: supportiveDiff: 2 Page Ref: 90

85) A(n) ________ climate is one in which people experience hostility, mistrust, and a lack ofacceptance, and is created through communication that is evaluative, superior, and/or neutral.Answer: defensiveDiff: 2 Page Ref: 90

86) When you try to put yourself in another personʹs shoes and experience what he/she is feeling,you are using ________.Answer: empathyDiff: 2 Page Ref: 92

46

87) When a person interprets or makes sense of symbols, he or she is creating ________.Answer: meaningDiff: 2 Page Ref: 75

88) Briefly explain how a sensitive communicator might avoid offending others by avoiding biaswith his or her language.Answer: Be aware that language changes. Avoid using allness statements to refer to individuals.

Use terms to refer to ethnic groups or other groups that members of those groupsprefer. If necessary, ask which they prefer. Avoid biased language based upon sexualorientation, gender, age, class, or ability. Avoid using language that makes parts ofgroups, such as women, invisible.


89) What is exclusive language, and why is it considered a problem?Answer: Exclusive language is language that does not reflect all people who might be members

of a particular group. Traditionally, the use of ʺgenericʺ pronouns such as ʺheʺ to referto both genders is an example. Another example is the use of terms such as ʺpolicemenʺto refer to all police officers, who may be either men or women. It is considered aproblem because when most people hear a gender specific word, they picture thatgender exclusively, thus rendering others invisible. In addition, it makes the user seeminsensitive.


90) Give an explanation and an example of polarization.Answer: Polarization is the tendency to describe things in extremes. An example would be,

ʺEither you support my cause wholeheartedly, or you hate my ideas.ʺDiff: 3 Page Ref: 81

91) Explain the differences between concrete and abstract language.Answer: Meanings of words can be placed on a continuum from concrete to abstract. If we can

experience what the word refers to with our senses, it is described as concrete. If wecannot experience it with out senses, it is described as abstract. Abstract terms are moredifficult to understand or agree on a meaning. Concrete terms are more clear.


92) Briefly explain the importance of studying language.Answer: Words are powerful. Peopleʹs words impact emotions, thoughts, actions, relationships,

and culture. Studying language can improve relationships and enhance your influence.Also, you choose your language. Making effective words choices can help youcommunicate who you are to others more clearly.


47

93) ʺMeanings donʹt reside in the words themselves, but in the ways in which communicators usethe words.ʺ Explain what this statement means and give an example to illustrate it.Answer: Words are just symbols. People create the meaning for words in their minds. Words

themselves are not guilty for misunderstandings; people are. For example, a studentsays she will be ʺearlyʺ for a group meeting. In her mind, ʺearlyʺ means arriving aminute or two before the beginning of the meaning. A misunderstanding occurs whenthe other members of the group arrive 10 minutes early. They obviously interpretedʺearlyʺ in two different ways.


94) Explain what empathy is and give an example of how it can be used.Answer: Empathy is the ability to put yourself in another personʹs position in order to actually

feel or approximate the feelings of others. An example of this would be when you see afriend with a sad look on his/her face. You approach her and ask what the problem is.She tells you that her dog just died. You relate an experience in which you felt similaremotions and offer to listen to how she/he feels.


95) Explain ways in which you can present yourself as an equal rather than superior.Answer: You can use the term ʺweʺ rather than ʺyouʺ in order to build a sense of working

together rather setting yourself apart from others. Avoid using highly technical orcomplex vocabulary just to impress others. Also avoid oversimplification of language.Focus on using language that is appropriate to the situation.


96) Explain the concept of gunnysacking.Answer: Gunnysacking is reminding people of past mistakes or issues and linking them to the

current situation. If it is used as method to bring old, unrelated issues into a discussion(or argument), t can result in a negative situation where the person becomes defensive.It may be helpful if supportive communication is used to describe past incidences of thesame negative type of behavior if it reveals a pattern that needs to be addressed.


48

97) Select three of the following characteristics of language. In a well-supported answer, address(1) what it means, and (2) why it is important for an effective communicator to understandthat concept. A superior answer will contain illustrations that are original and not in thetextbook.Characteristics: (discuss 3) (1) Words are symbols with meanings.(2) Words have denotativeand connotative meanings (3) Words reflect concrete and abstract meanings. (4) Words areculture bound (5) Words are context bound.Answer: (1) Words are symbols with meanings: symbols stand for something else. When you use

a symbol, you attach a meaning to it. Others who hear the symbol attach a meaning forit as well. Communicators should be aware of this because this implies the possibilitythat people will not use the same meanings, or bypass each otherʹs meanings. (2)Denotative meanings are literal meanings that are used by most people who speak thelanguage. Connotative meanings are more personal and subjective. This is an importantdistinction because our denotative meanings help us communicate more clearly, butsometimes being explicit about our connotative meanings helps others to see a specialmessage we are trying to get across. Understanding the difference helps us adapt toothers. (3) Words reflect abstract and concrete meanings. Concrete meanings are tied toour senses; abstract words are not. If our purpose is to communicate clearly, the moreconcrete our language, the better chance we have of success. (4) Words areculture-bound. We learn our words and the uses of those words from the people in ourculture. We should take cultural and co-cultural differences into account with adaptingto another person. (5) Words are context-bound. We attach a meaning to a word basedon the context in which it is used. Therefore, it is important to look at the context to helpus(understand the communication of others. In addition, it is important to avoid takingstatements out of their context.


98) In a well-developed essay, explain the four ways discussed in the textbook that words havepower.Answer: (1) Words have the power to create and label experience. How we label something

affects how others and we react to it. In addition, the label helps us communicate theexperience to others. (2) Words have the power to impact thoughts and actions. Wemake emotional associations to labels, and sometimes react to objects by how they arelabeled. This is why companies take care in labeling their products, and why differentgroups are sensitive about labels that others use when referring to them. (3) The powerto shape and reflect culture. Language shapes how we view the world we are morelikely to attend to phenomena for which we have words. In addition, cultures havewords for things they find important. (4) The power to make and break relationships.Words are used to gain favorable responses from others and to get to know others.Thus, they are used to create relationships. Words used in a negative fashion canlikewise damage or end relationships.


49

99) Andrea was trying to tell her roommate Chris about the difficulty she has been having in hergeography class. Chris interrupted, ʺBelieve me, Iʹve seen it before, and if you go on whiningthe way you are instead of working harder you are never going to pass this class!ʺ Rewrite thisstatement using supportive language and explain the language that makes it be supportive.Answer: There are a variety of ways this response may be rewritten. Some of the points that

might be made are: First, Chris showed superiority by interrupting, saying ʺBelieve me,ʺand ʺIʹve seen it before.ʺ In addition, Chris showed evaluation rather than descriptionby blaming her own impatience on Andrea. Chris showed control by simply tellingAndrea to work harder. Chris showed rigidity by taking a certain attitude (ʺyou arenever. . .ʺ). A more supportive response would use description, ʺI feel if you. . .ʺ ;equality ʺLetʹs look at what you might do. . .ʺ ; and flexibility, ʺSometimes if you. . .ʺ


100) List three ways in which language can reflect bias. Describe how to avoid using these types ofbias in your language.Answer: (1) Bias can occur in language based upon race, ethnicity, nationality, and religion. A

sensitive communicator uses language to refer to an ethnic or religious group that ispreferred by that particular group.(2) Bias can also occur in language based upon gender and sexual orientation. Asensitive communicator avoids sexist language by avoiding masculine generic pronounsand man-linked terms that make women seem invisible. Avoid heteorsexist languagethat assumes that all people are heterosexual. For example, you could use the termʺpartnerʺ rather than ʺhusbandʺ or ʺwifeʺ. Also, eliminate all homophobic languagewhich directly insults gays and lesbians.(3) Bias can also occur based upon age, class, and ability. Age bias can be eliminated byavoiding language that calls attention to someoneʹs age. Also, be careful of languagethat stereotypes and denigrates the elderly. Be careful of glorifying youth. Be careful ofusing language that makes distinctions between classes of people such as ʺwhite collarʺand ʺblue collarʺ. Be careful of using language that calls undue attention to someoneʹsability. Also, avoid using words with negative connotations in reference to someoneʹsability such as ʺcrippleʺ, ʺretardʺ, or ʺdumbʺ but rather use terms that focus on theperson rather than the handicap (persons with disabilities rather than disables person).


101) Explain what the Sapir-Whorf Hypothesis is and give an example not found in the textbook toillustrate it.Answer: The Sapir-Whorf Hypothesis asserts that peopleʹs thoughts are strongly influenced by

language. If a word does not exist for a particular idea in that culture then a person hasno way to conceptualize that idea. For example, if the word ʺdatingʺ does not exist in aparticular culture then individuals in that culture would not be likely to ʺdateʺ beforemarriage. Therefore, arranged marriages in that particular culture would seem muchmore acceptable.


50

VOLUME 1Chapter 1.4: Understanding Nonverbal Messages

1) Nonverbal communication may best be defined as ________.A) communication that is spokenB) communication other than written or spoken languageC) communication with your bodyD) communication with your voice


2) As Libby entered the library, her friend saw her and raised her finger perpendicular to her lipsto indicate to Libby that she needed to remain quiet. What function was this behavior serving?

A) reinforcing B) complementingC) substituting D) contradicting


3) A person with a high handshake index may be perceived to be ________.A) trustworthy B) compassionate C) controlling D) extroverted


4) According to Mehrabianʹs research, the most significant source of emotional meaning in ourcommunication is ________.

A) our voice B) our words C) our face D) our postureAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 104

5) According to Mehrabian, nonverbal communication conveys ________ percent of theemotional meaning of our messages.

A) 55 B) 38 C) 93 D) 14Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 104

6) The reason we say that nonverbal communication is more believable than verbalcommunication is that ________.

A) verbal communication is a conscious activity, much of our nonverbal is notB) nonverbal communication is mostly under our conscious controlC) verbal communication is more ambiguous than nonverbal communicationD) nonverbal communication is less obvious than verbal communication


51

7) Which of the following statements is true of nonverbal communication in relationships?A) Nonverbal communication becomes less important the longer a couple is together.B) People are more likely to express dislike using verbal cues than nonverbal cues.C) Nonverbal cues often signal changes in the level of satisfaction with a relationship.D) As intimacy increases, the use of nonverbal cues decreases.


8) When the server asked Estella how many sugars she wanted in her tea, Estella silently held uptwo fingers. This is example of which function of nonverbal behaviors?

A) to contradict B) to repeat C) to substitute D) to regulateAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 106

9) Kevin wanted his grandmother to know how much he appreciated her monetary gift for hisbirthday. He gave her a big hug, and said with enthusiasm, ʺThanks Gram — I really can usethis!ʺ Kevinʹs voice and hug are examples of which function of nonverbal behavior?

A) to repeat B) to complementC) to substitute D) to regulate


10) Karla says, ʺIʹm listening,ʺ while staring intently at her computer screen rather than looking atthe client in her office. What function is Karlaʹs nonverbal communication serving?

A) to repeat B) to complementC) to substitute D) to contradict


11) ʺDo you know how many books I read last week? Five!ʺ Shawna said, holding up five fingers.This is example of which of the functions of nonverbal communication?

A) to substitute B) to complementC) to regulate D) to repeat


12) According to the expectancy violation model, which of the following will NOT influence ourresponse to a message?

A) the status of the communicatorB) the credibility of the communicatorC) the attractiveness of the communicatorD) the aggressiveness of the communicator


52

13) Which of the following nonverbal cues would be considered to be universal?A) shaking your head back and forth to indicate ʺnoʺB) looking someone in the eye to indicate honestyC) raising your eyebrows when meeting someoneD) giving a ʺthumbs upʺ to indicate approval


14) Amanda sits in the seat right next to another person in a movie theater full of empty seats. Theother person gets up and moves to another row. According to the expectancy violationsmodel, the other person responded to Amandaʹs behavior by ________.

A) reciprocating her behavior B) compensating for her behaviorC) adjusting his/her expectations D) converging with her behavior


15) According to Burgoonʹs expectancy violations model, a person seen as attractive, credible, andof high status, is viewed as what type of communicator?

A) competent B) rewarding C) trustworthy D) immediateAnswer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 110

16) A strategy for checking the accuracy of your interpretation of another personʹs nonverbalbehavior is called ________.

A) perception checking B) emotional expressionC) regulation D) adaptors


17) Which of the following statements accurately expresses the differences between verbal andnonverbal behavior?

A) Verbal behavior is continuous; nonverbal is discrete.B) Verbal behavior is less ambiguous; nonverbal is more ambiguous.C) Verbal behavior is efficient at communicating emotions; nonverbal is not efficient at

communicating emotions.D) Nonverbal behavior has similar grammar and patterns to verbal communication.


18) The statement, ʺNonverbal communication is non-linguisticʺ means that ________.A) nonverbal messages flow from one situation to the next, unlike verbal messagesB) nonverbal messages vary widely across cultural groupsC) nonverbal messages may be interpreted in a variety of waysD) nonverbal messages do not conform to the patterns of language


53

19) Kinesics is a general term for ________.A) human movement, gestures, and the use of spaceB) gestures, the use of space, and postureC) human movement, gestures, and postureD) gestures, posture, and adaptors


20) Displays of culture such as clothing, jewelry, and makeup, are called ________.A) artifacts B) gestures C) illustrators D) vocalics


21) When Keri wanted Ben to stop talking, she averted her eyes and turned her back. Thefunction of this behavior was to ________.

A) display emotion B) regulate interactionC) adapt D) illustrate


22) The University of Texas fans show the pinkie finger and the index finger to represent the sign,ʺHook ʹem horns,ʺ a reference to their mascot. This is an example of a(n) ________.

A) affect display B) regulator C) adaptor D) emblemAnswer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

23) After Aesha got off the phone her face looked like it had fallen two inches. She looked down,and walked to her room slowly. Jonna said to her, ʺWhat happened?ʺ In reading Aeshaʹs facialexpressions, Jonna was using Aeshaʹs ________.

A) affect displays B) regulators C) adaptors D) emblemsAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

24) Nonverbal messages that control the interaction of flow of communication between two ormore individuals are called ________.

A) emblems B) regulators C) adaptors D) affect displaysAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

25) Kim was constantly twirling her hair as she was talking to her teacher. Which type ofnonverbal cue showed Kimʹs nervousness?

A) emblems B) regulators C) adaptors D) substitutesAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

54

26) The stage of quasi-courtship behavior in which we comb our hair or straighten our tie is called________.

A) courtship readiness B) preeningC) positional cues D) appeals to invitation


27) Bill shows his attraction for Maureen by glancing in her direction, standing up straight, andsucking in his stomach. What stage of quasi-courtship behavior is Bill displaying?



28) Leah moves closer to George and looks directly at him. She displaying what stage ofquasi-courtship behavior?



29) In which of the following instances are people in this culture most likely to look directly attheir conversational partner?

A) when you are physically closeB) when you are discussing intimate topicsC) when you are talking rather than listeningD) when you are trying to dominate your partner


30) The study of touch is called ________.A) proxemics B) artifact C) haptics D) kinesics


31) Our personal guidelines and standards for appropriate touch are our ________.A) haptic guidelines B) back channel cuesC) territory D) touch ethic


32) Which of the following statements accurately reflects research on touch cited in the textbook?A) Recent research shows that infants donʹt need as much touch as was once thought.B) Recent research shows that women and men often have different meanings for touch.C) Recent research shows that people are touching each other more now than 25 years ago.D) Recent research shows that gender differences in amount of touch have increased.


55

33) Communicating your thoughts and emotions with your voice (aside from the words that youuse) is referred to as ________.

A) paralanguage B) gesturing C) kinesics D) affect displaysAnswer: ADiff: 1 Page Ref: 121

34) Using phrases such as, ʺI seeʺ and ʺuh-huhʺ while another person is talking are examples of________.

A) paralanguage B) affect displaysC) back channel cues D) kinesics


35) Janet discussed her performance review with her new supervisor, Mrs. Abrams. As they weretalking, Janet sat in a chair about 8 feet away from her supervisor, who was behind her desk.Which spatial zone was Janet using?

A) intimate space B) personal space C) social space D) public spaceAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 124-125

36) The accurate interpretation of nonverbal cues should be guided by ________.A) the words people say B) cultural backgroundsC) dominance D) territory


37) When Allen entered the classroom, he saw that he had a few minutes to spare, so he set hisbag down on his favorite seat and went to the foyer to get a soft drink. Allen was using his bagas a(n) ________.

A) initializer B) affect displayC) territorial marker D) status symbol


38) Nonverbal behavior that communicates liking and engenders feelings of pleasure is called________.

A) territorial marker B) immediacyC) emblems D) affect displays


39) Mehrabianʹs framework for interpreting nonverbal communication includes ________.A) immediacy, arousal, dominance B) territory, space, gesturesC) gestures, vocalics, kinesics D) power, affection, inclusion


56

40) All of the following are immediacy cues that indicate liking and interest EXCEPTA) face to face orientation. B) dominance.C) eye contact. D) open posture.


41) According to research by Albert Mehrabian, most of our emotional information iscommunicated with our gestures.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 104

42) A person may not intend for their nonverbal behavior to have any meaning at all.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 104-105

43) Nonverbal cues register on our senses from a variety of sources at the same timeAnswer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 104-105

44) Verbal communication is more believable than nonverbal communication.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 104

45) Nonverbal cues that complement are those that take the place of a verbal message.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 104

46) Sharon pointed to the Student Union as she was explaining to Tim where it was. Sharon waspointing to regulate the conversation.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 115

47) Using oneʹs voice to add intensity to a particular word is an example of using a nonverbalaccent cue.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 104

48) Generally speaking, gestures that are friendly in one culture will be friendly in another.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 105

49) Perception checking is a tool that can help us interpret other peopleʹs behavior more correctly.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 111

50) Nonverbal behaviors usually are discrete, with a definite beginning and end.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 111

57

51) The more intimate the relationship, the more we understand the nonverbal cues of ourpartner.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 110

52) According to Burgoon, we will attempt to interpret and respond to a personʹs nonverbalbehavior based on the relationship we have with them.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 110

53) Averting our eyes in order to avoid communicating with someone is an example of usingregulators.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

54) If a college student thinks a professor is attractive, he or she will give them a more positiveevaluation score.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 117

55) According to research by Edward Hall, the intimate space is used only between lovers andparents and children.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 124

56) The study of how people use space and objects to communicate ownership is called kinesics.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 114

57) Territorial markers are sometimes used to show where our own space ends and anotherʹsbegins.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 125

58) Artifacts can not be used as a display of culture.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 113

59) Mutual eye contact, smiling, and leaning forward are all examples of immediacy behaviors.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 128

60) Mehrabianʹs model of nonverbal behavior includes the areas of immediacy, attraction, andinclusion.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 127

58

61) You are more likely to make eye contact with your partner when you are discussing intimatetopics.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 118

62) Your face tends to reveal the intensity of the emotion you are feeling.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 118

63) People are more likely to correct a nonverbal rule violation by using verbal communication.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 110

64) ʺPositive silenceʺ is when you donʹt have anything nice to say.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122

65) The specific space that you and others choose depends on your cultural background.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 123


A. AdaptorsB. Affect displaysC. ArousalD. DominanceE. EmblemsF. IllustratorsG. ImmediacyH. RegulatorsI. Territory

66) Nonverbal behaviors that communicate emotions, primarily through the face.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

67) Nonverbal behaviors that help satisfy a personal need or respond to the immediate situation.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 116

68) Nonverbal behaviors that communicate liking through eye contact, forward lean, touch, andan open body orientation.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 128

69) Nonverbal behaviors that have a specific, generally understood meaning in a culture and maysubstitute for a word.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

59

70) Nonverbal behaviors that help to control the interactions between people.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

71) Nonverbal behaviors related to the degree to which a person is interested and excited.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 128

72) Nonverbal behaviors that accompany a verbal message and either complement, contradict, oraccent it.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

73) Nonverbal dimension that is communicated through relaxed posture and greater personalspace.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 129


A. ArtifactsB. Back channel cuesC. HapticsD. KinesicsE. ProxemicsF. TerritorialityG. Touch ethic

74) The study of how humans use space and objects to communicate occupancy.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 125

75) Clothing and other appearance objects we use in communicating with others.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 113

76) Personal guidelines for appropriate and inappropriate physical contact.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 120

77) The study of how touch affects communication.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 120

78) The vocal cues that signal when we want to talk and when we donʹt.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122

60

79) The study of human gestures, posture, and body movements.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 114

80) The study of how close or far away from people and objects we position ourselves.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 124

81) We say that nonverbal communication is ________, because our actions may have more thanone interpretation, and because the exact meaning of a nonverbal message may only be knownby the person displaying it.Answer: ambiguousDiff: 2 Page Ref: 110-111

82) Because nonverbal messages register on our senses from a variety of sources, we say thatnonverbal communication is ________.Answer: multichanneledDiff: 2 Page Ref: 112

83) Saying ʺAh....Umʺ to indicate that we want to speak is know as a ________ ________.Answer: back-channel cueDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122

84) Nonverbal cues that communicate emotions are called ________ ________.Answer: affect displaysDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

85) ________ are nonverbal, nervous behaviors that respond to a need, such as tapping oneʹs penand scratching oneʹs arm.Answer: AdaptorsDiff: 2 Page Ref: 116

86) The pitch, rate, and volume of oneʹs speech are all part of the nonverbal behavior called________.Answer: paralanguage or vocalicsDiff: 2 Page Ref: 121

87) How long it takes someone to respond to a statement or question is called a(n) ________________.Answer: response latencyDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122

88) ________ ________ are the things and actions that show that you have claimed occupancy orownership of a space.Answer: Territorial markersDiff: 2 Page Ref: 125

61

89) Burgoonʹs model that suggests we respond differently to people who break nonverbal rulesbased upon our interpersonal relationships with them is the ________ ________ model.Answer: expectancy violationsDiff: 2 Page Ref: 110

90) The dimension of Mehrabianʹs framework of nonverbal communication that communicates thebalance of power in a relationship is ________.Answer: dominanceDiff: 2 Page Ref: 129

91) The zone that Hall defined as public space begins at ________ feet.Answer: 12Diff: 2 Page Ref: 124-125

92) The textbook explains four reasons why studying nonverbal communication is important.What are they?Answer: First, nonverbal communication is the primary way in which we communicate feelings

and attitudes towards others. Second, nonverbal messages are usually more believablethan verbal messages. Third, nonverbal communication plays a major role in theinitiation, development, and termination of our interpersonal relationships. Finally,nonverbal works with verbal messages in the following ways: substitute, complement,contradict, repeat, regulate, or accent verbal messages.


93) Explain why perception checking can be used to help one become a better communicator.Answer: Perception checking helps you test your perceptions of the other person, thus enabling

you to more accurately interpret their intentions.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 111

94) What does kinesics study?Answer: Kinesics is the study of human movement, posture, and gesture.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 114

95) Identify and explain two of the four stages of quasi-courtship behavior.Answer: Courtship readiness occurs when we are attracted to someone. We try to adjust our

image by sucking in our stomach, standing straighter, and tensing our muscles.Preening behaviors occur when we begin to manipulate our appearance bystraightening our clothes, smoothing our hair, and double-checking our appearance.Positional cues occur when we adjust our posture and orientation so as to be noticed.We begin to move closer, lean into the other person, smiling and making eye contact.Appeals to invitation are signals that communicate our availability by close proximity,exposed skin, open body posture, and eye contact.


62

96) Explain two ways the physical environment is important to the study of nonverbal behavior.Answer: First, we make choices about the environment in which you live. These choices reveal

something about you. How you decorate it, what types of artifacts you include, howneat or messy it is tells others something about you. Second, the immediate physicalenvironment has an impact on your emotional reactions and how you react in thatenvironment. An environment may be comfortable, or uncomfortable in many ways.The formality or informality of it may affect you. The colors, furniture, and arrangementof space all affect how we interact with others in that environment.


97) Explain and give examples of the three dimensions that Mehrabian found we use to accuratelyinterpret nonverbal behaviors.Answer: Even though our nonverbal behavior varies according to such things as our culture and

the context, there Mehrabian believes there are three dimensions that provide aframework for interpreting nonverbal behavior. First is immediacy, which is acombination of nonverbal behaviors that taken together give a sense that the otherperson likes you. The second dimension is arousal, which shows the amount ofstimulation or interest in interacting with you. The face, voice, and movementcommunicate this dimension. The third dimension is dominance, which includesbehaviors that communicate the balance of power between people. Dominance may becommunicated through the use of space, body posture, and artifacts.


98) Explain what the textbook means by the ʺnon-linguisticʺ nature of nonverbal communication.Answer: Unlike verbal communication that has a large number of rules for every element

grammar, word choices, sentence structure, and definite definitions nonverbalcommunication is very complex and dos not conform to the patterns of a language.


99) Explain the concept of touch ethic.Answer: Each of us has a personal touch ethic that represents our own guidelines or standards

for what we consider to be appropriate and inappropriate touch. This is influenced byour early experiences in our family


100) Explain why nonverbal messages are more believable than verbal.Answer: Verbal communication is a conscious activity. While some nonverbal communication is

conscious, a lot of it is subconscious. Thus we do not have complete conscious controlover our nonverbal communication. Therefore, it is much easier to control your wordsthan your nonverbal responses.


63

101) Describe at least three of the six functions of nonverbal messages.Answer: Nonverbal messages can substitute or take the place of a verbal message like nodding

your head rather than saying ʺyesʺ. They can also complement, clarify, or extend themeaning of the verbal information. In other words, while you are talking (verbal) yourface and body are communicating nonverbal to enhance the meaning of what youʹresaying. They can also contradict what you are saying. For example, you could sayyouʹre happy but have a frown on your face. They can regulate the flow ofconversation. This lets your conversational partners know when you want to speak andwhen you would rather not speak. Nonverbal cues can also repeat what is contained inthe verbal portion of the message. Finally, they can accent or reinforce a verbal message.A person might do this to add emphasis to the message.


102) Explain how humans convey territoriality.Answer: Territoriality is the study of space and objects and how people use them to convey

occupancy or ownership. People use territorial markers such as placing your things in aparticular area or using locks. People also create barriers such as fences and walls tocommunicate the ownership of a space.


103) List and discuss the four reasons for studying nonverbal communication.Answer: First, nonverbal messages communicate feelings and attitudes. If we only listen to

words, not how they are said, then we will miss a great deal of the message. Researchshows that most of our emotional information is communicated through the face andvoice. Second, nonverbal messages are more believable than verbal messages. This isbecause our verbal messages are conscious and under more of our control, whereasnonverbal messages, although they may be conscious, are less a matter of choice.Nonverbal messages are also critical to successful relationships. We begin making initialimpressions of other people within the first few minutes of meeting them. As ourrelationships deepen, we learn to interpret the nonverbal behaviors of the other personmore accurately. Nonverbal cues also signal changes in the relationship. Finally,nonverbal messages serve various functions for verbal messages, including substituting,complementing, contradicting, repeating, regulating, or accenting.


104) What do each of the four zones of personal space identified by Hall communicate aboutinterpersonal relationships?Answer: Allowing someone into your intimate zone suggests that you have or desire an intimate

relationship with the other person. If this is not the case, we will feel uncomfortable andill at ease. The personal zone is reserved for people with whom we have a close, yet notintimate relationship, friends, family, and some acquaintances. Those, whom we do notknow well, such as acquaintances, will probably be kept at a greater distance thanfamily and friends. Social space reflects a more formal or professional relationship.Public space reflects relatively impersonal relationships.


64

105) In a well-supported essay, discuss the suggestions made in the textbook for interpretingnonverbal cues more accurately. Develop your points with specific examples.Answer: First, you should be aware of all of the nonverbal elements of communication. Pay

attention to those elements in addition to the words a person uses. Second, be willing toset aside your own agendas and needs momentarily to pay attention to what the otherperson may be trying to communicate. Pay attention to the cultural backgrounds ofothers you are communicating with. Sometimes even different areas of the country orstate will make a difference in communication rules. Finally, look for cues ofimmediacy, arousal, and dominance.


106) Marcela started working for a new company. At her previous work place, people were formaland distant in their communication. Therefore, Marcela was surprised to find that her boss,whom Marcela thought to be a competent individual, often pulled up a chair close to her deskwhen she was explaining company procedures. Although this violated Marcelaʹs idea of howpeople communicate in the workplace, it did not seem to bother her and in fact she began touse a closer distance when communicating with her boss. Explain what Marcela experiencedusing Burgoonʹs expectancy violations model.Answer: Marcela had expectations of appropriate nonverbal behavior at work. She expected

people to maintain a less personal distance when communicating. However, her bossviolated this expectation. Marcela found her boss to be a ʺrewardingʺ individualbecause she had higher status in the work place and was a credible individual. Becauseher boss was aʺrewardingʺ rather than a ʺnon-rewardingʺ individual, she reciprocatedthe behavior without forming a negative impression of her boss rather than correctingthe behavior.


65

107) Explain and give an example of at least five nonverbal codes.Answer: The codes of nonverbal information include appearance, body movement, gestures, and

posture (kinesics), eye contact, facial expressions, touch, vocalics, and use of thephysical environment. Appearance deals with body size and shape, skin color,hairstyle, and clothing. An example of appearance would be wearing certain types ofclothing (artifacts) such as a cowboy hat and boots to indicate that you worked on aranch. Kinesics is the study of movement, gestures, and posture. An example of thiswould be using gestures (illustrators) to accent what you are saying or the general waya person carries himself or herself that could indicate confidence. Eye contact dealswith how often we look at our conversational partner, and it conveys trustworthinessand sincerity. For example, if you are truly interested in what someone is saying youare likely to increase eye contact. Facial expressions are another nonverbal code thatdeal with the emotions and reactions on peopleʹs face. A personʹs jaw might drop insurprise. Touch or haptics is the most powerful form of nonverbal communication.You might give someone a hug to convey closeness or affection. Vocalics deals with thenonverbal aspects of voice such as rate, pitch, volume and use of silence. For example, aperson might speed up their rate of delivery to convey excitement. Territoriality dealswith how humans use space. For example, a person might put his/her books on a deskto indicate that she/he intends to sit there. Also, people use space or proxemics tocommunicate with others. For example, you might only let your intimate partner andclose family members enter your intimate space of zero to one and a half feet.Environment also communicates a lot about who we are as individuals. For example,someoneʹs office may be extremely messy indicating that he/she is extremely busyand/or disorganized.


108) What is response latency? How might it be interpreted?Answer: Response latency is the amount of time it takes someone to formulate a response to a

statement or question in a conversation. This silence may mean that you are thinking orthat you do not wish to engage in conversation. It may also be a sign of respect orstatus, or an indication of anger or discomfort. You may also be so comfortable withyour conversational partner that conversation is not necessary (positive silence).Response latency has also been studied as a possible indicator of deception.


66

VOLUME 1Chapter 1.5: Listening and Responding

1) Americans spend approximately 90% of their day communicating, and of that 90% whatpercent of the time do they spend listening?

A) 15% B) 25% C) 35% D) 45%Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 138

2) Hearing is ________.A) how we make sense out of what we process through auditory channelsB) a complex process of selecting stimuli from the environmentC) a synonym to listeningD) the physiological process of decoding sounds


3) Listening involves the following processes:A) awareness, rejecting, decoding, remembering, reactingB) selecting, attending, understanding, remembering, respondingC) selecting, acknowledging, comprehendingD) attending, sorting, interpreting, filtering, rehearsing


4) Which of the following most accurately depicts the relationship between hearing andlistening?

A) Hearing and listening are the same thing.B) Listening is a physiological process; hearing is a conceptual activity.C) Hearing is automatic; listening requires conscious effort.D) Listening and hearing are both passive activities.


5) The stage of listening in which we filter through the myriad of noises in our environment is________.

A) selecting B) attending C) understanding D) respondingAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 140

6) The stage of listening in which we maintain a sustained focus on a particular sound ormessage is ________.

A) selecting B) recalling C) decoding D) attendingAnswer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 141

67

7) As Juan sat in his biology lab, the lab instructor was droning on about the techniques ofvivisection. Juan kept thinking about the concert he was planning to attend on the weekend.Which of the following stages of listening is Juan having the most trouble with?

A) selecting B) attending C) remembering D) respondingAnswer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 141

8) Karl felt lost in his astrophysics class. Although he wrote down everything his instructor said,the terminology was totally new to him. None of the concepts related to anything he had everexperienced before. In addition, much of the instruction was based on equations and symbolsthat he didnʹt recognize. Which listening stage is Karl having trouble with?

A) selecting B) attending C) understanding D) respondingAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 141

9) Which stage of listening involves making sense out of what you hear by relating it to your pastexperiences and knowledge?

A) selecting B) attending C) understanding D) respondingAnswer: CDiff: 1 Page Ref: 141

10) Rob was attending an orientation program at his new job. He had lots to do in his newposition and wanted the orientation to be brief and to the point so he could get back to work.How would you describe his listening style?

A) people oriented B) action orientedC) content oriented D) time oriented


11) Linda listens to her friend intently as he gives her directions to her house so she can attend asurprise party for a friend. She writes down every detail of what he says. Once she arrives athis house, she no longer employs such detailed listening. She can sit back and enjoy theconversation. Linda was able to change her way of listening because she was able to do whichof the following?

A) mentally summarize the messageB) identify her listening goalC) link message details with the major idea of the messageD) practice by listening to difficult material


12) Keri really enjoys talking with people, learning about them, and sharing personal information.How would you describe Keriʹs listening style?

A) time oriented B) content orientedC) people oriented D) action oriented


68

13) Joshua called his uncle to get instructions for driving to the airport. It was important to him toknow which highways to take, which terminal to go to, and where to park. Joshuaʹs listeninggoal was to ________.

A) enjoy B) learn C) evaluate D) empathizeAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 156-157

14) Don was working on his new job. When asking his new boss for information, he noticed hisbossʹ answers tended to ramble on and this made Don second guess what his boss was saying.This frustrated Don when all he wanted was information. Donʹs listening style would bedescribed as ________.

A) time oriented B) action orientedC) people oriented D) content oriented


15) Which of the following are included in listening to evaluate?A) separate facts and inferencesB) identify pertinent information we want to rememberC) take down notes on everything the speaker saysD) try to put yourself in the speakerʹs shoes


16) Michael is thinking about what he wants to tell Amanda about what happened at his new jobrather than listening to the story she is telling. This is an example of which of the followingbarriers to listening?

A) self-focus B) emotional noiseC) criticism D) processing rate


17) Which of the following is a useful strategy for combatting self-focus?A) Attend only to messages that you will find interesting.B) Focus on your agenda in the listening situation.C) Concentrate and stay focused on the message.D) Listen intently without giving feedback.


18) Which of the following is a recommended strategy for dealing with emotional noise?A) Focus primarily on the speakerʹs emotions.B) Avoid expressing your emotions.C) Use self-talk to manage your emotions.D) Immediately respond to the listener with your own emotional response.


69

19) Max is attempting to listen to his friend on the phone while watching a baseball game ontelevision. This example illustrates which of the information processing barriers to listening?

A) receiver apprehension B) shifting attentionC) processing rate D) information overload


20) Our ability to process information is at ________ words per minute while the rate at whichinformation is spoken is ________ words per minute.

A) 200-400; 150 B) 600-800; 125 C) 600-800; 400 D) 400-600; 200Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

21) Karen expresses to her husband that she is frustrated by his lack of help with householdchores. However, he does not seem to be listening because he has just returned from workand is exhausted. This is an example of what type of barrier?

A) information B) information-processing barrierC) context barrier D) attention barrier


22) Which of the following is included in the skills needed to listen with empathy?A) listen primarily for the contentB) take very thorough notesC) offer adviceD) try to feel what the other person is feeling


23) Your roommate has just returned from giving her speech. She is visibly upset and begins tocriticize the instructor as an incompetent old fuddy-dud. You sit patiently while she continuesher tirade against the instructorʹs criticism of her performance. When she is done, you say, ʺItmust be really frustrating to have something you worked so hard on evaluated so harshly.ʺThis response indicates you are listening for what purpose?

A) enjoyment B) learning C) evaluation D) empathyAnswer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 158

24) Teri was meeting with her new supervisor to review the duties involved in her new position.As Teri listened, she was feeling fearful that she would overlook or forget something sheheard at the meeting. What should she do to improve her listening skills?

A) Nothing, this is just receiver apprehension.B) Become involved by mentally repeating information.C) Ask her supervisor to speak more slowly.D) Move the conversation to a different time of day.


70

25) On his way to class, Isaac overheard his professor in the hallway discussing those ʺradicalBible thumpersʺ with a fellow professor. Isaac felt a personal sting and just couldnʹt get thesound of that phrase out of his mind. Later, while in the professorʹs class, he found that he wastaking poor notes and really didnʹt understand the lecture for that day. Which of the followingbest describes the cause of Isaacʹs failure to listen in class?

A) self-focus B) emotional noiseC) information overload D) environmental noise


26) According to the textbook, criticism can be a barrier to listening unless you ________.A) accept all the speaker says rather than forming judgments about him or her.B) are conscious of when the speakerʹs distracting mannerisms or appearance affect your

listening.C) form arguments against the speakerʹs points as you are listening.D) simply tune out speakers that are boring or controversial.


27) Information processing rate can be a barrier to listening because ________.A) people are normally capable of processing information faster than most speakers speakB) people are hardly ever capable of processing information as fast as most speakers speakC) there is such a wide variety of processing abilities among people that no matter how fast

or slow you speak, it will not be appropriateD) recent research shows that there is little connection between speaker rate and listening

effectivenessAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

28) In regard to the barrier of information processing rates, the textbook suggests that you________

A) use the extra time in listening to summarize points the speaker has madeB) use the extra time in listening to form counter arguments against the speakerC) compensate for fast talkers by taking notes and asking questionsD) train yourself to listen more efficiently by selecting about one-seventh of the information

that is givenAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 154

29) The textbook recommends which of the following in dealing with information overload?A) Use information ʺtriage,ʺ that is, filter through the information and attend to what is

most urgent.B) Become actively involved by asking questions.C) Focus on the speakerʹs visual aids, usually vital information is summarized in the visual

aids.D) Write down everything the speaker is saying, so you can review it later.


71

30) As Karen sat in the classroom, she could barely hear the professor over the hum of the hugeceiling fans. Which barrier to listening does this describe?

A) self-focus B) emotional noiseC) processing rate D) external noise


31) In their model for improving listening, the textbook authors suggest ʺStop, Look, and Listen.ʺThe step, ʺStopʺ refers to ________.

A) stop talking B) stop being self-focusedC) stop moving around D) stop processing


32) Clarissa was busy thinking of the things she needed to pack for her trip to the shore thefollowing day. Her friend, Beth, called her to tell her about a minor car accident she hadearlier that day. Clarissa stopped thinking about her packing list and focused on whathappened to Beth. Clarissa was using what listening technique?

A) identifying her listening goal B) listening to evaluateC) summarizing the message D) decentering


33) Stepping away from your own thoughts and attempting to experience the thoughts of others isreferred to as ________.

A) information processing B) posturingC) decentering D) awareness


34) Which listening skill involves paying attention to nonverbal messages such as the personʹsposture and body movement?

A) stop B) look C) listen D) respondAnswer: BDiff: 1 Page Ref: 155

35) Roberto comes running into the house visibly agitated. Between Robertoʹs sobs, his dad picksout ʺbike,ʺ ʺsledgehammer,ʺ ʺMiguel,ʺ and ʺhate.ʺ After some coaxing, Roberto tells his dadthat Miguel was kicked out of the game because he wasnʹt playing fair and later came backwith a sledgehammer and hit his bike. Father says, ʺYou must have really been mad when hebroke the rules and a little bit afraid when he hit your bike with the sledgehammer.ʺ Robertoreplies, ʺUh Huh.ʺ Which skill for responding with empathy is Robertoʹs father using?

A) ask questions about the situationB) reflect content and feelings by paraphrasingC) select content that is importantD) evaluate the emotions of the message


72

36) David sees Joe and says, ʺHey Joe. I just donʹt know what to do. Iʹve got a term paper inJohnsonʹs class, a group project in marketing, my boss wants me to work overtime this week,and now Mary is after me to go visit her parents over the weekend.ʺ Which of the followingwould be an appropriate paraphrase of content to Davidʹs statement?

A) Well, obviously, youʹve got to decide on your priorities.B) So, what are you going to do?C) Mary wants you to meet her parents?D) You sound like you have a lot of demands on your time, Dave.


37) Julio was talking to his new boss and noticed that as she listened, she was making eye contactwith him and noting the relationships between some of the duties she was covering. Julioattributed this behavior to ________.

A) difference in processing rateB) emotional noiseC) shifting attention between peopleD) differences in listening styles between men and women


38) When the purpose of feedback is to teach, it is most important to be ________.A) descriptive B) active C) timely D) brief


39) When paraphrasing emotions, you should do which of the following?A) Repeat exactly what your partner has said.B) Add your own commentary to what the other person said.C) Keep in mind you own agenda.D) Use your own words.


40) Which of the following statements is true of active listeners?A) They are engaged in listening with their minds and their hearts.B) They are constantly thinking of an appropriate response.C) They do most of the talking.D) The offer nonverbal feedback.


41) Melanie responds to her friend by saying, ʺYouʹre opinions are completely off base. Youobviously have no understanding of the issues.ʺ Melanieʹs comments violate which of thefollowing tips for responding effectively and appropriately?

A) Melanie is not being descriptive. B) Melanie is not offering timely advice.C) Melanie is not being brief. D) Melanieʹs feedback is not specific.


73

42) Karen is telling her friend Melanie about the recent layoffs at her office and her concern aboutwhat will happen if sales donʹt improve. Melanie responds by asking Karen if she is scaredabout the prospect of losing her job. This response was ________.

A) inappropriate because it asked for personal informationB) an appropriate method for checking how Karen feltC) a good way to clarify Karenʹs conclusionsD) being more descriptive of Karenʹs experiences


43) People spend more time speaking than listening.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 138

44) Listening is the physiological process of decoding sounds.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 140

45) The selecting activity in the listening process is a matter of sorting through all the sounds thatreach your ears.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 140

46) Attending to a message means to maintain a brief focus on a part of a particular message.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 141

47) Humor can be an effective way of holding our attention.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 141

48) Attending occurs when we relate what we hear or see to our knowledge.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 141

49) Responding to messages is considered to be part of the listening process.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 142

50) Attending is when we sort through various sounds competing for our attention.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 141

51) Content oriented listeners like brief, short messages.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 144

52) Women are better at shifting attention between simultaneous messages than men.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 151-152

74

53) It is important to know your listening style.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 143

54) About the only time we use listening to learn is when we take a lecture class.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 156

55) Listening to evaluate includes assessing the validity and reliability of the information onehears.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 158

56) Listening skills can be improved by listening to difficult material.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 159

57) Studies show that most people have the capacity to listen four to ten times faster than the rateat which most people speak.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

58) Receiver apprehension is being fearful of the misinterpretations that your listener will makewhen they decode your message.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 151

59) Observing nonverbal behaviors is an important part of listening.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 140-141

60) The best listeners are those who can combine the male and female approach to listening.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 157

61) Asking appropriate questions is one of the methods given for listening with empathy.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 158

62) Paraphrasing means repeating back to the other person exactly what they said word for word.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 165

63) Overusing paraphrasing can irritate others.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 165

75


A. AttendingB. HearingC. ListeningD. RespondingE. RememberingF. Second guessingG. SelectingH. Understanding

64) Recalling information in the short and long term.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 142

65) Focusing on a particular message.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 141

66) Involves receiving, constructing meaning, and responding to verbal and nonverbal messages.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 140

67) The physiological process of decoding sounds.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 140

68) Direct eye contact and head nods to let your partner know you are paying attention.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 142-143

69) Sorting through information in the environment.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 140

70) Interpreting information by relating it to your past experiences.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 141-142

76


A. Barrier of time and placeB. CriticismC. Emotional noiseD. External noiseE. Information overloadF. Processing rateG. Receiver apprehensionH. Self focusI. Shifting attention

71) This can cause a barrier because we can understand faster than people talk.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

72) Focusing on a speakerʹs delivery rather than the content of their message.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 149

73) Fatigue and frustration caused by attempting to attend to multiple messages simultaneously.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

74) Uneasiness about being able to adequately understand and remember a message.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 151

75) Strong responses to a word or concept that can get in the way of accurately decodinginformation.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 148

76) Focusing on your own needs and agendas rather than on what the speaker is saying.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 147-148

77) Not being aware and considering the location where a conversation takes place.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 152

78) Difficulty in listening because you try to multitask.Answer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 151

79) The five activities of listening include ________ in which we sort through information that isavailable in our immediate environment.Answer: SelectingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 140

77

80) The five activities of listening include ________ in which we focus on a specific message,depending upon our immediate needs, our interests, or other source factors such as vividness.Answer: AttendingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 141

81) The five activities of listening include ________ in which we interpret information by relatingit to our past experiences.Answer: UnderstandingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 141

82) The five activities of listening include ________ in which we give verbal or nonverbal feedbackto the speaker.Answer: RespondingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 142

83) The five activities of listening include ________ in which we retain information either in ourshort-term or long-term memories.Answer: RememberingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 142

84) Ben is afraid that he will misunderstand what others say to him. He experiences ________________.Answer: receiver apprehensionDiff: 2 Page Ref: 151

85) Questioning the assumptions underlying a message describes ________ ________.Answer: second guessingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 144

86) ________ oriented listeners prefer to focus on emotions and feelings.Answer: PeopleDiff: 2 Page Ref: 144

87) Listening in order to connect with the other personʹs emotions is called listening to ________.Answer: empathizeDiff: 2 Page Ref: 158

88) The textbook discusses a simple listening model with three steps. The first, ________, means tofocus on others rather than yourself. The second, ________, means to pay attention to thenonverbal messages of the other person. The third, ________, means to understand both thedetails and the major ideas of the speaker.Answer: stop; look; listenDiff: 2 Page Ref: 154-158

89) Responding mentally, verbally, and nonverbally is a speakerʹs message is known as ________________.Answer: active listeningDiff: 2 Page Ref: 159-160

78

90) When you check the accuracy of your understanding of your partnerʹs message by offering asummary in your own words, you are ________.Answer: paraphrasingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 165

91) List and briefly define the five activities of listening as discussed in the textbook.Answer: Selecting is sorting through the available information in the environment. Attending is

focusing on a specific message, whether for a short time or a longer duration.Understanding is interpreting or making sense of the message you have received, whichincludes relating it to what you already know. Remembering information is recallinginformation either with short-term or long-memory, and is how we determine whetheror not a message was understood. Responding involves communicating with the otherperson to let them know you understand their message, and may be either verbal ornonverbal.


92) What is the difference between listening and hearing?Answer: Hearing is an automatic, physiological process that requires little conscious effort on the

part of the receiver. Hearing something does not mean you have listened to it. Listeningis a more active process that involves conscious effort and is an essential skill in thecommunication process that includes selecting, attending, understanding, remembering,and responding.


93) What are the four categories of listening goals? Give an example of each.Answer: (1) Listening to enjoy: listening to a comedian, enjoying a play or a movie, talking with

friends for fun. (2) Listening to learn: taking notes in a lecture, listening to directions,listening to learn a new skill. (3) Listening to evaluate: being a critical listener learningto distinguish between fact and inference, and judge the reliability and validity ofinformation. Examples include listening to a sales pitch, and listening to a persuasivespeech. (4) Listening to empathize. Listening to a friend or co-worker who has aproblem.


94) Summarize three differences between the listening styles of men and women as discussed inthe textbook.Answer: Although broad generalizations can be misused, research has found a few general

differences between how men and women approach listening. Men tend to listen forpatterns, tend to listen for the ʺbig pictureʺ, direct their listening efforts toward a goal,listen to solve a problem, focus on the bottom line, and see the purpose of listening as toreceive facts. Women tend to be more empathic and subjective, look for relationshipsamong pieces of information, and rely more upon meaning communicated throughnonverbal behavior. They listen to establish personal relationships; they can focus onmore than one thing at a time and tend to shift between competing messages.


79

95) Briefly explain the three types of self-barriers to listening.Answer: Three self-barriers discussed in the textbook are self-focus, emotional noise, and

criticism. Each involves attending more to personal concerns that to the speakerʹscontent or emotions. First, self-focus, occurs when we think more about our ownagendas or issues than the speakers. We may plan the rest of our day, or worry aboutwhether or not we left our car windows rolled down. Second, emotional noise, refers toour strong ʺtriggerʺ response to perhaps something that was said or done to which weare sensitive. Our emotional reaction gets in the way of our cognitive ability to listen.Third, criticism, is when we are distracted by the speakerʹs appearance or mannerismsat the expense of his/her content.


96) Discuss at least three antidotes for self-focus suggested in your textbook.Answer: Become aware of the problem by noting when you are drifting off rather than paying

attention to the speaker. Concentrate on the message even if you feel that it is boring.Relate what the speaker is talking about to your own interests. Become activelyinvolved in the communication process by taking notes, giving feedback, and writingdown words and phrases you donʹt understand.


97) Identify and briefly explain the four listening styles.Answer: People oriented listeners prefer to focus on emotions and feelings communicated either

verbally or nonverbally by others. Action oriented listeners prefer messages to becommunicated in a well organized, brief, and error free manner, They want to get tothe point and may be more skeptical, second guessing the assumptions underlying amessage. Content oriented listeners are comfortable with complex and detailedinformation and are likely to see a message without facts and evidence as being lessimportant. Time oriented listeners like brief, short messages.


98) What are the four guidelines for responding with empathy?Answer: Understand your partnerʹs feelings, ask appropriate questions, paraphrase content,

paraphrase feelings,Diff: 2 Page Ref: 163-168

99) How does our information processing rate affect our ability to listen?Answer: Processing rate is the difference between the rate which someone speaks (125 words per

minute) and the rate at which people can listen (600 to 800 words per minute). In otherwords, a listener has time to focus on his or her own thoughts rather than the speaker.To overcome this problem, a listener should use the extra time to mentally summarizewhat the speaker is saying.


100) Describe four strategies to improve the effectiveness and appropriateness of your responses.Answer: You should be descriptive rather than evaluative. In other words, describe your

reactions to the message rather than judging the message. You should also be timely.Donʹt wait too long to provide a response. Also, be brief or do not offer moreinformation than is necessary. Finally, give useful information rather than irrelevantinformation.


80

101) Explain the difference between external noise and emotional noise.Answer: External noise is a context barrier that may be caused by sights, sounds, taste, smell, or

touch. Emotional noise is a self barrier occurring when emotional arousal from words,phrases, or differences in cultural background interferes with communicationeffectiveness.

Diff: 3 Page Ref: 148-149, 152-153

102) Use the five steps of the listening process to describe how you listen to a lecture.Answer: Answers may differ, but they should all employ the five steps of the listening process to

explain what happens as they listen to a lecture. What follows is an example. As I listento a class lecture, I must select the sounds, words, and nonverbal behaviors that arecompeting for my attention. Since I know the material the professor is addressing issomething I need to know, for the exam if for no other reason, I attend to what theteacher is saying and block out competing or distracting sounds from elsewhere. If theteacher speaks well, he or she will help me to listen by using humor or connecting ideasto concrete or real things. As I listen, I will seek to understand what the professor issaying by trying to relate what I hear to what I already know. By connecting the ideasand concepts discussed by the teacher, I will try to remember the information bypushing it into long-term memory, but most likely I will lose most of it in short-termmemory. Thatʹs one reason I take notes, so I can review the material again later. As I tryto understand and listen, I will respond to the teacher by use of eye contact, facialexpressions that communicate confusion or boredom, asking questions, or makingcomments


103) Identify and explain the three steps of the process for improving your listening.Answer: The three steps for improving listening are stop, look, and listen. To stop means to

become aware of and minimize the effect of internal and external distractions thatinterfere with listening. The use of self-talk can help us shift our focus from ourselves tothe other. We can talk to ourselves in an effort to deliberately tune out distracting orcompeting messages. To look means to become aware of both the speakerʹs and yourown nonverbal behavior. Pay attention to the speakerʹs nonverbal behavior and assessits impact on your understanding of the message. Pay attention to your own nonverbalbehavior and what it may communicate about your interest in the speaker. When youlisten search for the essence of the speakerʹs thoughts. Make sure you understand yourgoals in listening and mentally summarize your understanding of the message. Weaveyour understanding of details into a comprehensive understanding of the speakerʹsmessage.


81

104) Your sister, Monica, is telling you about her three roommates. It seems none of them willfollow the schedule they agreed on for cleaning the kitchen and the bathrooms. Monica hasjust about had enough -- she returned from a weekend away only to find the living room fullof empty pizza boxes and beer cans. ʺI just donʹt think I can live like this anymore. I canʹtafford to find another place, but Iʹm so upset I canʹt focus on the research paper thatʹs due nextweek,ʺ she complains. Using the skills of empathetic listening, discuss the four techniques andgive an example of each that would be an appropriate response to Monica. In addition, explainthe expected consequences from using this type of listening with your sister.Answer: The first step of listening with empathy is to understand your partnerʹs feelings. This

involves ʺdecenteringʺ yourself, so that you are focused on the other person and theirfeelings rather than on your own feelings or thoughts. If you have experienced exactlythe same situation, you might remember the frustrations you felt. At any rate, to helpyou accomplish this, put aside what you were doing and give her your full attention.The next technique is to ask questions. You might be seeking clarification, moreinformation, or checking to see if your interpretation is clear. You might ask Monica,ʺDid they tell you about their plans for a party?ʺ ʺDid they apologize and say theywould clean it up?ʺ In addition, you can use paraphrasing. Paraphrasing for content isputting into your own words the information you received. ʺYou said that you cameback after being gone for only a weekend?ʺ Also, you may paraphrase for feelings. ʺYousound really at the end of your rope and angry.ʺ Using these techniques allows you toclarify any information you might have misunderstood, understand her feelings, allowher to clarify her feelings, communicate to her that you are enough to listen, and helpher work through her situation.


105) Describe each of the four information processing barriers and give an example of each one.Answer: Processing rate deals with the fact that we can process information much faster than

people can speak. This causes a problem because we have a lot of mental free time toexplore our own thoughts rather than concentrating on the message of the speaker. Anexample of this would be when you listen to a lecture, your mind may wander and youbegin to think about your plans for the day rather than the material in the lecture. Information overload deals with the fact that our society is becoming moretechnologically advanced and the amount of information that we have to deal with isoverwhelming. Too much information can dull our attention. At this point,information triage can help us determine what is important. Receiver apprehensiondeals with being fearful of misunderstanding a message from others. People sufferpsychologically because they are fearful of incoming messages. For example, Sally hasnever taken an upper level math class before, therefore, she experiences a lot of anxietyin her Calculus class. As a result, she is unable to concentrate and listen to theprofessorʹs lecture. There are many different messages competing for your attention.For example, you could be trying to talk to a friend on your home phone, surf theInternet for a current news report, and answer your cell phone all at the same time, thuscausing you to shift your attention.


82

106) Explain and give an example of each of the three self-barriers to listening.Answer: First, people can become self-focused by paying more attention to their own internal

thoughts than the message of the speaker. An example of this would be thinking aboutyour own problems rather than focusing on message your friend is trying to send toyou. Emotional noise occurs when a word, a concept or idea, or the emotional state ofthe speaker cause emotional arousal which can be a distraction for the listener. Thelistener may be tempted to focus more on his or her emotions or the emotions of thespeaker rather than the message at hand. For example, Maria is strongly againstdrinking alcohol, therefore, when she heard that Pat was giving a speech on the benefitsof alcohol she immediately focused on her own emotions and tuned out what Pat had tosay. Criticism deals with making hasty judgments about the speaker and/or his or hermessage. For example, Bob noticed that his professor was wearing socks that did notmatch. He became so focused on the mismatched socks that he couldnʹt remember aword that his professor said.


107) Discuss the four different listening styles. What is the significance of knowing your ownlistening style?Answer: People oriented listeners prefer to focus on emotions and feelings communicated either

verbally or nonverbally by others. Action oriented listeners prefer messages to becommunicated in a well organized, brief, and error free manner. They want to get to thepoint and may be more skeptical, second guessing the assumptions underlying amessage. Content oriented listeners are comfortable with complex and detailedinformation and are likely to see a message without facts and evidence as being lessimportant. Time oriented listeners like brief, short messages. They are typically busypeople who gauge their success by what they accomplish.

Knowing your own listening style can help you adapt and adjust your style to others.Diff: 3 Page Ref: 143-144

83

VOLUME 1Chapter 1.6: Adapting to Others: Bridging Culture

and Gender Differences

1) The integration of ________ and ________ contributes to a worldwide, interconnected businessenvironment.

A) economics and travel B) economics and technologyC) technology the media D) economics and culture


2) A learned system of knowledge, behavior, attitudes and norms shared by a group of people isa(n) ________.

A) small group B) organization C) culture D) globalizationAnswer: CDiff: 1 Page Ref: 182

3) A cultural group within a larger culture is referred to as a ________.A) trans-culture B) bi-culture C) semi-culture D) co-culture


4) Larry visits a Russian company to present a business proposal. His interaction with this groupwould be considered an example of ________.

A) culture shock B) cultural resourcesC) worldview D) intercultural communication


5) The perceptions shared by a group of people about their key beliefs and issues is their________.

A) cultural context B) masculine cultureC) worldview D) individualistic culture


6) The sense of confusion, anxiety, stress, or loss experienced when encountering a culturedifferent from oneʹs own is referred to as ________.

A) intercultural communication B) culture shockC) transcultural anxiety D) low self-esteem


84

7) Which of the following statements is true concerning cultural context?A) It primarily involves communication through language.B) It involves verbal cues only.C) It is communicated primarily through environment and nonverbal cues.D) It is about globalization.


8) Which of the following is a characteristic of a high-context culture?A) Little emphasis is placed on nonverbal cues in the communication process.B) Knowledge is an important commodityC) Information tends to be segmented and compartmentalized.D) Unspoken cues are a rich information source


9) Which of the following cultures would be considered a low-context culture?A) United States B) Japan C) Mexico D) Iraq


10) People from the United States often think that individual choice and achievement is important.This would be an example of ________.

A) cultural context B) a cultural valueC) culture shock D) a co-culture


11) According to Hofstedeʹs research, which of the following is a typical value of a masculineculture?

A) caring for the less fortunateB) traditional roles for men and womenC) building relationships is more important than the taskD) being sensitive toward others


12) According to Hofstedeʹs research, which of the following is a typical value of a feminineculture?

A) traditional roles for men and women are valuedB) personal high achievementC) assertivenessD) enhancing the overall quality of life


85

13) Which of the the following is a characteristic of a culture that has a greater tolerance foruncertainty?

A) People like to know what will happen next.B) Rigid rules for behavior are enforced.C) Elaborate codes of conduct are enforced.D) People have relaxed, informal expectations for others.


14) According to Hofstedeʹs research, which of the following is a characteristic of a culture that hasa high level of uncertainty avoidance?

A) People have relaxed, informal expectations of others.B) Ambiguity is valued.C) Elaborate codes of conduct are enforced.D) People donʹt mind not knowing what is going to happen next.


15) Which of the following is a characteristic of a culture that values a decentralized approach topower?

A) Leadership is shared by many people.B) Most of the decisions are made by one or two people.C) There are clear lines of authority in who reports to whom.D) It is assumed that some people have more power and influence than others.


16) Which of the following is a characteristic of a culture that values a centralized approach topower?

A) There are clear lines of authority in who reports to whom.B) Leadership is spread out among a number of people.C) Power and influence are shared by many people.D) Decisions are made by consensus.


17) Which of the following is a characteristic of a collectivist culture?A) Individuals only feel responsible for taking care of themselves and their immediate

families.B) A high value is placed on individual achievements.C) Individuals expect a great deal of loyalty and support from others in the group.D) Teamwork is difficult to put into place.


86

18) Which of the following is a characteristic of an individualist culture?A) Group achievement is rewarded more than individual achievement.B) Individuals feel responsible for taking care of themselves and their immediate families.C) Individuals expect a great deal of loyalty and support from others in a group.D) Team collaboration is more important than individual effort.


19) Which of the following statements correctly reflects the textbookʹs definition of gender?A) It is based upon genetics only.B) Itʹs a personʹs sex.C) It is a psychologically based perception.D) Social experiences have little influence upon gender.


20) Which of the following is an example of how parents reinforce sex-based expectations forboys?

A) Boys receive more attention when they fall.B) Boys are taught to explore greater distances.C) Boys are encouraged to express their emotions.D) Boys are held more gently.


21) Which would be an appropriate way to respond to research suggesting that there aredifferences between the way men and women communicate?

A) Work to conform to the way your sex is expected to communicate.B) Disregard the differences because men and women are essentially the same.C) Use the information to adapt your communication based upon the situation.D) Assume that everyone of the same sex will communicate in the same way.


22) An instrumental orientation may be paraphrased as ________.A) ʺOne for all and all for oneʺB) ʺMe against the worldʺC) ʺDo unto others as you would have them do unto youʺD) ʺThe nail that sticks up gets hammered downʺ


23) An expressive orientation emphasizes ________.A) fostering harmonious relationships B) personal success at all costsC) individuality D) getting the task accomplished


87

24) The instrumental orientation is described as a/an ________ approach while the expressiveorientation is described as a/an ________ approach.

A) androgynous; ethnic B) ethnic; masculineC) feminine; masculine D) masculine; feminine


25) Research discussed in the textbook on gender suggests that men take a more contentorientation approach to communication. This means that they ________.

A) value communication as a way to build friendshipsB) have bigger vocabularies than womenC) talk longer and more assertively than womenD) view communication as a means of information exchange


26) The relational dimension of communication ________.A) primarily involves the verbal messageB) is the ʺwhatʺ of the communication messageC) involves the tone of voice and facial expressionsD) is primarily used to report information


27) The attitude that oneʹs own cultural values are superior to others is called ________.A) intercultural reactions B) ethnocentrismC) individualism D) global differences


28) Which of the following statements is true concerning finding similarities?A) An accurate way to assess similarities is to focus on appearance and clothing.B) It is important to understand a personʹs background and cultural values.C) Finding similarities cannot enhance communication.D) Once we find similarities, we can assume the other person will have similar views on

most issues.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 198

29) Stereotyping is ________.A) the belief that oneʹs own cultural values are superior to those of othersB) a judgment of someone based on an assumption that you already know relevant facts or

information about themC) an emotional reaction similar to the reaction being experienced by the other personD) to place a person or group into an inflexible, all encompassing category


88

30) Donald Brown found that people in all cultures share a list of universal behaviors. Which ofthe following is NOT included in that list?

A) Beliefs about death B) A division of labor by sexC) Value some degree of conflict D) Have rules for etiquette


31) Kawtar visited Italy for a summer student exchange program. When she arrived, she hadtrouble communicating with her host family because she knew very little Italian. What barrierto communication did Kawtar face?

A) assuming superiority B) using different communication codesC) stereotyping D) having different cultural frameworks


32) To become competent at a task, you need three things. What are these?A) flexibility, motivation, and skill B) motivation, skill, and practiceC) knowledge, motivation, and flexibility D) knowledge, motivation, and skill


33) Stephanie felt uncomfortable when she gave her first speech in class. She was the onlyAfrican-American in her class; all the other students were white. She had been raised in aneighborhood in St. Louis that was predominantly African-American, and she wasaccustomed to frequent audience responses that meant involvement with and support of thespeaker. When her classmates sat there passively without saying a word and making fewfacial expressions, she felt they were bored, perhaps even hostile. Before her second speech,she continually told herself, ʺThey donʹt mean to be rude or disinterested, they just havedifferent cultural rules for appropriate behavior during a speech.ʺ This helped her feel moreconfident during her speech. Stephanie was using which method of adapting to the audience?

A) bafflegabs B) self-talk C) empathizing D) visualizationAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 205

34) Social decentering is the ________.A) process of mentally verbalizing messages that help a person become more mindfulB) cognitive process through which we take into consideration another personʹs thoughts,

values, background, and perspectivesC) emotional reaction that is similar to the reaction being experienced by othersD) focusing on oneself in the midst of a social situation


35) A strategy for becoming other-oriented in which you feel the emotional reaction the otherperson is experiencing is ________.

A) ethnocentricism B) adaptationC) sympathy D) empathy


89

36) The opposite of being other-oriented is to be ________.A) individualistic B) egocentric C) assertive D) adaptive


37) Which of the following most clearly describes the difference between empathy and sympathy?A) In empathy you acknowledge feelings; in sympathy you donʹt.B) In empathy, you feel sorry; in sympathy you donʹt.C) In empathy, you experience a similar emotional reaction; with sympathy you donʹt.D) There are no differences - empathy and sympathy are the same thing.


38) Gregʹs new job required that he make a sales presentation in Korea. When he arrived, he wasstressed due to the differences in language, customs, and food. How would you best describewhat Greg was feeling?

A) globalization B) culture shockC) difference in worldviews D) exposure to co-cultures


39) According to Hofstede, every culture establishes values relating to ________.A) individualism vs collectivismB) distribution of powerC) ethnocentrisicmD) communication dimensionsE) Both A and B


40) Which of the following is described in the text as a barrier to adapting to others?A) assuming differencesB) identifying differencesC) seeking informationD) assuming similaritiesE) Both A and D


41) Because someone is from another culture, you probably donʹt have anything in common withthem.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 178-179

42) A worldview is a perception shared by a culture about key beliefs and issues.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 184

90

43) A culture in which people derive much information from nonverbal and environmental cues isdescribed as a co-culture.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 183

44) In a high-context culture, the meaning is constructed more on subtle information such as facialexpressions and silence than on the words that are used.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 185

45) In a low context culture, language and the meaning of words is not as important as subtlecontextual cues such as facial expressions and voice.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 185

46) Masculine cultures value non-traditional sex roles for men and women.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 189

47) Feminine cultures value such things as being sensitive toward each other over beingcompetitive.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 189

48) Cultures with high uncertainty avoidance scores tend to establish rigid codes of conduct.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 186

49) Cultures that tend to have equal distribution of authority and control have a decentralizedapproach to power.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 188

50) The more skilled you become at speaking another language, the better you will understand thetraditions and customs of the culture where it is spoken.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 203

51) Social decentering is an emotional process.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 206

52) Sympathy is an acknowledgement that someone is feeling a certain emotion.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 208

53) There are more similarities than differences in how men and women communicate.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 195

91

54) Attending more to how something is said rather than what is said would be focusing on thecontent dimension of the message.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 195

55) An expressive orientation toward communication values assertiveness and action.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 195

56) Stereotyping is the judgement of others based on the assumption that we already know all weneed to know.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 201

57) Stereotyping helps us consider the uniqueness of others.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 201

58) Nonverbal cues are part of communication codes.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 202

59) Nonverbal behaviors have a common interpretation that do not depend on culture.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 202

60) An androgynous communication style exhibits both masculine and feminine characteristics.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 191


A. Co-cultureB. CultureC. Culture shockD. GlobalizationE. High-context cultureF. Intercultural communicationG. Low-context cultureH. Worldview

61) Cultures that assign most of the meaning based on nonverbal cues and the environment, andless of the meaning on the words in a message.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 185

62) A learned system of knowledge, behavior, attitudes, beliefs, values and norms that is sharedby a group of people.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 182

92

63) Feelings of stress and anxiety a person experiences when encountering a culture different fromhis or her own .Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 184

64) A group that exists within a larger cultural context.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 183

65) Interaction between or among people who have different cultural traditionsAnswer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 184

66) Perceptions shared by a group about key beliefs and issues. such as death, God, and themeaning of life.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 184

67) Cultures that assign most of the meaning in an interaction to the words; relatively littlemeaning is assigned to the nonverbal behaviors and environment.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 185


A. AdaptationB. AndrogynousC. EgocentricD. EmpathyE. EthnocentricismF. MindfulG. Self-talkH. Social decenteringI. StereotypingJ. Sympathy

68) Exhibiting both masculine and feminine characteristics.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 191

69) The process of mentally verbalizing messages that helps a person become more aware of howhe or she is processing information and reacting to life situations.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 205

70) The process of acknowledging that someone may be feeling a certain emotion; to be sorry for aperson.Answer: JDiff: 2 Page Ref: 208

93

71) The cognitive process in which we take into account another personʹs thoughts, values,background, and perspectives.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 206

72) Believing that your cultural traditions and assumptions are superior to others.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 197

73) The process of developing an emotional reaction that is similar to the reaction beingexperienced by another person.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 207

74) Adjusting your communication behavior in accordance to what someone else does.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 208

75) Being focused one oneʹs self and oneʹs self importance.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 206

76) Placing a person or group into an inflexible, all encompassing category.Answer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 201

77) A culture that values teamwork over individual accomplishment would be known as a(n)________ culture.Answer: collectivisticDiff: 2 Page Ref: 186

78) A culture that values personal accomplishment would be know as a(n) ________ culture.Answer: individualisticDiff: 2 Page Ref: 186

79) ________ context cultures are those that emphasize nonverbal cues and the immediateenvironment over words when interpreting messages.Answer: HighDiff: 2 Page Ref: 185

80) Information about a message that is communicated through nonverbal and environmentalcues describes the ________ context.Answer: culturalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 184

81) Cultures that value having power in the hands of a smaller number of people are described as________.Answer: centralizedDiff: 2 Page Ref: 198

94

82) ________ cultures are those that value relationships, caring for the less fortunate, and do notvalue traditional male and female roles.Answer: FeminineDiff: 2 Page Ref: 189

83) ________ is the cognitive process in which we take into account another personʹs thoughts,values, background, and perspectives.Answer: Social-decenteringDiff: 2 Page Ref: 206

84) Being ________ is to be consciously aware of what you are doing and how you arecommunicating with others.Answer: mindfulDiff: 2 Page Ref: 194

85) ________ is the process of developing an emotional reaction that is similar to the reaction beingexperienced by another person.Answer: EmpathyDiff: 2 Page Ref: 207

86) A masculine approach to communication that involves assertiveness and action is described asa(n) ________ orientation.Answer: instrumentalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 194

87) Define culture shock and give an example.Answer: Culture shock is the feeling of apprehension and anxiety one feels with interacting with

or in a culture that has different values from oneʹs own. Examples may vary and mayhave to do with language, traditions, food, nonverbals, etc.


88) Briefly explain at least two differences between a masculine and a feminine culture.Answer: Masculine cultures value getting things done, achievement, heroism, material wealth,

and traditional sex roles. Feminine cultures value nurturing, taking care of the lessfortunate, and seeking peace and harmony with others. Feminine cultures do not valuetraditional sex roles for men and women.


89) Explain the concept of worldview and offer one example of your own.Answer: Worldview is the perception shared by a culture or group of people about key beliefs

and issues such as death, God, and the meaning of life. Your worldview will influenceyour interaction with others. It is described as the ʺlensʺ through which you view theworld. Examples may include belief in life after death, the belief or nonbelief in a god,etc.


95

90) What is globalization? How is it affecting our ability to communicate?Answer: Globalization is the integration of economics and technology that is contributing to a

worldwide, interconnected business environment. Globalization changes the way wework and communicate because we have the capability to communicate with othersfrom all around the world rather than being limited by geography. This will put us indirect contact with others whose cultural background is different from our own.Adapting to other cultures is becoming more vital to successful business ventures.


91) Briefly explain two characteristics of an individualistic culture.Answer: In an individualist culture, the individual is considered more important than the group.

One assumes responsibility for self, and perhaps for oneʹs immediate family, but notmuch for other extended groups. Individual achievement is rewarded over groupachievement, implying that competition within the group becomes a means ofmotivation. Because of this, teamwork in an individualist culture may take a great dealof training and effort to be successful.


92) Explain the concepts of instrumental orientation and expressive orientation. How is eachrelated to cultural values?Answer: Instrumental orientation refers to a general outlook that assertiveness and action are

important, and a value of ʺme against the world.ʺ In terms of communication, aninstrumental orientation includes the use of communication as a tool to accomplishsomething or solve a problem. Gender research indicates that males in our culture aresocialized to take an instrumental orientation. An expressive orientation emphasizesconnections with others and establishing relationships. Communication is seen as a wayto build relationships rather than as a tool; hence, communication is a goal within itselfrather than simply a means to an end. Gender research indicates that in this culture,females are socialized in an expressive orientation.


93) What are two ways you can seek information about another culture?Answer: When communicating with a person from another culture, you can observe closely by

watching for implied messages about values, norms, roles, and rules about his/herculture. You can also research another culture by studying history, art, geography andother aspects of culture. You can also study the language of that group. Although youobtain research about a culture, be careful of making stereotypical judgments aboutindividuals based upon your research.


94) Explain why listening and asking questions is valuable for adapting to people from differentcultures.Answer: When we encounter people from different cultures, we may experience anxiety from

uncertainty. Asking thoughtful questions and taking the time to listen to the responsewill help you develop a greater understanding of how the person will behave andconfirm the accuracy of your expectations and assumptions. Asking questions andlistening will help reduce the level of uncertainty.


96

95) Define self talk. How can it help you cope with culture shock?Answer: Self talk is inter speech (communication with yourself) that helps you become more

mindful about how you are processing information and relating to life situations. Forexample, when you encounter a culture that is different from your own (culture shock),mentally verbalizing messages to help you deal with the stress helps you maintain yourcomposure and communicate more appropriately and effectively.


96) What is meant by social decentering?Answer: Social decentering is a cognitive process by which we attempt to put ourselves into the

shoes of another person. The purpose of this is to help us adapt to others byunderstanding their motivations for their actions and reactions. It is important, becausewithout it, our communication behaviors will be self-centered and aimed only at whatwe wish for ourselves.


97) Explain the concept of ethically adapting your communication to others.Answer: Ethical communication is responsible, honest, and fair. It enhances human dignity and

is not coercive, but finds ways to meet the goals of all involved. It does not meanabandoning your own principles but adapting your communication so it is appropriateand sensitive to the needs of others.


97

98) Explain and give examples for two of the five barriers to effective interculturalcommunication.Answer: Assuming superiority: Ethnocentrism is a belief that our own culture, its values and

assumptions, are superior to another culture. This may lead to negative interpretationsof another cultures traditions and lead to the communication of superiority. If I were totravel to a Latin country, I might find their easy going approach unacceptable and anindication of laziness. This attitude could inhibit communication and create a negativeor hostile atmosphere.

Assuming similarity: Different communication codes may result in confusion due tosimply not knowing the symbols and their meanings. Even if you can translate thelanguage, the use or meaning of the terms or concepts may vary. In England, the wordʺbootʺ is a term used to refer to the trunk of a car. An American might be confused ifasked to put something in the ʺboot.ʺ

Assuming differences: It can be just as detrimental to assume someone is differentfrom you as it is that we are all alike. Research has indicated that there are manysimilarities that all cultures share such as beliefs about death, division of labor by sex,childhood fear of strangers, experience of certain emotions such as envy, pain, jealousy,shame, and pride, etc. Communication effectiveness is diminished when we assume weare different in every way.

Stereotyping and prejudice are based on inaccurate and negative impressions that wehave of others that do not allow for individual or cultural differences. They tend to beall encompassing categories applied to members of a group. A stereotype that identifiesAfricans as ignorant and backward people could seriously impair economic orhumanitarian interactions. Assuming similarity can impact intercultural communicationby identifying similarities in beliefs and behavior that are not there. While humanbeings have certain similarities, cultural differences can generate wide discrepancies inhow people understand the world and act. Americans tend to place great emphasis ontimeliness, other cultures do not. Assuming that someone adopts the same approach totimeliness may result in considerable frustration and ill will.

Different communication codes may cause misunderstanding due to the differencesand interpretation in languages and nonverbal behaviors.


98

99) Discuss in detail the two methods in the process of becoming ʺother-oriented.ʺ In yourdiscussion, include steps for accomplishing each one.Answer: Being other-oriented means seeing the world from the other personʹs viewpoint, or as

the old cliche goes, walking a mile in their shoes. The two methods to accomplish thisare social decentering and empathizing. Social decentering is a cognitive activity,focusing more on the thoughts, values, and background of the other person. What aretheir reasons for doing what they do? Steps to doing this include considering your ownpast experiences that might be similar, comparing their present behavior to what theymay have done in the past, and understanding how most people might behave insimilar situations. This last step includes understanding cultural or co-cultural normsfor behaviors in a given situation.

The second method is showing empathy, which is experiencing the same feeling as theother person. Steps for experiencing empathy include stop, look, and listen. (stopfocusing on yourself, look for nonverbal responses, and ask) In addition, imagine howyou would feel, and paraphrase the thoughts and feelings of the other person.


100) Discuss the difference between empathy and sympathy and give an example of each term.Answer: Empathy is feeling the emotional reaction that the other person is experiencing. You do

this by assessing how you felt in a similar situation and imagine how the other personfeels in this situation. For example, you may observe that your best friend looks upset,and you ask her what is wrong. You learn that she failed a Calculus exam. You recall atime when you did poorly on an English composition and recall the emotions you felt.Then, you imagine how you would feel if you were in her position. You ask questionsto gain more information and paraphrase what happened as well as her emotions.Then, you listen and observe her response. Sympathy means that you acknowledge theemotions of the other person and be compassionate toward the other person. Incontrast to empathy, sympathy does not involve experiencing the emotional reaction ofthe other person. For example, your friendʹs aunt dies, so you call her on the phone toexpress to her that you are sorry about her loss.


99

101) Kamala plans to leave Nepal and study at a university in the United States. Explain howKamala could use the three strategies in the textbook to adapt to others who are different fromher in the United States.Answer: First, Kamala could seek information. If she knows people from the United States, she

could observe interactions to learn values, norms, roles, and rules. If she does not knowanyone directly, perhaps she could contact a pen pal from the United States tocorrespond with about the culture in the United States and on American collegecampuses. She could also read books about American culture, surf the web to findinformation about culture and the university, and take a course to polish her skills inEnglish.

Kamala could also listen and ask questions. Once she arrives in the United States, shemust be open to communicating with others. She must ask thoughtful questions thatwill help her understand cultural norms and university life. Then, she must take time tolisten carefully to the responses given to reduce her uncertainty.

Kamala must also realize that all her questions will be not be answered immediately.She must tolerate ambiguity. Although U.S. culture tends to be explicit, she will stillhave to be patient.

Kamala must also be mindful and realize that everyone is not just like her. Forexample, she notices that Americans are much more vocal in their interactions in thanstudents in Nepal. She realizes that while this behavior would be considered rude inNepal, this behavior is valued in the United States

Also, Kamala can become other-oriented by focusing on others rather than beingegocentric. She can develop deeper interpersonal relationships by socially decenteringand seeing how others view the world and empathizing with others.


100

VOLUME 2Chapter 2.1: Understanding Interpersonal

Communication

1) According to the textbook, a definition of interpersonal communication that defines it as anyface-to-face interaction between two people is omitting the notion of ________.

A) message B) meaning C) quality D) nonverbalAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 4

2) Marsha and Karen have been friends since grade school. They both deeply value oneanotherʹs opinions, and they both play an important role in one anotherʹs life. This examplebest illustrates what aspect of interpersonal communication?

A) quality B) simultaneous communicationC) mutual influence D) helps manage relationships


3) Mattie and Nancy first met each other on the job. Since they saw each other everyday andworked together, they became fiends. This situation best describes a relationship of ________.

A) choice B) circumstance C) time D) social distanceAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 5

4) Kirk had developed an online relationship with Kara. According to our text, how might thisrelationship be different than a face to face relationship?

A) It is more convenient.B) There is a lack of emphasis on physical attraction.C) There is increased compatibility.D) The ease of daily communication.


5) According to the textbook, relationships that are most likely to last are established betweenpeople who are ________.

A) similar in dispositions and preferencesB) dissimilar in dispositions and preferencesC) attracted because theyʹre differentD) complementary to us


101

6) Which of the following statements is true concerning physical and sexual attraction?A) People generally are sexually attracted to everyone that they find physically attractive.B) People can be physically attracted to someone that they do not find sexually attractive.C) A standard ideal for physical and sexual attraction exists.D) Physical and sexual attraction are the same thing.


7) Sandra tells Rhonda, ʺI find it interesting that all my boyfriends have been someone I met atwork or someone who lived next door to me. It makes breakups very messy. I wish I couldexpand my dating pool.ʺ The fact that Sandra dates people she meets at work or next doorneighbors can be explained by which of the following aspects of interpersonal attraction?

A) matching hypothesis B) similarityC) complementarity D) proximity


8) Maria is frustrated in her relationship with Andre because he always decides where they aregoing to go eat, what movie they will watch, and whose car they will take when they go out ona date. This example illustrates that Andre has high ________ needs.

A) inclusion B) affection C) control D) securityAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

9) Millie always want to receive a hug from everyone, but she also likes to give people hugs andgive encouragement and compliments. What interpersonal need does this illustrate?

A) inclusion B) control C) security D) affectionAnswer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

10) Ned is always having dinner parties at his home. He invites everyone he knows from workand church to his home. Ned probably has a high need to ________.

A) control others B) be affectionate toward othersC) include others D) make people feel secure


11) According to the definition given in the textbook, which of the following situations would beclassified as interpersonal communication?

A) The usher at the theatre looks at your tickets then points to the center aisle.B) You and your roommate are discussing a movie you just watched.C) You call the weather line to find out the forecast.D) You present your project to your history class.


102

12) Grace had just met John and she sensed that there was real potential for developing arelationship with him. This best describes ________.

A) attraction B) short term initial attractionC) long term maintenance attraction D) similarity


13) Tyler and Anissa met online. Their online discussions quickly began to cover very personaltopics and they engaged in a high level of self disclosure. This is described as a/an ________.

A) complementarity relationship B) long term maintenance attractionC) immediacy D) inverted developmental sequence


14) The tendency to seek out individuals who represent the same level of physical attractivenessas ourselves is explained as ________.

A) proximity B) inclusionC) matching hypothesis D) a relationship of choice


15) When do relationships of circumstance occur?A) when we communicate interpersonally with anotherB) when we intentionally seek out the relationshipC) when the lives of two people overlap in some wayD) when the other person is not present


16) Tasha and Marcus have been happily married for ten years. Tasha admires the way Marcustackles a task, and his commitment to see it through. Marcus admires the way Tasha is able tosee the humor in any situation, and her ability to make other people feel at ease. This of thefollowing terms best describes their feelings?

A) short-term initial attraction B) long-term maintenance attractionC) exploration D) proximity


17) The idea of complementarity is that ________.A) we are attracted to people who are opposite from ourselves on certain qualities and

needsB) we are attracted to people who pay us a lot of complimentsC) we are attracted to people who have similar values to our ownD) we are attracted to people who are about as physically attractive as we consider

ourselves to beAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

103

18) Will Schutz identified three interpersonal needs that motivate us to form and maintainrelationships with others. Those needs are ________.

A) emotional, physical, and spiritual B) verbal, nonverbal, and cognitiveC) inclusion, control, and affection D) personality, attitude, and extroversion


19) Which of the following statements would be the best response to a compliment about apresentation that you just gave?

A) ʺMy presentation was great wasnʹt it. I spent the last month working on itʺB) ʺI didnʹt really rehearse. I donʹt think it was any good.ʺC) ʺIt was up to par, but yours was much better.ʺD) ʺThank you.ʺ


20) A communication strategy of reducing our uncertainty by observing others and observingsituations is describing a/an ________ strategy.

A) passive B) active C) interactive D) transactiveAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

21) Nonverbal and verbal cues that indicate liking are referred to as ________.A) immediacy B) complementarityC) proximity cues D) inclusion cues


22) Which of the following statements best reflects verbal immediacy?A) ʺI really enjoyed the movie I saw last week.ʺB) ʺThe point you made in the meeting was right on target, Janet.ʺC) ʺI am so relieved I didnʹt drop my note cards during my speech!ʺD) ʺDid you see the look on Mr. Grantʹs face when Sharon asked that question?ʺ


23) Which of the following statements best describes the focus of uncertainty reduction theory?A) how we communicate our attraction to other peopleB) how we form our sense of self-worth in our relationshipsC) how we determine the value of our interpersonal relationships to our livesD) how we attempt to get information about other people in order to understand them

betterAnswer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

104

24) Tim had been watching Pat all semester in class, although they had never really talked. At firsthe thought that Pat was about as interesting as a piece of toast, but as the semester progressedhe could tell from Patʹs comments that Pat had a very dry, biting sense of humor. He began tothink that Pat might be an interesting person to be friends with. What information reductionstrategy is Tim using?

A) passive B) active C) interactive D) strategicAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

25) All of the following are true statements about self disclosure EXCEPTA) self disclosure involves risk.B) what is high self disclosure for one person may be low self disclosure for another person.C) self disclosure is highest in the developmental stages of a relationship.D) most people have the same expectations about self disclosure.


26) Darin saw his cousin, Malika, talking to a girl he had been interested in. Later, he askedMalika if the girl was involved in a relationship with anyone. What type of strategy was Darinusing to gather information about the girl?

A) passive B) active C) interactive D) strategicAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 15

27) Their first night in the residence hall, Karl invited his new roommate to go to the union toshoot some pool and eat a pizza. What strategy was Karl using to gather information about hisroommate?

A) passive B) active C) interactive D) strategicAnswer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 15

28) Karlaʹs friend, Jessica, always had to have the last word. If Karla complained about a difficulttest, Jessica would say, ʺThatʹs nothing, you should see the tests Dr. Brown gives.ʺ If Karla isexcited about a trip she is going to take, Jessica would say, ʺOh, Iʹve been there lots of times.ʺJessica could be described as having ________.

A) conversational narcissism B) other-orientationC) complementarity D) immediacy


29) One method the text suggests to avoid being a conversational bore is to ________.A) have some great stories to tell about yourselfB) just smile a lot; you donʹt really need to say anythingC) keep a good repertoire of jokes and stories to keep the other person laughingD) Show interest and concern by asking great questions


105

30) The Johari window is a model that demonstrates that self disclosureA) stays relatively consistent for most people in most relationshipsB) changes from relationship to relationship, but stays the same for the duration of that

relationshipC) differs from person to person for each relationship, and changes during the stages of

relationshipD) A and B are true, but not C


31) According to the textbook, the normative amount of emotional expression shown byAmericans is ________.

A) more than most other culturesB) less than most other culturesC) about the same as most other culturesD) behavior falls in the middle of most other cultures


32) In the Johari window, information that you know and you have disclosed to other peoplerepresents which quadrant?

A) open B) hidden C) blind D) unknownAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 25-27

33) In the Johari window, the unknown quadrant _______.A) is hypothetical, but is probably nonexistent for most peopleB) is fairly large for people who are introspectiveC) represents that part of yourself that others are aware of but you are notD) represents information about yourself that you have yet to discover


34) A common pattern in this culture is for one personʹs self-disclosure to be followed by a similarself-disclosure from the other person. This is the characteristic of self-disclosure known as________.

A) reciprocity B) appropriatenessC) assessment D) reflexivity


35) Eileen and Roberto study together for their communication class. They find themselvesdiscussing a wide variety of topics, but have kept their personal disclosures minimal and theinteraction superficial. This relationship would be characterized as having ________.

A) depth but little breadth B) breadth but little depthC) neither much breadth nor depth D) depth and breadth


106

36) According to the text, menʹs friendships with other men are based on ________.A) self disclosure B) proximityC) shared activities D) compatibility


37) Altman and Taylorʹs model of social penetration illustrates ________.A) how people reduce uncertainty about each other in the early stages of a relationshipB) how people make use of verbal and nonverbal communication to form impressions of

the otherC) how much and what kind of information we reveal in various stages of a relationshipD) how men and women communicate differently in friendship relationships


38) According to the textbook, as the level of intimacy in a relationship increases the amount ofself disclosure ________.

A) also increases B) decreasesC) stays the same D) depends on the relationship


39) According to Altman and Taylorʹs model of self disclosure, communication between partnersat the intimate level is ________.

A) broad but not deep B) deep but not broadC) neither broad nor deep D) both broad and deep


40) Which of the following will NOT influence the amount of emotions we are likely to display?A) our cultureB) our familyC) our genderD) our relationshipsE) the time of day


41) The textbook recommends that the best definition of interpersonal communication is simplyface-to-face interaction between two people.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 4

42) The notion of ʺqualityʺ of our communication implies that we treat the other person as aunique human being rather than as a role.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 4

107

43) It is rare for a long term relationship to be maintained solely on the basis of what you initiallyfound attractive in the other person.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 7

44) You may be physically attracted to someone but not be sexually attracted to them.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 9

45) We are less likely to be attracted to people who are far away from us physically andgeographically.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 9

46) Interpersonal communication is used to negotiate the nature of a relationship.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 9

47) The influence of proximity is minimized in online relationships.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 10

48) Research cited in the textbook found that with dating partners and college roommates,similarity in the emotional dimensions of the relationship were more important than otherdimensions of attraction.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 8

49) According to the textbook, notions of physical attractiveness are universal across cultures.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 9

50) If you have a high need for control, you will be compatible with someone who has the sameneed.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

51) An affection need is one in which we need to include others in our activities, or be included intheirs.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

52) According to uncertainty reduction theory, one of the main reasons we communicate withothers is to reduce our ambiguous feelings about them.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

108

53) In opening a conversation with someone you donʹt know, the textbook recommends that youlook for something you might have in common with that person.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 13

54) Asking great questions is one of the techniques recommended by the textbook for havingconversations.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 18-19

55) Reciprocity in self-disclosure is the tendency to reveal only superficial information inrelationships that are not intimate.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 21

56) In general, as the level of intimacy in a relationship increases, the amount of disclosure tendsto increase.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 22

57) Research cited in the text found that the primary method used by men to build friendships isby disclosing intimate information.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 27-28

58) Conversational narcissism can be a personality trait or a temporary style.Answer: TRUEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 18

59) The unknown quadrant in the Johari window represents information that others know aboutus that we do not know.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 25-27

60) When we self disclose, we make ourselves vulnerable and forfeit control of information.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 21

109


A. AppropriatenessB. BreadthC. DepthD. ImmediacyE. Johari windowF. ReciprocityG. Self disclosureH. Social penetration model

61) Variety of topics or information that you could disclose about yourself.Answer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 24

62) We share information about ourselves and expect others to do the same.Answer: FDiff: 3 Page Ref: 21

63) When you discuss your most personal information, you achieve this in your self-disclosure.Answer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 24

64) Knowing their right time in relationships to share certain information.Answer: ADiff: 3 Page Ref: 22

65) Voluntarily providing previously unknown information about ourselves to others.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 21

66) Model that deals with what we know about ourselves and otherʹs perceptions of us.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 25-27

67) Models that demonstrates how much and what kind of information we provide.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 24

110


A. AffectionB. ControlC. ComplementarityD. InclusionE. IntimacyF. Long term maintenance attractionG. Matching hypothesisH. ProximityI. Short term initial attractionJ. Similarity

68) The need to be loved and accepted by others; the need to give love and acceptance to others.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

69) The likelihood of being attracted to people who are physically close rather than to those whoare farther away.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 10

70) A tendency to seek out individuals who represent the same level of physical attractiveness asoneself.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 9

71) The need to make decisions and take responsibility; or the level of willingness to accept othersdecision-making.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

72) A degree of potential for developing an interpersonal relationship with someone.Answer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 7

73) The need to involve others in oneʹs activities; or, the need for others to involve one.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

74) The tendency to be attracted to persons with abilities, interest, and needs that differ from oneʹsown, but that balance or round out oneʹs own.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

75) A level of liking or positive feeling that motivates one to maintain or escalate a relationship.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 7

111

76) Having similar characteristics, values, attitudes, interests, personalities with another person.Answer: JDiff: 2 Page Ref: 8

77) A relationship that forms situationally, simply because oneʹs life overlaps with another insome way is a relationship of ________.Answer: circumstanceDiff: 2 Page Ref: 5

78) The ________ quadrant in the Johari Window represents information that is known by self butis not revealed to others.Answer: hiddenDiff: 2 Page Ref: 25-27

79) In the Johari Window, information that is known by self and others is represented by the________ quadrant.Answer: openDiff: 2 Page Ref: 25-27

80) Altman and Taylorʹs model looks at the ________ of information, which refers to how manydifferent issues are discussed by two people. In addition, the model looks at the ________ ofinformation, which looks at the level of intimacy represented by that information.Answer: breadth; depthDiff: 2 Page Ref: 24-25

81) A relationship that is sought out and intentionally developed is a relationship of ________.Answer: choiceDiff: 2 Page Ref: 6

82) A ________ ________ attraction is a level of liking or positive feeling that motivates one tomaintain or escalate a relationship.Answer: long-term maintenanceDiff: 2 Page Ref: 7

83) The ________ ________ is the tendency to seek out individuals who represent the same level ofphysical attraction as ourselves.Answer: matching hypothesisDiff: 2 Page Ref: 9

84) The tendency to be attracted to persons with abilities, interests, and needs that differ fromoneʹs own, but that balance or round out oneʹs own, is called ________.Answer: complementarityDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

85) ________ is the need to involve others in oneʹs activities or to be involved in the activities ofothers.Answer: InclusionDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

112

86) Perception checking and getting information from third parties describes the ________ strategyof uncertainty reduction.Answer: activeDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

87) ________ ________theory studies the driving human motivation to increase predictability byreducing the unknown in oneʹs circumstances.Answer: Uncertainty reductionDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

88) As a relationship becomes more intimate, the amount of self disclosure ________.Answer: decreasesDiff: 2 Page Ref: 22

89) The communication style reflected in the belief that one is the center of the universe is________ ________.Answer: conversational narcissismDiff: 2 Page Ref: 18

90) In defining interpersonal communication, the textbook says that interpersonal communicationmust involve quality. What is meant by the word quality?Answer: A quality interaction is one in which people treat each other as unique human beings,

rather than as simply someone who fulfills a role.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 3

91) What is the difference between a relationship of circumstance and a relationship of choice?Give a few examples of each.Answer: Relationships of circumstance are unintentional and are formed simply because some

part of our life overlaps with a part of anotherʹs. Often, the teachers, coworkers, andclassmates a person meets are the product of circumstance. Relationships of choice areones we deliberately seek out. Our friends, spouses, and even counselors fall within thiscategory.


92) What is interpersonal attraction?Answer: Interpersonal attraction is the degree to which one desires to form and possibly

maintain an interpersonal relationship with another person. It includes positive regardfor that person; feelings of attraction change during different stages of a relationship.

Diff: 2 Page Ref: 7

93) What is/are the difference(s) between short-term initial attraction and long-term maintenanceattraction?Answer: Short-term initial attraction is the degree to which we sense a potential for developing a

personal relationship. Long-term maintenance attraction refers to the level of liking orpositive feeling that motivates us to maintain or escalate a relationship. It is rare for usto maintain a relationship solely on the basis of what we initially found attractive abouta person.

Diff: 2 Page Ref: 7

113

94) Explain uncertainty reduction theory. How might we go about reducing our uncertainty?Answer: Uncertainty reduction theory is based upon the assumption that people use

communication to reduce uncertainty about other people. We are motivated to do thisin order to be able to predict and explain the other personʹs behaviors under specificcircumstances. We can reduce our uncertainty through passive strategies of awarenessand observation, active strategies that involve perception checking or gettinginformation from a third party, or interactive methods where we go directly to thesource to reduce our uncertainty.


95) Explain the impact of uncertainty in online relationships. How does it influence the strategieswe use? What are the potential drawbacks?Answer: In an online situation, we generally use interactive strategies to reduce uncertainty. In

this situation, sending and Email or starting an online conversation tends to induce lessuncertainty than a face to face conversation. Online exchanges usually happen inprivate, with less potential for embarrassment and less emphasis on physicalappearance. The drawbacks are the uncertainty that one may have about beingdeceived in an online environment.


96) Marvin has trouble engaging people he doesnʹt know in conversation. Once he has gotten pastthe initial introduction, heʹs at a loss for words. Describe for Marvin the two methodsrecommended in the textbook.Answer: First is the use of the great question. Get to know a person by asking questions that will

help that person open up and tell you about him or herself. It is important to listencarefully, and word your questions based upon what their answers are. As you aredoing this, look for areas of common interests. If you do offer information of your own,such as an opinion, draw them into the conversation by asking ʺDo you agree?ʺ Second,is the use of giving and receiving compliments. One scholar referred to compliments asthe ʺsocial lubricant,ʺ meaning that compliments create a positive atmosphere, makingway for more comfortable communication. Compliments should be in good taste, ofcourse; do not go overboard so that you will be perceived as a flatterer, and be carefulwith appearance kinds of compliments that might be taken as sexual-harassment.


97) List and briefly describe each of the quadrants in The Johari Window.Answer: The open quadrant is what is known to self and what is known to others. The hidden

quadrant is information you know about yourself, but itʹs not known to others. Theunknown quadrant is not known to self or others. The blind quadrant represents whatis not known to self but is known to others.


114

98) Briefly describe and explain the social penetration model.Answer: The social penetration model is a unique way of describing each individual relationship

we may have by examining the breadth and depth of information that is disclosed ineach interpersonal relationship. The breadth of information represents the wide rangeof topics you could discuss about yourself. While you may have a lot of breadth,intimacy is not achieved without depth. Depth has to do with discussing topics on amore deeply personal level. Each relationship may be described in various levels ofbreadth and depth depending on the amount of self disclosure and areas that arediscussed.


99) Why should we assess the risks of self-disclosure?Answer: While relationships can be deepened through self-disclosure, we must assess risks

because we make ourselves vulnerable every time we disclose. Not only do we losecontrol of information about ourselves, we could potentially offend someone, signal adeeper level of intimacy than was intended, or even damage a relationship bydisclosing at the wrong time. It is important to assess a relationship to find out whatyour partner is comfortable with discussing at a particular time.


100) In a well-supported essay, discuss the three unique attributes of interpersonal communicationas defined in the textbook.Answer: First, interpersonal communication involves quality, which means that people treat

each other as unique human beings rather than as impersonal roles. An example wouldbe listening and observing the other person carefully, and responding to any emotionalmessages or what their particular experience might be. For example, asking a clerk in astore, ʺBusy day, today?ʺ and listening to the answer rather than just conducting atransaction.

Second, interpersonal communication involves mutual influence, which means thateach person in the interaction is affected. For example, if a friend is telling you about aproblem, and you are listening intently, even though your friend might be doing thetalking, you are affected by his or her problem. In turn, your listening affects his or heremotional and perceptual response to you. If both people are not aware of theinteraction, it will not be interpersonal.

Third, interpersonal communication helps manage relationships. We usecommunication to initiate and maintain relationships. For example, at earlier stages inthe relationship, we limit our conversation to superficial topics. As we get to know eachother better, we may discuss more intimate topics, which helps a relationship grow. Wemay also use direct messages to discuss the nature of the relationship.


115

101) In a well-developed essay, explain the elements of interpersonal attraction. Include adiscussion of factors that affect attraction.Answer: Attraction is the degree to which you desire to form and possibly maintain an

interpersonal relationship with another person. It consists first of short-term initialattraction, which is the degree to which you sense a potential for developing aninterpersonal relationship. Later, you may have a long-term maintenance attraction,the type that sustains relationships like a close friendship or intimate relationship.

Physical attraction acts as a filter to limit the possibilities for relationships. We usephysical attraction to make an initial assessment of the desirability of pursuing arelationship. We tend to seek out others who are somewhat similar to us physically.

Proximity is an essential element that helps determine to whom we will be attracted.We are simply more likely to come into contact with people who are physically close.This proximity also increases the likelihood of communication. The ability to exchangeinformation increases our ability to make an informed choice. This does not mean thatpeople who are physically distant cannot initiate and develop relationships, but it ismore difficult and takes more time and energy to accomplish. The Internet has helpedin this area to open us up to people who are far away.

Similarity in attitudes, values, beliefs, and behaviors is also a factor in attraction. Wetend to like people who are like us. While differences may add spice to a relationship,similarities are the real foundation of long-term relationships. Similarity may also affectproximity in as much as we are more likely to come into contact with people who sharesimilar interests and activities.

Complementary needs affects attraction through our assessment of how well the othercan satisfy our needs. When people have complementary needs it increases thelikelihood that both will have his or her needs met. In fact, we seek out people who cansatisfy our needs.


116

102) Melanie ran an ad searching for a potential roommate to split the rent on a two bedroomhouse. Stephanie answers the ad, and Melanie suggests that they go out to eat lunch to assesstheir compatibility as roommates. At lunch, conversation starts off light, discussing wherethey grew up, etc. Then, Stephanie abruptly changes the topic of the conversation anddiscloses a time when she was sexually assaulted. Melanie is surprised that Stephanie isdisclosing such intimate details since they have just met. Following Stephanieʹsself-disclosure, there is an awkward silence, and then Melanie changes the subject. Melanie isdoubtful that they will get along as roommates. Discuss what happened in this incident interms of reciprocity, appropriateness, and risk of self-disclosure.Answer: Since they had just met, Stephanie should have assessed what would be appropriate

and inappropriate to disclose. In the early stages of a relationship, we are trying toreduce our uncertainty about others by finding areas we have in common. In this state,self disclosure is usually not at a deep level. Melanie probably thought the details ofStephanieʹs sexual assault were inappropriate at this stage of their relationship.Stephanie should be aware that as relationships progress and trust developsself-disclosure can deepen, but it can be damaging early in a relationship. Stephaniealso took a risk to make herself vulnerable. If she had assessed the risks, she may havedecided that the disclosure was not worth the risk. She did not really know Melanieand that level of trust had not been established.


103) Discuss the differences between menʹs and womenʹs friendships in terms of self-disclosureand levels of intimacy. Give examples as support.Answer: Menʹs friendships generally form through shared experiences. Womenʹs friendships

form more through interpersonal communication, especially self-disclosure. However,womenʹs friendships are not more intimate than menʹs friendships just because theyform based on communication. For example, men that have fought together in a warhave some of the deepest friendships. Measuring the of relationships by the depth ofinterpersonal communication that has been shared is to measure relational intimacywith a feminine yardstick.


104) Explain the model of social penetration in terms of how a couple would initiate and deepen arelationship.Answer: The social penetration model deals with breadth which is the amount of information

discussed and depth which is the level of intimacy of the information disclosed. Thesocial penetration model is represented by concentric circles. The circumference of thecircle represents the breadth and the depth is represented by how deep the wedge goesinto the circle. When people meet they probably discuss only a few topics verysuperficially such as exchanging names and places where they are from. As therelationship progresses, breadth will increase as well as depth. Eventuallyconversations will turn from hobbies and sports to more core issues such as values,importance of family, etc. Self-disclosure allows the one person to penetrate the layersof the other person, so that he/she can know the other person on a more intimate level.


117

VOLUME 2Chapter 2.2: Enhancing Relationships

1) According to the textbook, at which stage in life do relationships with our peers become themost important social influence in our lives?

A) childhood B) adolescence C) adulthood D) senior adultsAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 41

2) Research has found that most adults tend to have on average ________ best friends.A) 10 to 20 B) 4 to 6 C) 1 to 2 D) 3 to 4


3) Children who grow up in a pluralistic family environment ________.A) are encouraged to develop and express opinions about the world without negative

consequences.B) have been raised by step parents.C) experience more conflict.D) tend to perceive themselves as skilled communicators.E) Both A and D are true


4) According to Satir, which of the following is a characteristic of a healthy family?A) They keep feelings of anger to themselves.B) They treat people differently according to their age.C) They are careful not to violate one anotherʹs personal space.D) They establish flexible rules that can be changed.


5) Which of the following is the most highly valued when considering hiring someone for a job?A) presentational speaking skills B) interpersonal communication skillsC) grade point average D) degree


6) Researcher Herbert Mintzberg found that chief executive officers spend almost ________percent of their day communicating orally with others.

A) 25 B) 40 C) 60 D) 80Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 46

118

7) Lara has just started a new job and is feeling somewhat anxious. She can reduce heruncertainty by which passive method?

A) perception checking with her colleaguesB) observing her surroundings and how people interact on the jobC) asking her coworkers for informationD) asking her supervisor for information


8) Samir notices Anna in his public speaking class and asks a mutual friend about her. Thisexample would characterize which stage in relational escalation?

A) pre-interaction awareness stage B) intimacy stageC) initiation stage D) exploration stage


9) Dan and Donna begin self-disclosing information about their dreams for the future, values,and religious beliefs, but they still spend a limited amount of time with one another. They aremoving into which stage of relational escalation?

A) initiation B) explorationC) intensification D) interaction awareness


10) Pablo and Nakara are exchanging information about hometowns, high schools, the weather,TV shows, and people they know. In which stage of relational escalation are they most likelyto be?

A) individualization B) intensificationC) exploration D) initiation


11) The relationship stage in which you begin to spend more time together, begin depending uponeach other for self-confirmation, and increase the variety of activities you participate intogether is the ________ stage.

A) initiation B) intensification C) exploration D) intimacyAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49

12) Leslie and Pat have reached a stage in their relationship in which they understand one anotherto the point that they can almost finish one anotherʹs sentences, openly discuss any issue, andare recognized among friends and family members as a committed couple. This would be anexample of what stage in relational escalation?

A) exploration B) intensification C) initiation D) intimacyAnswer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49-50

119

13) Jose cringed as he thought about going home after work. Lately, he and Cassandra spendevery minute together fighting. He used to think the way she played with her food was cute;now he finds it annoying. What stage of relational de-escalation are Jose and Cassandrafacing?

A) individualization stage B) stagnation stageC) turmoil stage D) separation stage


14) Maria and Andre have been married for five years, but lately they hardly talk unless itʹsnecessary. They used to take time out of their busy schedules to go on dates or just talk. Itoften feels like theyʹre just going through the motions. What stage of relational de-escalationdoes this example illustrate?

A) turmoil stage B) stagnation stageC) individualization stage D) de-intensification stage


15) A couple experiences significantly less interaction and begins to no lo longer depend as muchon one another for support. They also begin to question whether their relationship has afuture. This illustrates which stage in relational de-escalation?

A) individualization stage B) de-intensification stageC) separation stage D) turmoil stage


16) In which relationship stage does ʺgrave dressingʺ occur?A) post-interaction stage B) de-intensification stageC) stagnation stage D) separation stage


17) What does research show about how people prefer to end relationships?A) Most breakups are bilateral (done by both parties).B) Most people use direct breakup strategies.C) Most people prefer indirect breakup strategies.D) Indirect breakup strategies are the most interpersonally communicative.


18) According to the definition of interpersonal conflict given in the textbook, the intensity of aconflict relates to the intensity of the ________.

A) self-disclosure B) personality differencesC) emotional expression D) unmet needs


120

19) Conflict is ________.A) an inevitable part of a relationshipB) something that can be avoided if a couple gets along wellC) always harmful to a relationshipD) a sign of an unhealthy relationship


20) A conflict that helps build new insights and establishes new patterns in a relationship is a(n)________.

A) destructive conflict B) constructive conflictC) mutual conflict D) intermittent conflict


21) Which of the following is the most notable contributing factor to a destructive conflict?A) poor verbal communication skills B) lack of similar valuesC) lack of flexibility D) issues concerning money


22) Which of the following is a recommendation of Wilmot and Hocker on how to build aconstructive conflict?

A) Hold your position on an issue firmly.B) Try to protect yourself against conflict.C) Be willing to lose if it means making the other person happy.D) Focus on the relationship rather than the individual.


23) The ability to influence another in the direction we desire is ________.A) interpersonal conflict B) emotional expressionC) self-disclosure D) interpersonal power


24) A relationship in which one partner willingly and continuously cedes the power to the other isa ________ relationship.

A) complementary B) symmetricalC) parallel D) unilateral


121

25) Peter and Paul have discussions that typically sound like this: ʺWhere do we go for dinner?ʺ ʺIdonʹt know, where would you like to go?ʺ ʺI donʹt care, you decide.ʺ ʺAnything you like is finewith me.ʺ etc. Based on this example their relationship would be characterized as being________.



26) Sandra and Jennifer have been roommates for several years and both love to entertain. Whenthey want to plan a special evening for friends, Sandra plans the menu, visits several gourmetmarkets, and spends the afternoon happily preparing an exquisite feast. Jennifer, on the otherhand, takes care of the invitations, cleans the apartment, and selects the entertainment for theevening. In regard to entertaining, this relationship would be characterized as being ________.



27) Assertive communication is when we ________.A) let our opinions and concerns be known while taking the listenerʹs into accountB) let our opinions and concerns be known at all costs, without regard to the listenerʹsC) assume that our own opinion does not need to be expressed directlyD) hint at our concerns, but donʹt push the issue


28) Karla and David are having a conflict over who should wash the dishes. Karla says to David,ʺYouʹre just like your brother. Youʹre lazy and donʹt care about anyone except for yourself.Your entire family is worthless!ʺ This is an example of which of the following?

A) assertive communication B) aggressive communicationC) passive communication D) argumentative communication


29) Which of the following statements is true concerning verbal aggression?A) Men are more likely to use verbal aggression than women.B) Only 10 percent of couples use verbal aggression.C) A link exists between verbal aggression and physical aggression or abuse.D) Verbal aggression is rarely harmful to a relationship.


30) Justinʹs girlfriend, Malika, is angry with him for spending so much time with his friends.When she tried to discuss it with him, he changed the subject and began talking about his newboss. What conflict strategy did Justin use?

A) placating B) distractingC) computing D) confrontational


122

31) Placating, distracting, and computing responses are types of what conflict style?A) nonconfrontational B) confrontationalC) cooperative D) constructive


32) People who use blame as a strategy for winning a conflict are using which conflict style?A) nonconfrontational B) constructiveC) cooperative D) confrontational


33) A cooperative approach to conflict is one in which we ________.A) focus on winningB) keep the relationship smooth by placating the other personC) view conflict as a set of problems to be solvedD) change the topic to keep the atmosphere pleasant


34) Expressing our feelings in an emotional outburst in response to a conflict could ________.A) make us feel better for the momentB) help us move the negotiations alongC) may exacerbate the situationD) helps us manage the conflict.E) Both A and C


35) In order to manage your emotions in a conflict situation, it would be helpful to do which of thefollowing?

A) Immediately confront the other person, so the anger doesnʹt fester.B) Donʹt prepare what you will say, so your message will be genuine.C) Use self-talk to calm your emotions.D) Stand over the other person to communicate that youʹre in control.


36) Which of the following is an appropriate example of ʺowningʺ your feelings by using an ʺIʺmessage?

A) ʺYou make me so angry when you assume I donʹt understand anything!ʺB) ʺI feel unappreciated when you do not respond to my questions.ʺC) ʺYouʹre a jerk! Everyone says so.ʺD) ʺThis discussion is giving me a headache!ʺ


123

37) In managing your emotions, all of the following guidelines are helpful EXCEPTA) selecting an acceptable time and place.B) monitoring your nonverbal behavior.C) using self talk.D) discussing only disadvantages of possible solutions.


38) The suggestion that you resist solutions to manage the conflict until both you and the otherperson fully understand the problem and each otherʹs goals is part of ________.

A) managing the emotions B) managing the goal(s)C) managing the problem D) managing the conflict style


39) Justin had a problem with his roommateʹs late night habit of watching TV when Justin wastrying to sleep. In discussing the problem, Justin told his roommate that he could either stopwatching TV late at night or he could move out. How would you describe Justinʹs conflictmanagement style?

A) nonconfrontationalB) confrontationalC) passiveD) cooperativeE) up front


40) Olga is discussing her work schedule with her supervisor. She is not happy with herassignment and tells her supervisor, ʺYou assign the best training dates to the people in yourwork group.ʺ Based on Olgaʹs comment, what does the text recommend so she could be moreeffective at managing this conflict?

A) check her understanding of the supervisorʹs messageB) own her statements by using descriptive languageC) use self talkD) discuss the pros and cons of the solution.


41) According to Virginia Satir, one of the characteristics of a healthy family is that the familyʹslinks to society are open.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 45

42) Friendships often alternate between periods of development and deterioration.Answer: TRUEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 41

43) A pluralistic family environment fosters open communication and development of opinions.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 44

124

44) When partners define their lives less as a couple and more as individuals, they are in thestagnation stage of relational de-escalation.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 51

45) The importance of the post-interaction stage is in the lasting impact the relationship has ononeʹs self.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 52

46) Aggressive communication is an attack on issues rather than the person.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 60

47) A destructive conflict is one in which combatants view their differences from a lose-loseperspective.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 56

48) In a complementary relationship, power continually shifts from one person to the other,depending upon which partner has the most expertise or interest in a situation.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 58

49) If both people in a relationship attempt to assume control of that relationship, it would beconsidered a symmetrical relationship.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 59

50) An assertive message takes your listenerʹs feelings and rights into account as well as your own.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 60

51) According to the textbook, aggressive messages frequently accomplish what the speakerintended.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 60

52) Managing conflict means preventing it from occurring.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 62

53) People who consistently exhibit a nonconfrontational style in responding to conflict duringproblem solving discussions are perceived to be incompetent.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 62

125

54) People who have a win-lose approach to conflict, and always seek to win, have aconfrontational style of conflict management.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 63

55) Separating the people from the problem is one type of nonconfrontational strategy.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 62

56) It is important to know your conflict management style even if your style is different from theother people involved in the conflict.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 62

57) Using ʺIʺ statements tends to result in defensiveness on the part of other people.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 66-67

58) One of the important steps to managing your goals is to find where your goals and those ofthe other personʹs overlap.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 68

59) Most working people say that relationships with colleagues make the most difference betweentheir job satisfaction and dissatisfaction.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 45

60) ʺGrave dressingʺ describes the story we offer to others as to why a relationship ended.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 52

61) The lack of communication moves people through the stages of relationship de-escalation.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 52

62) Collectivistic cultures assume that conflict signals a lack of self discipline.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 57

126


A. De-intensification stageB. Exploration stageC. Individualization stageD. Initiation stageE. Intensification stageF. Intimacy stageG. Post-interaction stageH. Pre-interaction awareness stageI. Separation stageJ. StagnationK. Turmoil stage

63) Partners provide primary confirmation of each otherʹs self-concept; characterized by highlypersonalized and synchronized verbal and nonverbal communication; formal commitmentsmay be made.Answer: FDiff: 3 Page Ref: 49-50

64) Partners begin to share more in-depth information as they get to know each other. There isminimal physical contact and time spent together is limited.Answer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 49

65) Partners agree to minimize or eliminate further interpersonal interaction; they divide property,resources, and friends.Answer: IDiff: 3 Page Ref: 51-52

66) Being aware of oneʹs attraction for the other person; observing them passively.Answer: HDiff: 3 Page Ref: 48

67) Increased conflict, tense communication climate.Answer: KDiff: 3 Page Ref: 50-51

68) The first actual contact with the other person; characterized by lots of questions and search forcommonalities.Answer: DDiff: 3 Page Ref: 48

69) The process of coming to grips with losing the relationship and determining how one willthink of the nature of that relationship and its impact on self.Answer: GDiff: 3 Page Ref: 52

127

70) Partners begin to depend upon each other for self-confirmation; they begin to share moreactivities, and physical contact is increased.Answer: EDiff: 3 Page Ref: 49

71) Partners begin to define their lives more as individuals and less as a couple.Answer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 51

72) Partners experience decreased interactions; physical and emotional distance increases; there isless dependence on the other for self-confirmation; they may discuss their dissatisfaction withthe relationship.Answer: ADiff: 3 Page Ref: 51


A. Aggressive communicationB. Assertive communicationC. Complementary relationshipsD. Confrontational styleE. Constructive conflictF. Cooperative styleG. Destructive conflictH. Non-confrontational styleI. Parallel relationshipsJ. Symmetrical relationships

73) Includes placating, distracting, and computing.Answer: HDiff: 3 Page Ref: 62

74) Control shifts between partners depending upon each personʹs expertise.Answer: IDiff: 3 Page Ref: 59

75) An approach that sees conflict as a set of problems to be solved.Answer: FDiff: 3 Page Ref: 63

76) Conflict that features a lack of cooperation in dealing with differences.Answer: GDiff: 3 Page Ref: 56

77) One person willingly and continuously gives all the power in the relationship to the otherpartner.Answer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 58

128

78) Conflict management style that uses blame.Answer: DDiff: 3 Page Ref: 63

79) Each person has similar control behaviors; either both try to take control or both try torelinquish control.Answer: JDiff: 3 Page Ref: 59

80) Conflict strategies that help build new patterns and insights in a relationship.Answer: EDiff: 3 Page Ref: 56

81) Communication that takes the listenerʹs feelings into account.Answer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 60

82) In a ________ relationship, one person willingly and continuously cedes power to the otherperson.Answer: complementaryDiff: 2 Page Ref: 58

83) In a ________ relationship, both partners exhibit similar control behavior; either both try toassume control, or both try to relinquish control.Answer: symmetricalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 59

84) In a ________ relationship, control shifts between partners; each assumes control when he orshe has the most expertise or capabilities.Answer: parallelDiff: 2 Page Ref: 59

85) When a struggle occurs between two people due to unmet needs, this is called a(n) ________________.Answer: interpersonal conflictDiff: 2 Page Ref: 55

86) During a conflict over how household tasks should be divided, Martha and Isaac were able togenerate creative solutions which actually improved their communication. This would becharacteristic of ________ conflict.Answer: constructiveDiff: 2 Page Ref: 56

87) ________ conflict is characterized by a lack of flexibility and may do damage to a relationship.Answer: DestructiveDiff: 2 Page Ref: 56

88) The ability to get another to do what one wants is known as ________ ________.Answer: interpersonal powerDiff: 2 Page Ref: 58

129

89) Delores often insults others and uses profanity in order to get what she wants. She uses________ communication.Answer: aggressiveDiff: 2 Page Ref: 60

90) The stage of a relationship when partners take each other for granted and physical contact andcommunication decline is ________.Answer: stagnationDiff: 2 Page Ref: 51

91) When a participant in a conflict uses a style that views the conflict as a set of problems to besolved, rather than a competition, he/she is using a ________ style.Answer: cooperativeDiff: 2 Page Ref: 63

92) When a participant in a conflict uses distracting, placating, computing, or withdrawing he/sheis using a(n) ________ style.Answer: nonconfrontationalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 62

93) Identify and briefly describe each of the stages of relational escalation.Answer: In the pre-interaction stage you observe a person or talk to others about the person

without having direct interaction. In the initiation stage, participants ask one anotherquestions to determine what they have in common. In the exploration stage, partnerswill disclose more in-depth information about themselves, but physical contact andtime spent together is still limited. In the intensification stage, partners will begin todepend on one another for self-confirmation, and they will begin to spend a great dealmore time together, have a more intimate physical distance, and personalize theirlanguage. In the intimacy stage partners provide the primary confirmation ofself-concept, communication is highly personalized and synchronized, and there maybe a formal declaration of their commitment such as a wedding.


94) Explain how the five principles of communication can be used to enhance friendships.Answer: Principle 1 deals with awareness and we must begin friendships by being aware of our

own interests, so we can seek out others who share these same likes and dislikes. Next,principle 2 and 3 relate to verbal and nonverbal communication, and we must useextensive verbal communication as our relationships deepen. Also, nonverbalimmediacy cues communicate our liking of others. Principle 4 (listening andresponding) is important to friendships because we must be willing to listen to whatothers say, observe what they do, and provide empathic responses or advice dependingon the situation. Finally, we need to learn to adapt our communication by extendingcertain aspects of ourselves depending on the context of the situation and the friendwith whom we are interacting.


130

95) What is interpersonal power? How might these power dynamics play out in a romanticrelationshipAnswer: Interpersonal power is the ability to influence another in the direction one desires:

getting another person to do what you want them to do. In romantic relationships,these power dynamics can result in relationships that are complementary (one partnerwillingly and continuously ceded power to the other), symmetrical (partners havesimilar control behaviors and either compete to dominate or relinquish control), orparallel (partners allow power to shift from one to the other depending on the type ofinteraction or situation).


96) Distinguish between nonconfrontational, confrontational, cooperative styles of conflictmanagement.Answer: In the nonconfrontational style, participants manage conflict by backing off or avoiding

conflict altogether. They do this by placating, distracting, computing, withdrawing, orgiving in to the other person. A person who has a confrontational style of conflictmanagement wants to dominate others in order to achieve his/her objectives. Thismeans that a person with a confrontational style will often approach conflict as awin-lose situation and will often blame others rather than taking responsibility for aconflict. A cooperative approach involves viewing a conflict as a set of problems to besolved rather than a competition. Using a cooperative style, it is possible to achieve awin-win solution.


97) What techniques are involved in the cooperative style of managing conflict?Answer: The cooperative style fosters a win-win climate by using the techniques of separating

the people from the problem, focusing on shared interests, generating many options tosolve the problem, and basing decisions on objective criteria.


98) Briefly explain the differences in the role of friendships at four stages in life: childhood,adolescence, adulthood, and old age.Answer: In childhood, friendships are often based on meeting oneʹs needs and momentary time

spent together doing activities. These friendships are superficial and self-centered. Inadolescence, friendship takes on a more important role, as friends become moreintimate and have more social influence on our behavior. In adulthood, our friends maybe among our most valued relationships; many times our closest friends are also ourco-workers. In old age, we make fewer new friends, but the friends we have becomeeven more important to us, especially as we retire from work.


99) What are the characteristics and differences between constructive and destructive conflicts?Answer: Constructive conflict is characterized by cooperation in dealing with differences. By

airing differences, partners gain new insights and create relational adjustments thatestablish new and satisfying patterns of behavior. Destructive conflict is characterizedby the lack of flexibility and a win-lose perspective that inhibits options for managingdifferences. In a destructive conflict one or both of the partners is dissatisfied with theoutcome. A destructive conflict tears a relationship apart without trying to put it backtogether again


131

100) Identify the four conflict management skills that are offered as a way to help generate acooperative approach to conflict.Answer: manage emotions, manage information, manage goals, and manage the problemDiff: 2 Page Ref: 64-69

101) Explain each of the five stages of relational de-escalation. Give specific examples to illustrateeach of the stages using Belinda and Matt who have been married for 5 years, but theirrelationship has begun to crumble.Answer: The first stage involves turmoil or stagnation. If the couple experiences turmoil, they

begin to engage in conflict. When the relationship stagnates, the couple begins to takeone another for granted, and they may go through the motions of an intimaterelationship without the commitment or joy. For example, Belinda and Mattʹsrelationship begins to fall apart as tension increases. They hardly ever communicateand when they do, it seems like theyʹre always fighting. They live together, but itdoesnʹt seem like either of them is truly invested in the relationship, but they aredefinitely not ready to call it quits.

Next, in the de-intensification stage a couple may experience less interaction, increasedphysical, psychological, and emotional distance, and no longer depend on one anotherfor self-confirmation. They might also discuss their dissatisfaction within therelationship. For example, Belinda and Mattʹs relationship continues to worsen. Theyrarely talk and no longer take joy in one anotherʹs successes or provide comfort for oneanother. Belinda and Matt increasingly turn to friends for support and talk about theirdissatisfaction in the relationship to friends and family members. Belinda finallyconfronts Matt and asks him if he sees the marriage continuing.

Next is the individualization stage. In this stage, couples begin to move from ʺweʺ andʺusʺ to ʺyouʺ and ʺmeʺ. Physical intimacy is very low or nonexistent and nonverbaldistance increases. Belinda and Matt decide that their marriage does not have a future.They no longer attend gatherings together, and Matt now sleeps on the couch while helooks for another place to live.

In the separation stage, the individuals take intentional steps to eliminate furtherinterpersonal communication. In Matt and Belindaʹs case, Matt moves out of the houseand the divorce is finalized. If they do meet, their interactions are strained.

Finally, in the post-interaction stage individuals engage in ʺgrave dressingʺ or createpublic statements explaining why they broke up. Individuals come to grips with losingthe relationship and begin re-building a sense of self-worth. This stage is importantbecause relationships, even failed ones, have a powerful impact on how we viewourselves. Matt and Belinda begin to explain to co-workers, friends, and family whytheir relationship failed. Belinda begins getting involved in more activities in herchurch and makes new friends to help overcome feelings of loneliness and lowself-esteem.


132

102) Identify the differences between assertive and aggressive communication. Write an assertiveresponse and an aggressive response, and to the following situation. Your description may beinclude both verbal or nonverbal responses.

You were in a rush on your way to work, but you wanted to stop by a local department storeand pick up some socks that were on sale. You quickly selected your purchase, and made yourway toward the register. Two women behind the counter were having a great time talking,obviously not about business, and were ignoring your presence.Answer: Assertive messages are messages that express oneʹs opinions or goals without stepping

on the toes of the other person — that is, without taking advantage of them or ignoringtheir needs and goals. Aggressive messages are messages designed to get what youwant, regardless of the other personʹs feelings or concerns.

Responses may vary. The assertive message will include ʺIʺ statements that aredescriptive. ʺI would like to pay for my socks.ʺ Aggressive messages will include ʺyouʺlanguage. ʺIf you would quit yakking, I could get out of here and get to work.ʺ


103) Explain how you might use the conflict management skills of managing emotions,information, goals, and problems in the following situation.

You and your roommate agreed on a schedule and responsibilities for chores. At first, all wentwell. Then gradually, week after week, one excuse after another, your roommate began to failto follow through. At first it was no big deal; a dish here, a sock there. But now your roommatehas left dishes in the sink for three days and hasnʹt taken out the trash in a week. Thebathroom is a mess, the shower especially. The last straw was the large blueberry stain in themiddle of the living room floor. You canʹt take it anymore, you are furious. Youʹve let it slidelong enough and decide to let her know how you feel.Answer: The first thing to do is to manage your emotions. You donʹt want to confront your

roommate when youʹre this worked up. Leave the apartment, take a walk, and cooldown. Spend a little time talking to yourself. Maybe something is going on you donʹtknow about. When your roommate comes home indicate that there are some things youwant to talk about and ask about a convenient time to get together. Once the meeting isarranged, give some thought to what you want to say and how you want to say it. Whatdo you want to accomplish? You might want to talk with another friend to help clarifythe issues. If there is no one else to talk with, write some of your ideas down to helpclarify the issues. When you do talk with the other person, keep your emotions undercontrol. If you feel yourself getting angry and tense, deliberately relax or take a break.Speak in a calm and natural manner. Whatever you do, avoid personal attacks,name-calling, and threats. Donʹt dredge up grievances from long ago, but keep focusedon the issues at hand.

When you begin to talk with your roommate describe what is bothering you as clearlyas you can. Start at the beginning and move to the present. Make sure your roommateunderstands what it is that is bothering you. Be sure to use ʺIʺ statements, listencarefully, and check your perceptions often. When your roommate is talking roommateis talking, give him or her your full attention and do your best to understand his or herposition. Use paraphrasing that reflects content and feelings to make sure youunderstand and respond appropriately. You may have clarified your goals earlier, butas you talk and listen, your goals may change. Be sure to clarify not only your owngoals but also those of your roommate, and try to discover any shared goals you might

133

have. As you discover shared goals you build the basis for a possible solution to theconflict.

If you have clarified both your goals and your roommateʹs, and have identified someshared goals, you have begun the process of defining the problem. Once you have asense of what the problem is, you can begin to analyze the symptoms, effects, andobstacles that affect your ability to resolve the conflict. You may discover otherproblems that lie below the surface and need to be addressed. Once you have a goodgrasp of the problem, work with your roommate to generate objective criteria to helpevaluate and choose a solution. Then generate as many possible ways to solve theproblem as the two of you possibly can. Brainstorming might be a useful technique.Once you have generated a number of possibilities, check them against your criteria andpick the alternative or alternatives that best meet your goals.


104) What is meant by a cooperative style of conflict management? Explain the four techniquesdiscussed in the text as for using a cooperative style.Answer: A cooperative style of conflict management is one in which you view conflicts as a

mutual problem that needs to be worked out, rather than as a win-lose situation. Thefollowing techniques are recommended: First, separate the people from the problem.Think of the disagreement as about the issue rather than as a judgment of the otherpersonʹs character or abilities. Second, focus on shared interests. What do both peoplewant? What do you both agree on needs to happen? Where do we already agree? Third,Generate many options to solve the problem. This may be accomplished through atechnique such as brainstorming. Fourth, base your decisions on objective criteria. Whatare standards, such as costs, timing, etc. that you can agree upon?


105) Explain and give an example to illustrate each of the five responses that typify thenon-confrontational style.Answer: Placating involves attempting not to rock the boat by getting angry and disagreeing

with others. People do this in order to avoid threats to their self-worth. For example,Amanda is afraid that her relationship with William will end if she disagrees with him,so she often goes along with what he wants rather than maintaining her position onissues. Distracting involves changing the subject in order to avoid conflict. Forexample, every time Martha brings up a touchy subject her roommate, Megan,immediately begins talking about something lighter and effectively avoids the conflict.Others use computing or removing themselves from the conflict by remaining cool andaloof. For example, Fred rarely owns his emotions in a conflict. He often talks about asituation in third person. Some people simply withdraw from a conflict eitherphysically or psychologically. Darren thinks that his wife is constantly nagging at him.When a conflict begins, he often leaves the house to go play golf or simply turns on thetelevision. Others give in during a conflict situation. For example, Garret doesnʹt likeseafood, but he quickly agrees to go eat seafood with his girlfriend to avoid a conflict.


134

106) Explain the influence that culture may have on managing conflict. Discuss at least threeassumptions about conflict that are held by collectivistic cultures.Answer: Members from different cultural backgrounds have different views of conflict and

different ways of dealing with and managing conflict. Basic cultural values areimportant to recognize when you are involved in an intercultural conflict.Collectivisitic cultures emphasize group rather than individual achievement whileindividualistic cultures place more value on individual accomplishment. Collectivisticcultures see conflict as dysfunctional and think it should be handled confidently anddiscreetly. It is seen as a lack of self discipline and emotional maturity. It is damagingto self respect and relational harmony and should be avoided as much as possible. Itdoes provide a testing ground for skillful negotiation and ʺface savingʺ and is alwaysconcerned with relational as well as substantitive issues. All processes and outcomesshould be ʺwin-winʺ.


135

VOLUME 3Chapter 3.1: Understanding Group

and Team Performance

1) Which of the following lists contains elements of the definition of a small group given in thetextbook?

A) sharing a common purpose, 2 to 15 people, face-to-face interactionB) members exert influence on others in the group, 4 to 8 people, formal leaderC) 3 to 15 people, sharing a common purpose, members feel a sense of belongingD) formal leader, 3 to 15 people, members feel a sense of belonging


2) Which of the following describes the difference between a team and a group?A) Teams are more highly structured and organized than groups.B) Teams usually are created by an outside organization, groups are not.C) Teams have a designated leader; groups do not.D) None of the above — groups and teams are essentially the same thing.


3) John is a member of team at work. He willing jumps in and does the work; he is a seniormember of the team, and he is able to quickly analyze the problem and make a sound decision.However, John often focuses on what he needs to do as an individual team member and isoften not aware of otherʹs needs. He needs to develop which characteristic of an effective teammember?

A) experience B) problem-solving abilityC) supportiveness D) action oriented


4) Which of the following is a characteristic of a primary group?A) It exists to fulfill an agenda or goal.B) Members have specifically assigned duties.C) It is designed to solve a clearly defined problem.D) It meets the need of associating with others.


5) Which of the following is NOT a characteristic of an effective group or team member?A) experienceB) opennessC) limited backgroundD) feeling of effectivenessE) being optimistic in bad times


136

6) Jubair, Jeremiah, Cindy, Sean, and Russ meet once a week to prepare for their communicationclass. This is an example of a(n) ________.

A) primary group B) study groupC) therapy group D) focus group


7) At Bettyʹs Weight Watchers meeting, the group frequently discusses the challenge of stayingaway from vending machines, passing up doughnuts at work, and dealing with the stress ofthe holidays. What type of group is described here?

A) primary group B) study groupC) therapy group D) focus group


8) Jeanine is in charge of a group at her university that is responsible for finding reasons thatfreshmen do not want to live in the college dorms. What type of group is this?

A) primary group B) study groupC) problem-solving group D) focus group


9) The admissions office on campus was concerned about the high percentage of freshmen whowere opting to move out of the residence halls at the end of the fall semester. They decided tobring together random groups of students, and have each group discuss the residence halls.What type of groups are the students participating in?

A) study groups B) problem-solving groupsC) therapy groups D) focus groups


10) Steve and his friends are foreign film buffs. Every weekend, they drive to the nearest city andattend what is showing at one of the fine arts theaters. This group is an example of a ________.

A) study group B) social group C) focus group D) therapy groupAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

11) Sarah observes that she usually keeps her theater group happy and that her friend Maureenoffers the group encouragement. The patterns of communication observed by Sarah would bedescribes as ________ roles.

A) task B) social C) individual D) flexibleAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 12

137

12) Mikala often takes the minutes of the meetings; Gary often asks others to contribute new ideas;Keri offers pros and cons about the suggested solutions. All of these would be examples of________.

A) individual roles B) procedural rolesC) social roles D) task roles


13) Clara thinks Carloʹs idea for organizational outreach is impractical and cannot be implementedeffectively. The discussion becomes heated and things seem to be getting out of control, soChad suggests that the group take a break to rethink the issue. Chad is fulfilling which type ofgroup role?

A) individual role B) task roleC) social role D) procedural role


14) A campus organization planning group is brainstorming possible themes for theirhomecoming float. The ideas are flowing freely, when Katie enters the group late. Withoutregard for the groupʹs brainstorming session, she begins discussing her recent break-up withher boyfriend. Katie is playing which type of group role?

A) individual role B) task roleC) social role D) procedural role


15) Roles in a group ________.A) are based on oneʹs personality, so they tend to be the same from group to groupB) are usually assigned by the group leaderC) are based upon verbal behavior, but not nonverbal behaviorD) are dynamic because we adjust our behavior by listening and responding to others


16) Which of the following lists contains only task roles?A) information seeker, elaborator, gatekeeperB) coordinator, energizer, dominatorC) help-seeker, opinion seeker, recorderD) initiator, opinion giver, orientor


17) Zorita is an excellent group member. At meetings, she always shares her research with othergroup members. Which task-oriented role does Zorita play, from this description?

A) the initiator role B) the information-seeker roleC) the information-giver role D) the opinion-giver role


138

18) Gretchen decides to join a study group. She attends the group for the first time and arrivesabout 10 minutes early for the meeting. She is surprised to see that no other group membershave arrived. In fact, no one show up until ten minutes past the posted start time. Gretchenrealizes that arriving late is deemed appropriate behavior by the group. This would be anexample of a group ________.

A) norm B) role C) status D) powerAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 16

19) Tom was a member of the five-member committee for evaluating student complaints. WhenTom raised a question, other members abruptly changed the topic. Several times Tom madesuggestions for new procedures, but his ideas were summarily dismissed. In addition, othersin the group tended to interrupt his statements with ideas of their own. Tom probably has________.

A) emergent leadership B) low statusC) high status D) blocking behaviors


20) The ability to influence the behavior of others is referred to as ________.A) status B) social roles C) power D) task roles


21) If a person is elected or appointed, they have ________ power.A) legitimate B) referent C) expert D) coercive


22) What is/are the importance of team ground rules?A) They spell out behavior that is expected of group members.B) They can help manage uncertainty.C) They help the team run more smoothly.D) A, B, and C are all correct


23) Jason looks up to and respects his roommate, Al. Jason admires the way Al is able to makefriends easily, and is also successful in his schoolwork. Because of this admiration, Al has agreat deal of influence on Jasonʹs decisions. Based on this information, what type of powerdoes Al in this relationship?

A) legitimate B) referent C) expert D) rewardAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 18

139

24) Although Ali was quiet and spoke up rarely in his class project group, the group knew he wasa pre-med major and respected his academic success. When the group decided to use the topicof genetic research for their project, they listened carefully to Aliʹs ideas on appropriatesources. Given these circumstances, what type of power does Ali have in his group?

A) coercive B) referent C) expert D) rewardAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 18

25) Teachers who use bonus points to get students to attend public speeches outside of class aremaking use of what type of power?

A) referent B) coercive C) expert D) rewardAnswer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 18

26) Teachers who lower grades because of unexcused absences are using what type of power?A) referent B) coercive C) expert D) reward


27) Paula is a member of a group in which the members truly like one another and feel a sense ofloyalty to the group. This is an example of group ________.

A) goals B) ethic C) cohesiveness D) powerAnswer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 19

28) Which of the following is a characteristic of a group with low cohesiveness?A) They stress individual accomplishment more than group accomplishment.B) Everyone in the group is encouraged to participate.C) They maintain and establish group traditions.D) They set goals and establish guidelines.


29) Which of the following correctly depicts the relationship between group cohesiveness andgroup productivity?

A) As cohesiveness increases, productivity increases.B) As cohesiveness increases, productivity decreases.C) The relationship between productivity and cohesiveness is curvilinear.D) The relationship between productivity and cohesiveness is linear.


140

30) An all-channel network is one in which ________.A) groups use chat rooms for their meetingsB) all members make comments to the high status members, but rarely to low status

membersC) the norms of the group include raising oneʹs hand when one wants to make a comment

or ask a questionD) one in which everyone talks to everyone else and no cliques or subgroups emerge


31) Which communication network is characterized by members communicating messageshierarchically from one person to another?

A) wheel network B) all-channel networkC) chain network D) primary network


32) When group becomes familiar with other group members and the group task, this is known asthe ________ phase of group development.

A) orientation B) conflict C) emergence D) reinforcementAnswer: ADiff: 3 Page Ref: 23

33) When Jenniferʹs teacher divided her class into groups, Jennifer ended up in a group with fourother people who were all strangers to each other. At first, they took turns introducingthemselves and telling the others their majors. Although the discussion was pleasant, it wassomewhat strained and uncomfortable. Jennifer wondered who in the group would bemotivated to work, and who would be a slacker. This group is most likely experiencing________.

A) primary tension B) secondary tensionC) high cohesiveness D) communication breakdown


34) After Jenniferʹs group in her communication class had met twice, they finally began to getserious about selecting a topic for their project. Several of the group members wanted to do aproject on the parking situation on campus, because they thought it would be easy tounderstand. Tyler, who was in the student government, wanted to do a project on the use ofstudent fees, because he had worked on that already and had a lot of information. Each personin the group had a favorite topic, and no one wanted to consider the other topics. Most of thediscussion revolved around trying to persuade the others to choose a given topic. Which phaseis this group experiencing?

A) orientation B) conflict C) emergence D) reinforcementAnswer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 24

141

35) Jenniferʹs project group in her communication class selected the topic of improving services fornon-traditional students on campus. Each member in the group had volunteered to talk to adifferent member of the university staff, and several members had volunteered to search theInternet for what others schools might be doing. Ricardo had volunteered to be moderator,and was efficient at running the group meetings. On their fifth meeting, members of the groupshared information they had gathered. What phase is this group experiencing?

A) orientation B) conflict C) emergence D) reinforcementAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 25

36) Jenniferʹs project group in her communication class was finishing up the final touches on theirpresentation. They decided to meet at Toddʹs house for pizza, and then do a mock run throughof the presentation. As they were working, there was some apprehension about their grades,but overall they felt the group was successful and they hoped they would be in the samegroups for the next project. What phase is this group experiencing?

A) orientation B) conflict C) emergence D) reinforcementAnswer: DDiff: 3 Page Ref: 25

37) Mauri was working with a very diverse group at her new job. As they tried to identify anddefine their goal, tempers flared and emotions were tense. What is recommended to mangethis conflict?

A) paraphrasing B) taking a breakC) continue to discuss the problem D) engage in ethical persuasion


38) All groups are teams, but not all teams are groups.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 5

39) For a collection of people to be considered a group, individuals should have a sense ofbelonging to the group.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 4

40) One of the primary differences between a team and a group is that teams are more likely thangroups to develop explicit rules for how the tasks should be accomplished.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 5

41) In primary groups, the communication that occurs is usually informal.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 8

42) Therapy groups are groups that exist in order to treat problems that members have.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 9

142

43) A focus group is a group that meets to resolve an issue or overcome an unsatisfactorysituation.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

44) Roles are standards that determine what is appropriate and inappropriate behavior in a group.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 11

45) The role you assume in a group may depend on who else is in the group.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 11

46) Task roles are roles which directly affect group climate by resolving conflict and improving theflow of communication.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 12

47) The most effective group will balance their concerns by spending about 80% of the time ontask roles, and about 20% of the time on social roles.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 12

48) One way that group norms may be determined is by observing the reactions of members whensomeone breaks a norm.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 13

49) A group member with high status generally talks more than a low status member.Answer: TRUEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 16

50) According to the textbook, status and power are essentially the same thing.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 16-17

51) According to research cited in the textbook, groups with clear-cut power differences amongtheir members usually have better outcomes than groups with equal power distribution.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 17

52) A teacher or a supervisor is an example of a person who has legitimate power.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 17

53) Tiffany looks up to her older sister, and often asks her advice on personal matters. This is anexample of referent power.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 18

143

54) Generally speaking, the more cohesive a group, the more productive they will be.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 19

55) According to the textbook, once a group deviate has been identified, group members tend toignore that person and do not communicate with him or her.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 20-21

56) Cohesive groups may have inside jokes and phrases with unique meanings to the group.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 19

57) The chain pattern of group interaction is when a person receives most of their communicationfrom a central person.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 20

58) In the orientation phase of group interaction, secondary tension is common.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 24


A. Focus groupsB. Primary groupsC. Problem solving groupsD. Social groupsE. Study groupsF. Therapy groupsG. Virtual groups

59) This group is a collection of individuals who are brought together by a researcher to discussissues, such as to evaluate a new product, or to assess the effectiveness of advertising.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

60) This group meets to help each other learn information, such as to prepare for a test or discussissues in class.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 9

61) This group provides treatment to its members for a problem they may have.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 9

62) This group exists to fulfill the basic human need of associating with others.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 8

144

63) This group meets for the experience of enjoyment in communicating with others, perhaps dueto common interests such as traveling or shared activities.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 11

64) This group meets in order to make decisions or resolve issues.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 10

65) Groups whose members are connected via an electronic channel.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 10


A. Coercive powerB. CohesivenessC. CliqueD. Expert powerE. Individual roleF. Legitimate powerG. Referent powerH. Reward powerI. Social roleJ. StatusK. Task role

66) This person has influence over anotherʹs behavior due to being liked and admired.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 18

67) This is a pattern of behaviors that focuses on helping the group manage its relationships andits climate.Answer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 12

68) Smaller cohesive group within a groupAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 21

69) Degree of attraction group members feel toward one another and the group.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 19

70) This person has influence based upon his or her ability to give the others something theydesire to have.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 18

145

71) This is a pattern of behavior that directly helps the group achieve its goal and accomplish thework.Answer: KDiff: 2 Page Ref: 12

72) This a pattern of behavior that focuses attention on oneʹs self rather than on the group.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 12

73) This is influence that one person has due to the position he or she has in the organization.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 17

74) This is influence that one person has over another due to the ability to remove rewards or dosomething that is undesirable to the other.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 18

75) An individualʹs importance and prestige.Answer: JDiff: 2 Page Ref: 16

76) Examples of ________ roles are giving and seeking information in order to help a group movetoward its goals.Answer: taskDiff: 2 Page Ref: 12

77) Some examples of ________ roles are gatekeeping, harmonizing, and compromising in order toimprove the groupʹs climate.Answer: socialDiff: 2 Page Ref: 12

78) A blocker, a recognition seeker, and a self-confessor, all of which impede the groupʹs progresstoward its goals, are examples of ________ roles.Answer: individualDiff: 2 Page Ref: 12

79) ________ ________ is the feeling of apprehension that occurs during the early meetings of agroup. It is common for groupʹs members to feel uneasy due to the uncertainty and discomfortof meeting for the first time.Answer: primary tensionDiff: 2 Page Ref: 24

80) As group members become more comfortable about expressing their opinions, they may beginto experience disagreements over leadership or task issues. This conflict is called ________________.Answer: secondary tensionDiff: 2 Page Ref: 24

146

81) The first phase of group interaction, in which members experience social unease and arecareful not to express strong opinions, is called the ________ phase.Answer: orientationDiff: 2 Page Ref: 23

82) The ________ phase of group interaction is one in which members begin to express theiropinions, and feel free to disagree with one another over issues or leadership.Answer: conflictDiff: 2 Page Ref: 24

83) The ________ phase of group interaction is one in which decisions begin to be made, the groupmoves forward, and conflicts are solved through established roles and norms.Answer: emergenceDiff: 2 Page Ref: 25

84) A smaller cohesive group within a larger group is known as a ________.Answer: cliqueDiff: 2 Page Ref: 21

85) ________ is the degree of attraction members feel toward one another and the group.Answer: cohesivenessDiff: 2 Page Ref: 19

86) A group member who holds an opinion, attitude, or belief that is different from that of othergroup members describes a group ________.Answer: deviateDiff: 2 Page Ref: 20-21

87) When people receive messages from one person at a time, they are utilizing the ________communication interaction pattern.Answer: chainDiff: 2 Page Ref: 20

88) What are the characteristics of a small group?Answer: A small group has 3 to 15 people, members share a common purpose, feel a sense of

belonging to the group, and exert influence over each other.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 3

89) What is the primary difference between a team and a group?Answer: A team is more structured and organized than a group; although many of the

characteristics are the same, in a team the norms are more explicit, the roles are betterdefined, and the goals may be more clearly spelled out.

Diff: 2 Page Ref: 5

90) What are task roles?Answer: Task roles are those behaviors that help a group move toward accomplishing its goals.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 12

147

91) What are social roles?Answer: Social roles are those behaviors that improve relationships in the group and contribute

to a positive group climate.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 12

92) What are individual roles?Answer: These are roles that do not help the group; they focus attention on individual

accomplishments rather than the group.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 12

93) Explain the difference between a rule and a norm.Answer: Rules are explicit prescriptions for appropriate behavior in the group. They are usually

communicated clearly to group members either verbally or in written form. Norms aregeneral standards of appropriate or inappropriate behavior, but they are not as explicitas rules. They are not written down or verbalized. They are based upon what peoplehave experienced in other groups.


94) Briefly explain what communication interaction patterns are, and give examples of two typesdiscussed in the textbook.Answer: Communication interaction patterns are consistent patterns of who talks to whom in a

group. Common patterns include the all-channel network, in which every person talksto every other person, a chain, in which members convey messages by talking only toone member at a time, and a wheel, in which messages are sent through one centralperson.


95) Briefly describe primary and secondary tension.Answer: Primary tension is the social discomfort that people feel early in the stages of a group. It

is due to uncertainty about the group members and the groupʹs goals. Secondarytension is conflict that emerges due to disagreements over issues or group leadership.


96) Briefly explain two assumptions about groups that would be different between individualisticcultures and collectivistic cultures.Answer: Generally, individualistic cultures place value on individuality. This value produces

several assumptions about group work: best decisions are made by individuals,planning should be done by the leaders, individual effort should be rewarded,individuals should work primarily for themselves, healthy competition between groupmembers is encouraged, meetings exist to share information, individuals accomplishmore than groups, the prime purpose of meetings is to advance your own ideas, andgroup meetings are often perceived as a waste of time. Collectivist cultures valuegroups over individual members. Therefore, group assumptions include: the mosteffective decisions are made by teams; planning is best done by the entire group; groupsshould be rewarded, not individuals; individuals should work for the team, not forthemselves; teamwork is more important than competition; meetings are for makinggroup decisions; you get more accomplished in a group than individually; the primepurpose of meetings is to achieve a consensus; group meetings are the best way toachieve a goal.


148

97) Your textbook discusses five bases of power. Name and explain each of the five, and giveexamples of how a supervisor in a professional setting might make use of each type of power.Answer: (1) Legitimate power is defined as influence that is conferred upon one by an

organization or group, either through election or appointment. Supervisors havelegitimate power because the organization they work for puts them in that position;employees will probably assume that the supervisor will have a certain amount ofqualification (expert power) due to that assignment.

(2) Referent power is influence that one has when other people like or respect him orher. Supervisors who are liked by their employees for their personal concern, or whoare admired for their professionalism, may be said to have referent power.

(3) Expert power is influence one has when others perceive that he or she has specificknowledge or information about a given topic area. A supervisor who is organized,clear, and is able to answer questions concerning the job or project may have expertpower.

(4) Reward power is the ability to influence behavior by having the ability to providesomething the other person values, or to remove something undesirable. A supervisormay use the offer of time off or choice assignments as reward power.

(5) Coercive power is the ability to influence behavior through doing something theother person finds undesirable, or by removing a reward. A supervisor may have theability to decrease pay, fire you form a job, or deny you time off.


98) Explain the relationship of cohesiveness to group output. In your discussion address theimpact of low, moderate, and high cohesiveness on the output of a group. Discuss at leastthree ways of enhancing group cohesiveness.Answer: There is a curvilinear relationship between cohesiveness in a group and the groupʹs

output. This means that a moderate amount of cohesiveness is probably the optimalamount for producing quality output. In a low cohesive group, members are notattracted to the group or its members. Because of this, they will usually be lessmotivated to work their hardest in a group. In a moderately cohesive group, membersare attracted to the group and its members, so they enjoy spending time in the group.This will lead to more time spent on the group task. In addition, members will feelcomfortable enough to manage their conflict productively. In a highly cohesive group,members may feel so much attraction to the group that the group itself becomes moreimportant than the task. Because the group has a great deal of power over members, insome cases, members are hesitant to disagree, or the group may develop norms thatinterfere with the groupʹs progress on the goals. To enhance group cohesiveness, thetextbook suggests the following: refer to the group as ʺweʺ instead of ʺIʺ; reinforce goodattendance at group meetings; establish and maintain group traditions; set clearshort-term and long-term goals; encourage everyone in the group to participate in thegroup task; celebrate group successes; stress teamwork and collaboration.


149

99) Describe Fisherʹs model of group interaction phases. List each of the stages, and discuss whattypes of behaviors are common in each. Illustrate with specific examples taken from a groupyou have been a part of.Answer: Orientation phase: the group has not yet developed particular norms and roles;

communication is nervous, polite, and tentative. Group members feel uncertainty abouteach other and the group (primary tension). Conflict phase: the group members arecomfortable enough to express disagreements about important issues and/or leadershipin the group. Therefore, conflict increases noticeably as communication is primarilypersuasive. (secondary tension) Emergence: the group has begun to finally make somedecisions; roles and norms are beginning to emerge. Conflict may occur, but is handledthrough procedures the group may have established. Reinforcement: by now the groupis aware of the direction the group has taken. A successful group may celebrate; a groupthat was not as successful as hoped may spend time rationalizing why.


100) What are norms? What purpose do they serve for group members? How can you recognizenorms when you enter a group?Answer: Norms are the standards that determine what is appropriate and inappropriate

behavior in a group.

Norms help group members understand what behavior is appropriate so they can fit inand work well with their group. For example, how does the group deal with lateness,language, dress, or how members are addressed? Norms can be productive orunproductive and should be monitored so they do not keep the group from operatingeffectively.

You can recognize norms by observing a group to see how members interact. It is alsopossible to recognize norms when they are broken. The response to a member whoviolates a norm will correspond in severity with the importance of the norm.


101) Explain the difference between status and power. Give an example to illustrate.Answer: Status refers to whether or not a person is perceived to be important by other group

members. For example, Laura comes from a wealthy family and her father is animportant politician in her state. Therefore, she is perceived to be important or havehigh status by other members of the student senate. Power, on the other hand, dealswith the ability to influence others behavior. Often power and status go together, butsometimes a person can have status but not actually be able to have strong influence inthe group. On student government, Laura talks a lot, but is unable to influence othermembers because she is interpersonally aloof. Other members donʹt have a strongliking for Laura, therefore, they often donʹt follow her proposals.


150

VOLUME 3Chapter 3.2: Enhancing Group and Team Performance

1) The functional approach to group communication ________.A) attempts to describe types of behaviors that lead to better quality solutionsB) defines stages of group interaction that occur in decision-making groupsC) describes the personality traits of effective leaders and group membersD) attempts to define the structure of various types of work groups


2) According to Hirokawa, which of the following is a question that a vigilant thinker shouldconsider?

A) What goal does the group want to achieve?B) How can conflict be minimized in the group?C) How can I achieve my agenda?D) How can we avoid groupthink?


3) Jakeʹs communication teacher had just assigned groups for a problem-solving discussionproject. After briefly introducing themselves, Jakeʹs group quickly began talking over the topicthey would select. Charise suggested, ʺLetʹs just discuss alcohol abuse on campus; there is lotsof information available, and we all know someone it applies to.ʺ Jeremy piped in, ʺYes, letʹsdo. Why waste time haggling over topics? Letʹs just get on with it.ʺ Jake replied, ʺWhy donʹtwe hold off deciding until we think of some additional topics. That way, weʹll have several tochoose from and we can compare them.ʺ Which function is Jake suggesting for his group?

A) identify a clear goal B) gather and use information effectivelyC) develop options D) develop a results driven structure


4) Koreshʹs group was considering how to approach the general topic of meth labs in their paneldiscussion. Some wanted to discuss the problem on a national scale, but Koresh wanted tolimit the topic to what was happening within the local area only. They had been arguing thisfor some time, and group members were getting frustrated. Finally, Sam suggested that theyuse a chalkboard, and make a written list of the pros and cons of each option. They did this,and it became clear that the best choice would be to limit the topic to the local area. Whichfunction did Sam suggest for his group?

A) identify a clear goal B) gather and use information effectivelyC) develop sensitivity toward others D) evaluate ideas


151

5) James, Matt, Karla, and Ann have formed a research group to study a communication theory.They each are responsible for contributing five articles to the group. They meet in the libraryand identify twenty articles that deal with their theory. They divide up the articles, and theyschedule a meeting in which they will give a report to the other group members over their fivearticles. This group is using which function effectively?

A) identify a clear, elevating goal B) gather and use information effectivelyC) develop options D) evaluate ideas


6) James, Matt, Karla, and Ann meet to discuss how they will put together their classpresentation on a communication theory. Ann expresses concern because feels thepresentation is not equally distributed amongst group members. James quickly dismisses herconcern without further discussion. James would be advised to remember which of thefollowing functions of effective group members?

A) identify a clear, elevating goal B) develop optionsC) develop sensitivity toward others D) gather and use information effectively


7) Which of the following problems is an example of a structured problem?A) how to combat student apathy on campusB) establishing criteria for distribution of student feesC) which classroom will hold the largest number of studentsD) how to encourage students to do internships


8) Frances and Trinny are working on a sales presentation for a client. An hour from now, theywill be holding a meeting with the client to review their ideas. They decide to pull their salesteam together to work on a plan. Is this an effective way to approach the task?

A) Yes, the more heads working on the problem the better.B) No, they can just consult an expert.C) Yes, the group will offer a variety of viewpoints.D) No, there is limited time.


9) The university council faces the problem of how to trim back the budget of the university dueto recent cutbacks. Most of the people on the newly elected council have had little experiencewith dealing with budget problems, therefore, they face a great deal of uncertainty. Which ofthe following would be an appropriate way to approach this problem?

A) offer three solutions and let the group select among themB) use an unstructured group format during the meetingsC) provide a structure for the group to help them manage their uncertaintyD) allow the group to be as spontaneous as possible to ensure creative idea generation


152

10) Which of the following is a characteristic of interaction, as opposed to structure in a group?A) There is much talk and participation from the group members.B) One person may dominate the discussion.C) A well-organized agenda keeps the meeting on a tight schedule.D) The leader manages the meeting efficiently.


11) The reflective thinking model refers to ________.A) an exercise to build team relationshipsB) a structure to help groups solve problems effectivelyC) a recommended method for writing research papersD) a method designed to help group members think creatively


12) A technique that can be used to identify the problem is ________.A) the force field analysis technique B) the Journalists Six QuestionsC) the Nominal Group technique D) a T chart


13) If group members examine the causes, effects, and history related to issues of importance tothe group, the group is conducting ________.

A) solution generation B) problem definitionC) problem analysis D) solution analysis


14) When a group establishes standards or goals for evaluating possible solutions, they aredeveloping their ________.

A) problem definitions B) criteriaC) relationships D) solutions


15) To enhance group creativity, it is important to _______.A) make sure everyone understands the problemB) promote a climate of freedomC) conduct a force field analysisD) limit the amount of timeE) both A and B


153

16) In the force field analysis technique, a driving force is one which ________.A) increases the chances of accomplishing a goalB) is an obstacle to accomplishing a goalC) encourages group members to participate in the evaluation processD) becomes a blocking behavior in the group interaction


17) Which of the following would be a restraining force for the problem of saving money forcollege?

A) interest rates earn you money effortlesslyB) you were taught the habit of saving as a childC) having money put into savings before you get your paycheckD) you own an old car that constantly needs expensive repairs


18) Sumitʹs group begins brainstorming ideas. Becky states an idea and Sumit says, ʺI think thatʹsthe best idea Iʹve heard yet.ʺ Based on this example, what should Sumit keep in mind whilebrainstorming?

A) It is important to offer constructive criticism rather than praise.B) Generation of ideas and evaluation of ideas should be separate.C) Praise only the ideas that you think could be feasible solutions.D) Nonverbal feedback is more effective than verbal feedback.


19) Nominal group technique includes ________.A) silent brainstorming by individuals followed by sharing ideas with the groupB) group members shout out ideas off the cuff as quickly as possibleC) searching the Internet for what has been done in the pastD) interviewing experts on the topic to gain their insights on past solutions


20) Tomas decides to use electronic brainstorming with his group. One reason this is a good ideais ________.

A) everyone in his group has computersB) there are status differences between group membersC) members can evaluate ideas as they are postedD) it is easier to moderate an electronic group


154

21) Which of the following is true of consensus?A) The decision is determined by majority vote.B) 100 percent of the group voted for the proposal.C) All group members can support the groupʹs decision.D) The majority of the group members can support the decision.


22) The major advantage of a decision reached by consensus is that ________.A) it takes time to developB) it is a quick, efficient way to arrive at a decisionC) groups are always able to come up with a consensusD) because group members have a role in it, they will support it


23) Which of the following is discussed as a cause of groupthink?A) The group has assigned a Devilʹs advocate.B) The group is using electronic brainstorming.C) The group feels apathetic about the task.D) The leader is keeping the group focused on the goal.


24) Which of the following is a technique that can be used to help a group reach a consensus?A) agree with others in order to avoid conflictB) emphasize areas of disagreementC) listen mainly to the experts in the groupD) keep the group oriented toward its goal


25) Groupthink occurs when ________.A) group members spend too much time arguingB) group members appear to agree, but really just want to avoid conflictC) the members of the group are too different from each other to come to a consensusD) an effective consensus has been reached


26) Which of the following is recommended as a way to combat groupthink?A) Donʹt be afraid to challenge comments made by high status members.B) Use someone outside the group to evaluate your decisions.C) Assign someone to be a devilʹs advocate.D) All of the above are recommended.


155

27) Which of the following can be valuable in evaluating the pros and cons of solutions that havebeen generated?

A) T chart B) Journalistʹs Six QuestionsC) force field analysis D) Deweyʹs Reflective Thinking Model


28) Which approach to leadership assumes that leaders are born, not made?A) trait approach B) functional approachC) styles approach D) situational approach


29) Gloria prides herself on her leadership capabilities. In preparation for group meetings, Gloriamakes sure the group is aware of a meetingʹs agenda, determines times and places formeetings, and gets useful information to members in advance of meetings. She also takes notesof what goes on at meetings. Is Gloria acting appropriately as group leader?

A) No, sheʹs doing too much when she should learn to farm out the work to groupmembers.

B) Yes, sheʹs exhibiting several excellent leadership skills that are appropriate to her role.C) No, she really shouldnʹt be responsible for determining times and places of meetings.D) Yes, but what Gloriaʹs doing should be expected of all group members, not just the leader


30) The instructor assigned Jan to be the groupʹs leader, but she has become a ʺdictatorʺ in groupmeetings. She rarely lets other group members offer suggestions and always controls howmuch gets accomplished. Whatʹs the term for Janʹs leadership style?

A) democratic B) laissez faire C) authoritarian D) participativeAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 60

31) When might it be appropriate to utilize an authoritative leaderships style with your group?A) when you need input from all group membersB) when there is a need for a quick, important decisionC) when you have more than fifteen people in the groupD) when you have an agenda


32) A leader who guides and facilitates discussion rather than dominating it demonstrates whichstyle of leadership?

A) democratic B) authoritarian C) passive D) laissez-faireAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 61

156

33) Zack was elected by his group to be the leader. During the group meetings, he did notrecommend any procedures for discussing decisions, he did not volunteer any information,and he only did what he was asked to do specifically. What leadership style was Zack using?

A) democratic B) laissez faire C) authoritarian D) participativeAnswer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 61

34) The maturity of group members plays an important role in which approach to leadership?A) trait approach B) functional approachC) style approach D) situational approach


35) A transformational leader influences the group by ________.A) providing a structure to help the group accomplish critical thinkingB) giving the group a new vision or energizing its cultureC) using democratic leadership styleD) understanding the leadership style that is appropriate for the given situation


36) Herb detested going to his group meetings because they were disorganized and generally awaste of time. What simple device would help this group?

A) a clear problem to solveB) a meeting agendaC) a clear definition of group member rolesD) some problem solving


37) The types of goals discussed at most meetings include ________.A) giving information, managing conflict, solving a problemB) researching a topic, taking action, managing conflictC) giving information, discussing information, taking actionD) discussing information, managing conflict, solving a problem


38) Step two in developing a meeting agenda involves ________.A) determining meeting goals B) organizing the agendaC) researching action items D) identifying what needs to be discussed


157

39) Which of the following is an effective strategy for organizing a meeting agenda?A) put the least important items at the beginning of the meetingB) start with announcementsC) make your first agenda item something that will involve actively involve group membersD) place your most important item last


40) Which of the following is an example of a metadiscussion comment?A) ʺI think the idea to bring in a local band is an excellent one.ʺB) ʺIʹm not clear on the criteria. Can we review it again before proceeding?ʺC) ʺWhatʹs for lunch?ʺD) ʺDoes anyone know the latest statistic on average ACT scores for incoming freshmen?ʺ


41) Marianna says to Suzie, ʺSuzie, youʹve done some research on honors programs in otherdepartments. What have you found out that might work in our department?ʺ By saying this,Marianna is using her ________ skills.

A) transformational leadership B) brainstormingC) gatekeeping D) problem-solving


42) Which of the following statements would be the best way to bring the group back on track?A) ʺTom, I think your comment was irrelevant.ʺB) ʺYou need to focus on the task at hand.ʺC) ʺYouʹre not listening to what I have to say.ʺD) ʺI think we need to spend time discussing the next item on the agenda.ʺ


43) One of the advantages of working in groups is that groups typically solve a problem morequickly than individuals can do alone.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 38

44) A functional approach to group communication studies the types of behaviors that lead tobetter quality decisions.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 38

45) John Deweyʹs reflective thinking model would be an example of a prescriptive approach togroup decision-making.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 46-47

46) A results driven structure for group work means the group should identify a goal.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 40

158

47) Too much structure in a group meeting can stifle interaction from low status group members.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 45-46

48) Force field analysis is an effective till for identifying the problem.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

49) Identifying and defining the problem includes a discussion of who is harmed by the problem,and when the harmful effects occur.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 47

50) It is usually better to spend time discussing which solutions you prefer before you analyze aproblem.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 48

51) It is NOT important to consider the cultural influences on the group when choosing aleadership style.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 63

52) ʺThe solution should be acceptable to the deanʺ is an example of criteria for a successfuldecision.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

53) Groups that use electronic brainstorming come up with more ideas than groups meetingface-to-face.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 51

54) After conducting a force-field analysis, the group should strive to minimize the driving forcesand maximize the restraining forces.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 48

55) The key to brainstorming is to praise each suggestion as it is made to encourage members tokeep participating.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 50

56) The nominal group technique is the same thing as silent brainstorming.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 51

57) Consensus is reached when a majority of the group votes in favor of a proposal.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53

159

58) A group who highly admires their leader is less likely to engage in groupthink than a groupwith an unpopular leader.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53-54

59) Process functions are leader behaviors that help maintain a positive group climate.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 60

60) A transformational leader provides the group with a new vision.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 63

61) Structuring, scheduling, and having an agenda are important in a polychronic culture.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 64

62) One of the functions of a gatekeeper is to encourage quiet people in the group to speak up anddiscourage long-winded ones.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 70

63) It is a good idea to put the least important item first on the agenda.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 66

Match the following terms with their correct definitions.

A. Authoritarian leaderB. Democratic leaderC. Functional approachD. Laissez faire leaderE. Situational approachF. Styles approachG. Task functionsH. Trait approachI. Transformational leader

64) The leadership style that is recommended is based upon task behaviors, relationshipbehaviors, and maturity of group members.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 62

65) This leader is ʺhands offʺ, letting group members provide the structure and process; onlyprovides information or help when asked.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 61

160

66) Leadership consists of those task and process behaviors that help a group achieve its goalseffectively.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 59

67) Effective leaders are those who are born with intelligence, are good communicators, and havegood social skills.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 59

68) This leader works to develop a consensus decision rather than telling people what to do orthink.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 61

69) This leader influences others by giving orders and controlling others.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 60

70) This approach to leadership suggests that leaders utilize one of three approaches.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 60

Match the terms with the correct definitions.

A. AgendaB. BrainstormingC. ConsensusD. Force field analysisE. GatekeepingF. GroupthinkG. MetadiscussionH. Nominal group techniqueI. T chart

71) Ideas are written down silently by individuals then shared face-to-face.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 51

72) Discussion about the groupʹs discussion.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 70

73) Used to analyze an issue by finding driving forces and restraining forces that increase ordecrease the probably of an event occurring.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

161

74) A technique used to generate ideas in which off-the-wall ideas are encouraged, andevaluating ideas is discouraged until a long list of ideas is generated.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 50

75) The failure of a group to adequately criticize and idea, or to agree too quickly in forming aconsensus.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53-54

76) A decision that is based upon interaction, in which all members agree to support.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53

77) A method used to list the pros and cons of possible solutions.Answer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 56

78) Technique used to encourage quiet members to participate or limit long-winded members.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 70

79) The ________ approach to leadership attempts to identify key communication behaviors thathelp a group arrive at a quality decision.Answer: functionalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 59

80) The force field analysis technique seeks to analyze a problem by determining the ________forces, which are forces that enhance movement toward the goal, and ________ forces, whichare forces that inhibit movement toward the goal.Answer: driving; restrainingDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

81) ________ ________ ________ is a technique for developing ideas in which members silentlywrite down their ideas, then discuss them face-to-face.Answer: Nominal group techniqueDiff: 2 Page Ref: 51

82) ________ is an agreement arrived at by a group through interaction in which all members ofthe group agree to support the decision.Answer: ConsensusDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53

83) ________ is the generation, application, combination, and extension of ideas.Answer: CreativityDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49-50

162

84) ________ is a faulty sense of agreement that occurs when members of the group fail to criticizean idea.Answer: GroupthinkDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53-54

85) A leader who leads by shaping the vision of a group based upon develop trust through qualityinterpersonal relationships with group members is a ________ leader.Answer: transformationalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 63

86) The steps of the Reflective Thinking Model include:(1) ________ and ________ the problem, (2)________ the problem, (3) ________ ________ solutions, (4) ________ the best solutions, and (5)________ ________.Answer: identify, define; analyze; generate creative; select; take actionDiff: 2 Page Ref: 46-47

87) A groupʹs focus on the task, the agenda, and being organized would be known as ________.Answer: structureDiff: 2 Page Ref: 45-46

88) The give and take of discussion in a group is known as ________.Answer: interactionDiff: 2 Page Ref: 46

89) The standards used to evaluate possible solutions are ________.Answer: criteriaDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

90) The number of people who must be present at a meeting in order to conduct business is a/an________.Answer: quorumDiff: 2 Page Ref: 68

91) What are three (of four) advantages mentioned in the textbook for working in groups?Answer: (1) Groups come up with more creative solutions to problems than a person working

alone.(2) Working with groups improves the comprehension of the ideas presented.(3) Group and team members are more satisfied with the conclusions andrecommendations if they participated in the discussions.(4) Groups have more available information by tapping the experiences of groupmembers.


163

92) What are structure and interaction in a group, and why does the textbook say groups need abalance of them?Answer: Structure is the organization of a group, accomplished by having and organizing a well

developed agenda that outlines your meeting goals and identifies what needs to bediscussed to achieve the goals. Interaction is the give and take discussion, withparticipation from the group members and attention to relationships. Interation ismanaged through metadiscussion, using effective gatekeeping skills, helping the groupto be sensitive to and aware of time, and using prescriptive strategies to manageinteraction. It is important that a group achieve a balance between the two, althoughthe exact percentage of each will vary with the situation. Too much structure and youlose the main advantages of a group; two much interaction and too little structure andyou may never move forward toward the group goal.


93) What are the five steps of the reflective thinking process?Answer: (1) Identify and define the problem, (2) Analyze the problem, (3) Generate creative

solutions, (4) Select the best solution, (5) Test and implement the solutionDiff: 2 Page Ref: 46-58

94) List and explain the six reasons groups and teams make stupid decisions.Answer: (1) Groups have no common goal. They do not begin with the end in mind and do not

have a collective vision for their mission.(2) Analysis paralysis. Talk is valued more than action. Members overanalyzeunimportant details.(3) Jumping to solutions. Group members propose solutions before the facts areknown and the problem has been analyzed.(4) Groupthink. Group members agree too quickly. Ideas are not questioned orchallenged.(5) Topic hopping. There is a lack of an agenda or meeting structure. Discussion is notfocused on the goal.(6) Killer inch. People agree on major points but argue over minor details.


95) Identify and explain the eight steps used in brainstorming. Which step is the most important,and why?Answer: (1) Select a problem that needs to be solved. (2) Discuss the history, causes, and

background of the problem so the group understands what options are needed. (3) Tellthe group to develop a creative mindset (set aside judgments and criticisms whenpeople offer ideas, stress quantity of ideas, avoid criticizing ideas, try and come up withone or more wild ideas, and piggyback off someone elseʹs ideas). (4) Startbrainstorming. give the group a time limit. (5) To reduce the possibility of evaluation ofideas, consider using a period of silent brainstorming before sharing ideas. (6) Recordideas on the board or flipchart. (7) Keep reminding the group not to evaluate ideas ofothers when they are first expressed. (8) Evaluate the ideas after all ideas have beenpresented.The most important step is to set aside judgments until the brainstorming session iscompleted. Evaluations, even praise, can inhibit creativity because people begin toself-censor their ideas for fear of being criticized.


164

96) Briefly define the difference between authoritarian, democratic, and laissez-faire leadershipstyles.Answer: Authoritarian leaders dominate the group; they provide the structure, make the

decisions, and stay detached from participation unless making decisions. Democraticleaders discuss policy decisions with group members, decisions are made by consensus,and the leader is more a facilitator than a directive leader. A laissez faire leader is handsoff, only providing structure or information when asked to do so.


97) Briefly explain the three steps for building an agenda.Answer: First, determine your meeting goals, which may include giving information, discussing

information, or taking action. If the goals are not clear, the meeting will not accomplishanything. Second, identify what needs to be discussed in order to achieve the goal. Doesinformation need to be provided? What issues should be focused on? Third, Organizethe agenda. For problem solving, refer to the reflective thinking method to structure thediscussion. For information, discussion, and action items, subheads can be used toorganize. Consider the placement of the most important or controversial items somaximum group energy and attention is gained.


98) What is consensus? Identify and explain three strategies that group members can use toachieve a consensus.Answer: Consensus is agreement among all members of a group or team to support an idea,

proposal, or solution. Three strategies that can be used to helps group reach aconsensus include the following. First, be goal oriented. Effective group members willkeep the group oriented toward their goal. Second, listen. They will listen effectively toone another by clarifying misunderstanding and giving the speaker eye contact. Third,groups should have honest dialogue and discussions in which everyone participatesand differences of opinion are sought.


99) Explain the difference between task and process functions.Answer: Task functions include behaviors that help the group get work done, such as making

records of group meetings. The process function deals with fostering harmoniousrelationships among group members rather than simply getting the job done.


100) Briefly explain the concept of transformational leadership.Answer: Transformational leadership is more of a philosophy than a set of prescriptions of what

to do. A transformational leader influences a group by building a shared vision for thegroup, challenging existing ways of thinking, and being a systems thinker. This is donethrough building trust through interpersonal relationships.


165

101) You are an upperclassman working with a faculty member in your major discipline. You andthe faculty member have been discussing how to help freshmen succeed in their classes. Oneof the pieces of information that your professor keeps bringing up is that students shouldspend at least three hours studying outside of class for each hour they spend in class. Thisamounts to nine hours a week for a typical three-hour course. To that end, you decide toconstruct a force-field analysis on that idea to see how you might help freshmen improve.Construct a force-field analysis on the topic described in the story. Once you have constructedthe analysis, write a brief statement explaining what strategies you might take to helpmotivate students to study more.Answer: The answers will vary; however, the student should divide responses into driving forces

and restraining forces. The driving forces should be those items that would encourage astudent to study nine hours a week for each class. Examples of driving forces might beimproved grades, increased scholarships, better employment opportunities after college,study hours in Greek organizations. Restraining forces should be issues that wouldinhibit a student from studying nine hours. (This list is certainly going to be longer!)Possible restrainers might be working too many hours, taking too many courses, lack ofa place to study. The last part of the answer should explain that the next step aftergenerating the list would be to find ways to increase or enhance the driving forces, andfind ways to overcome the restraining forces.


102) Regina is a biologist assigned to a group designed to discuss the preservation of wildlife in theregionʹs national park. Regina wants to be an effective team member. Using the sevenfunctions of effective team members found in the textbook, give specific examples of whatRegina can do to be an effective member of this team.Answer: First, Regina could identify and implement key functions so her group will achieve

successful results, specifically making sure the group members are using vigilantthinking techniques by clarifying the goal the group wishes to achieve, identifying ifsomething needs to be changed in order to reach the goal, considering the options thegroup has for reaching the goal, and looking at the positive and negative implications ofthe options. Next, she should ensure that the group identifies a clear, elevating goal thatis realistic but still challenging for the group. Third, Regina could help the groupdevelop a results driven structure that is organized around the steps the group needs totake to meet itʹs goal. Fourth, she should be able to gather and use informationeffectively. Information should be gathered, shared, and accurate conclusions should bedrawn from the information. Fifth, she can help her group to begin developingmultiple creative options. Regina might suggest brainstorming possible solutions to theproblem. When the group gets stuck, she might suggest taking a break and meeting ata later time to bring a fresh perspective to the issue. Once the group has narroweddown possible solutions, Regina could suggest that they begin the next step ofevaluating ides by discussing the pros and cons of each one. Finally, Regina mustdevelop a sensitivity to others in the group. She could affirm otherʹs research and ideasabout the problem. She could also convey that she is interested in what others aresaying by listening and being nonverbally responsive.


166

103) What is the reflective thinking method? Identify the steps used in the method and thetechniques that can be useful in each step.Answer: The reflective thinking method is a way of structuring problem solving to manage

uncertainty and to ensure that key functions are accomplished during group discussion.The steps involved are (1) to identify and define the problem. Techniques for this stepinclude phrasing the problem as a policy question and using the Journalistʹs SixQuestions to help define the issues. (2) Analyze the problem to break it down intosmaller pieces. Techniques include the use of force field analysis to identify driving andrestraining forces, and the development of clear criteria to help in the evaluation ofsolutions. (3) Generate creative solutions by using brainstorming, silent brainstorming,or electronic brainstorming. (4) Select the best solution by using ranking, ratings,majority vote or expert decision. Reach consensus by remaining focused on the goal,listening, and promoting open and honest dialogue that requires input from allmembers. (5) Take action by developing a clear action plan and utilizing a written list ofwho should do what.


104) Compare and contrast trait, functional, styles, situational, and transformational groupleadership and give an example of each.Answer: The trait approach to leadership says that people are born with certain traits or cultivate

traits that will make them effective as a leader. Traits such as intelligence, confidence,and enthusiasm are a few of the traits that effective leaders often possess. However,having these traits alone does not necessarily mean that someone will be an effectiveleader. As opposed to looking a certain traits, the functional approach identifies taskand process functions that will make leaders effective. In other words, a leader may beintelligent and enthusiastic, but he or she must also be able to help the group get workdone, as well as help the group maintain a friendly climate. Itʹs not just about having acertain personality; itʹs also about what you do. Like the functional approach, the stylesapproach identifies behaviors that leaders exhibit. Specifically, it looks at leaderʹs stylesof interacting with others, categorizing them as authoritarian, democratic, or laissezfaire. Unlike the functional approach, it does not prescribe what effective leaders do oridentify the most effective style. The situational approach states that the most effectivestyle depends on the situation and the type of group that the leader is dealing with atthe time. A leader is not stuck with one style like a personality trait, but he or sheshould be able to adapt his/her leadership style to fit the situation. Like the stylesapproach, the situational approach recommends that leaders adapt their styles basedupon the groupʹs needs. Like the functional approach, it examines the groupʹs task andrelationship behaviors. However, it also examines the groupʹs maturity level. Basedupon an assessment of the groupʹs task and maturity level, the situational approachprescribes how directive the leader should be with the group.

Unlike the functional approach, the idea behind transformational leadership is less of aprescription and more of a philosophy. It combines ideas from both the situational andstyles approach. The transformational leader is both a democratic and situational leader.He or she develops relationships with people in the group in order to build trust, andpaints a picture of a shared vision to energize and motivate the group toward its goal.A transformational leader must certainly also display the characteristics described in thetraits approach, be willing to follow through on task and process functions, andeffectively assess the needs of group members like the styles and situationalapproaches.


167

VOLUME 4Chapter 4.1: Developing Your Presentation

1) Which of the following statements illustrates a difference between public speaking andwriting?

A) In public speaking, you use more formal language than in writing.B) In writing you must carefully document your sources; in public speaking it is not

necessary.C) In writing, redundancy is not desirable; in public speaking, redundancy is necessary.D) In writing, organization is necessary; in public speaking, organization is not very

important.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 2

2) According to the textbook, the most central element in all aspects of preparing your speech is________.

A) your supporting material B) considering your audienceC) becoming confident in the process D) selecting your topic


3) Yolanda was looking forward to giving her informative speech because she liked hertopic--her hometown. However, when she gave the speech the audience seemeddisinterested; she couldnʹt understand why she got such negative audience feedback. Giventhis information about the situation, what was Yolandaʹs mistake?

A) She violated several ethical principles of public speaking.B) She didnʹt have enough research and statistics in the speech to make it interesting.C) She confused the roles of speaker and listener.D) She was speaker-centered rather than audience-centered in her topic selection


4) When faced with the prospect speaking anxiety it is important to remember ________.A) that a rush of adrenaline is a hindranceB) that it is an uncommon reactionC) the audience perceives that you are less nervous than you may feelD) only unprepared speakers experience anxiety


168

5) Grace knew her speech--backwards and forwards. She rehearsed it over and over again,timing it to make sure she didnʹt run over the time limit. When she actually delivered thespeech, she found herself much less nervous and much more confident than she expected tobe. Which guideline for developing confidence provided in your text applies here?

A) recreate the speech environment when you rehearseB) be preparedC) know your audienceD) act calm to feel calm


6) Mandy was really nervous before her speech, but she just kept concentrating on howimportant she believed her message to be. She felt very convicted in her message, and thatconviction finally helped her dispel her nervousness before the presentation. Which tip aboutdeveloping confidence in public speaking does this example reflect?

A) focus on your message rather than your fearB) seek speaking opportunitiesC) visualize your successD) know your introduction and conclusion


7) Carmen is feeling anxious about her upcoming presentation. Her instructor has suggestedthat she practice some general relaxation techniques in addition to visualizing herself calmlypreparing and delivering her presentation. What technique is Carmen using to manage herspeaker anxiety?

A) skills training B) cognitive restructuringC) systematic desensitization D) meditation


8) Melinda visits the communication lab and watches a videotape of a successful presentationseveral times. She becomes very familiar with the tape. Finally, she pictures herself as thespeaker on the tape. She can see herself giving a successful presentation. What technique isMelinda using to overcome her anxiety?

A) cognitive restructuring B) systematic desensitizationC) positive though patterns D) performance visualization


169

9) Brady is making a presentation to his freshman speech class. Since he was in AP classesduring his high school career, he develops the central idea for his presentation around hisexperience: ʺTaking AP classes in high school can help prepare you for college.ʺ In choosingthis central idea, Brady has not ________.

A) considered the occasion.B) narrowed his topic.C) conducted an environmental analysis.D) considered his audience.E) reduced his idea to a single topic.


10) In the previous question, Bradyʹs central idea is ________.A) appropriate because his audience will be interested in doing well in college.B) appropriate because some of his audience will have taken AP classes.C) inappropriate because taking AP classes is no longer possible for college students.D) inappropriate because the audience already knows the information.


11) In preparation for her speech, Mattie asked her classmates questions about how they wouldrespond to her topic, visualized her classmates responses as she rehearsed, and tried todevelop a presentation that was clear and understandable to her classmates. As she gave herpresentation, she found herself thinking about her classmates and how to adapt her messageto connect with them. She almost completely forgot her own anxiety. This example bestillustrates which techniques for managing speaking anxiety?

A) focusing on your audience B) focus on your messageC) use creative rehearsal techniques D) use mental restructuring


12) Rey presented an informative speech on earthquakes. He described the structural causes ofearthquakes, how they develop, which areas of the earth are prone to quakes, how quakes aremeasured, the damage they do, and what to do when one hits. The speech became dry, theaudienceʹs attention declined, and Reyʹs speech exceeded the time limit by three minutes.From this description, what was Reyʹs mistake?

A) poor topic selection B) lack of appropriate researchC) incoherent organization D) failing to narrow his topic


13) An informative speech has been assigned, so Jamal starts to worry about what he can possiblypresent to his class. That night he takes out a blank sheet of paper and just starts writing downevery possible idea for a speech topic that he can think of. What is Jamal doing?

A) experiencing information overloadB) engaging in silent brainstormingC) finding logical divisions in his thinkingD) using a categorical approach to topic selection


170

14) Melvin has been invited to speak at career day for his sonʹs eighth grade class. Melvin is acomputer programmer whose job involves developing financial planning software. Ratherthan talk about his products, he decided to focus his talk on computer programming in thedevelopment of computer games. The presentation was a success. What technique did Melvinuse that helped his speech be successful?

A) consider your interests and experiences B) consider current eventsC) consider your audience D) consider logical divisions in thinking


15) Marcus decides that he wants to give a persuasive presentation on the topic of blood donation,however, he has never donated blood himself and doesnʹt plan to participated in upcomingblood drives. Marcus should have paid closer attention to what aspect of topic selection?

A) consider your audience B) consider the occasionC) consider your experiences and interests D) consider current events


16) Kareem was asked to make a presentation to his fraternity on the history of their nationalorganization. His three main points covered the founders, the original charter, and the originof some of the traditions. The general purpose of this speech was most likely ________.

A) to inform B) to persuadeC) to entertain D) to demonstrate


17) Nate was asked to give an after-dinner speech at the awards banquet for the rugby team. Hedecided to take a light approach to the sport, and entitled his speech, ʺRugby, Rugby, How DoI Love Thee? or Three Ways to Break Your Legs.ʺ The general purpose of this speech is mostlikely ________.

A) to inform B) to persuadeC) to demonstrate D) to entertain


18) Which of the following is an appropriate example of a specific purpose for a speech topersuade?

A) At the end of my speech, the audience will be able to list the steps of a golf swing.B) At the end of my speech, the audience will be able to explain the three steps in making

brownies.C) At the end of my speech, the audience will understand the process of nuclear fusion.D) At the end of my speech, the audience will believe that the handicapped need better

access on campus.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 16

171

19) ʺAs a result of my presentation, my audience will recycle their newspapers and aluminumproducts.ʺ This is an example of a ________.

A) specific purpose statement B) central ideaC) general purpose statement D) thesis statement


20) Which of the following would be an appropriate central idea for a presentation?A) Swimming and hot air ballooning are two enjoyable recreational activities.B) What is hot air ballooning?C) Swimming is an enjoyable recreational activity that provides important health benefits

for college students.D) As a result of my presentation, my audience will be able to list the health benefits

associated with swimming.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 16

21) Sara is giving a speech to her sociology class. Her central idea is ʺWhy are consumers drawnto the violence in video games?ʺ What is the problem with this central idea?

A) The central idea should reflect a single topic.B) The central idea should be a complete declarative sentence.C) The central idea should use specific language.D) The central idea should be audience centered.


22) Carmelita was planning her speech with the central idea, ʺSoft drinks arenʹt bad.ʺ In using thiscentral idea, Carmelita failed to ________.

A) consider her audience B) choose a single topicC) write a declarative sentence D) use direct, specific language


23) Darci gave a speech with the central idea, ʺC. S. Lewisʹ writings were influenced by thereading he did throughout his life.ʺ Her main points were ʺAs a child, C. S. Lewis enjoyedbooks with animal characters.ʺ ʺAs an adolescent, C. S. Lewis enjoyed books on Norsemythology.ʺ ʺAs an adult, C. S. Lewis studied Medieval Literature.ʺ The main points followwhat type of sequence?

A) chronological B) reasons C) logical D) spatialAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 20

172

24) Marcia is generating main ideas for her speech on film genres. She naturally thinks of genressuch as horror, westerns, and romantic comedies. She is using which tip for the generation ofmain ideas?

A) Think of logical divisions.B) Think about reasons why the central idea is true.C) Break the central idea down into a chronological sequence.D) Use direct, specific language.


25) Karl is researching a speech on euthanasia. He knows that there are some excellent journalarticles on the subject, but his universityʹs small library doesnʹt carry the journals in which thearticles appear. Karl has only a few days until he must give the speech; what should he do?

A) Karl should use interlibrary loan to see if he can locate the needed journal articles.B) Karl waited too late to start his research, so heʹll have to use something else instead of the

journal articles.C) Karl should substitute Web site information for the journal articles, because material

from the Web is more accurate and current than published journal articles.D) Karl should use a full-text database, like Lexis/Nexis, to attempt to locate complete texts

of the journal articles.Answer: DDiff: 3 Page Ref: 28

26) Dan was using Alta Vista on the web to find sources on the history of Latin American dance.When he typed in that phrase, he ended up with a list of 10,000 finds. What did Dan fail to do?

A) He should have limited his hits by using a Boolean search.B) He should not have used the word ʺhistoryʺ in his search.C) He should have started in the library rather than on the web.D) He should have used a different search engine.


27) Max was using the Internet to find sources on parasailing. He found several interestingarticles, but none of them contained a date, author, or publishing organization. What shouldMax do?

A) If the article has interesting information that is applicable to his speech, use it anyway.B) Disregard those sources and continue looking for more sources that are documented.C) Create an author and date that seems reasonable.D) Print the webpage out and attach it to his speech documents.


173

28) Adrian used primarily Web sources for his informative speech about gun control. However,his over-reliance on the Web site sponsored by the National Rifle Association caused hisspeech to be slanted in one direction, rather than presenting multiple sides of the issue. Whichof the following statements best explains this situation?

A) Adrian forgot the textʹs advice about considering the accountability of a Web site beforerelying too heavily on it in a speech.

B) Adrian forgot the textʹs advice about determining the objectivity of a Web site beforerelying too heavily on it in a speech.

C) Adrian should have found more accurate and current information, so that he didnʹt relyon the NRA Web site alone.

D) Adrian should have mixed Web sources and traditional library resources, to prevent biasfrom emerging in his speech.


29) One of the drawbacks mentioned in the textbook of using books as sources is ________.A) they are heavy to carry aroundB) the information is not usually as reliable as articles in journalsC) because it takes a longer time to publish a book, the information in them may be datedD) the information is not as reliable as a website


30) Jana would like to find articles for her speech in journals such as the Harvard Business Reviewand Management Quarterly. Where is the best place for her to start looking for possible articleson her topic?

A) hard copy or CD Rom periodical indicesB) the card catalogueC) a search engine on the World Wide WebD) government documents


31) Todd found a citation to journal article that he is certain will help him in his speech; however,his library does not carry that particular journal. How should Todd go about finding thearticle?

A) Call several larger libraries around the country to see if they have it.B) Use the Interlibrary Loan service in his library.C) Give up and find a different source.D) See if he can find the journal in a bookstore.


32) A hypothetical illustration ________.A) will generally tend to lessen the speakerʹs credibilityB) should be presented as though it were trueC) is acceptable if the speaker makes it clear it is not a real illustrationD) usually bores the audience, so should not be used


174

33) The primary advantage of illustrations is ________.A) they offer solid proof of the point you want to makeB) audiences enjoy listening to stories, so your speech is more interestingC) you can just make up stories if you canʹt find other materialsD) they are the primary means of building speaker credibility


34) Descriptions and explanations ________.A) should be used as much as possible in the speechB) tell a story that your audience will find it easy to relate toC) are best when drawn out and lengthyD) are best when used sparingly and kept brief and concrete


35) What form of supporting material is being used in the following question? ʺIf many statesprofit from the institution of a lottery, why canʹt our home state do the same?ʺ

A) an extended analogy B) a figurative analogyC) a literal analogy D) an operational definition


36) Which of the following is an important guideline for the use of statistics in a speech?A) Use reliable, current sources for your statistics.B) Interpret a statistic in order to prove a point in your speech.C) Use as many statistics as you can find because they enhance credibility.D) Report a statistic down to the last decimal point, to be thorough and accurate.


37) Sources should be cited in your speech ________.A) if they are from visuals you createdB) if the fact is widely available in other sourcesC) if you use direct quotes or paraphrased informationD) if you are using an analogy


38) In her speech about racism in America, Selena used the following: ʺJust like Martin LutherKing said three decades ago, ʹI have a dream; I have a dream todayʹ I also have a dream thatracism will end in my lifetime,ʺ what form of supporting material was she using?

A) a literary quotation from Martin Luther Kingʹs famous speechB) a literary analogy, because Selena compared racism today with racism three decades agoC) expert statistics, because Martin Luther King was an expert on racismD) a brief illustration about racism now, versus three decades ago


175

39) Frank is speaking to a group who has a very different cultural background than his. Whatrecommendations should Frank use when planning his speech so it will be adapted to hisaudience?

A) Frank should limit his use of examples for this audience.B) Frank should NOT use visual aids to help illustrate his talk.C) Frank should limit his use of illustrations.D) Frank should ask for tips and strategies from reliable audience members before

preparing his presentation.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 34

40) When citing an author in your presentation, you should be certain to do all of the followingEXCEPT

A) make sure any authority you cite is actually an authority on the subject.B) make sure you cite authorities who share your biases.C) make sure you explain dissenting points of view.D) make sure you cite authorities accurately.


41) Being audience-centered means that you should not give a speech that your audience woulddisagree with.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 4

42) Research shows that if you feel nervous, the audience can usually spot nervous gestures or ashaky voice.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 5

43) Most public speakers become progressively more comfortable when they speak.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 5-6

44) If you experience speaking anxiety, it is a good idea to practice giving public presentations.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 5-6

45) The purpose of a speech in which you seek to change the attitudes of your audience towardthe use of genetically altered crops would be to inform.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 16

46) It is appropriate to begin the general purpose of your speech with the phrase, ʺAt the end ofmy presentation, the audience will...ʺAnswer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 14

176

47) A central idea should be written in a declarative sentence and reflect a single topic.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 16

48) A good central idea uses abstract language.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 16

49) The people you know can be good sources of supporting material.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 22

50) Everything you include in your presentation should support your central idea.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 16-17

51) It is a good idea to use many definitions in your speech.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 37

52) The specific purpose of your presentation is never stated in the presentation itself.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 15

53) Illustrations are good to use as supporting material because they tell a story that gets theaudienceʹs attention.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 30-31

54) Illustrations can be just a short word or phrase.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 30

55) A definition by classification is one in which you place a word in a general category, thendifferentiate it from other items in the category.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 32

56) An operational definition is one in which you compare the word to other things that aresimilar to it.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 32

57) ʹThe human mind is like a filing cabinet,ʺ is an example of a literal analogy.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 33

58) Comparing the traits of a housecat to the traits of a leopard is a literal analogy.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 33

177

59) When using statistics in a speech, it is important to give the audience the entire number, ratherthan rounding it off.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 33-34

60) The primary purpose of lay testimony is to stir the audienceʹs emotions by helping themidentify with the average person.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 35


A. Boolean searchB. Call numberC. Card catalogueD. DirectoryE. HyperlinkF. PeriodicalG. Periodical indexH. Search engine

61) A Web search that lets you enclose phrases in parenthesis so that you search is limited to thespecific words or terms.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 24

62) A highlighted word or graphic on a webpage that will direct you to a specific site.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 25

63) The numerical code by which books are organized in a library.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 26-27

64) A popular magazine or professional journal.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 27

65) An Internet site that offers the user ever more specific categories through which to search theweb.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 23

66) A file of information about the books in a library, may be an index-card file or a computerizedsystem.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 27

178

67) A listing of bibliographical data for articles published in a group of magazines and/or journalsduring a given time period.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 28


A. ClassificationB. DescriptionC. Figurative analogyD. Hypothetical illustrationE. IllustrationF. Literal analogyG. Operational definitionH. Oral citationI. Statistic

68) A statement that provides a word picture of something.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 31

69) A statement that shows how a term works or what it does.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 32

70) A story or anecdote that provides an example of an idea, issue, or problem the speaker isdiscussing.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 30

71) A definition constructed by first placing a term in the general class to which it belongs andthen differentiating it from all other members of that class.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 32

72) A comparison between two seemingly dissimilar things that share some common feature onwhich the comparison depends.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 33

73) An example that might realistically happen, but has not really occurred.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 31

74) A comparison of two similar things.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 33

179

75) The spoken presentation of information about a source, such as the author, title, andpublication date.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 35

76) ʺA platelet is a tiny, colorless blood cellʺ is an example of a(n) ________ definition.Answer: classificationDiff: 2 Page Ref: 32

77) ʺLaser beams aid surgeons by cutting or destroying diseased tissue, shrinking tumors, burningoff tissue, or sealing blood vessels.ʺ This statement is an example of a(n) ________ definition.Answer: operationalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 32

78) Karl is researching for a presentation on WWII. He visits a retirement home to visit withpeople who were adults during that time period. His interview subjects are a rich source for________ testimony.Answer: layDiff: 2 Page Ref: 35

79) The broad reason for giving a presentation is the ________ purpose of the speech.Answer: generalDiff: 1 Page Ref: 14

80) What the listeners should know or be able to do at the end of your speech is the ________purpose.Answer: specificDiff: 1 Page Ref: 15

81) ________ ________ is a technique used to generate creative ideas. It is one recommended wayto help you find a topic for your presentation.Answer: Silent brainstormingDiff: 1 Page Ref: 11

82) Popular magazines and professional journals are examples of ________.Answer: periodicalsDiff: 2 Page Ref: 27

83) A statement that makes clear how something is done or why it exists in its present of past formis a/an ________.Answer: explanationDiff: 1 Page Ref: 32

84) ________ is/are numeral data that summarizes examples.Answer: StatisticsDiff: 1 Page Ref: 33-34

180

85) When a speaker mentions the author, date of publication, and title of a source in the speech,the speaker is giving a(n) ________ ________.Answer: oral citationDiff: 2 Page Ref: 35

86) A comparison between two things that are by nature dissimilar, but share some essentialcommon feature is a(n) ________ analogy.Answer: figurativeDiff: 2 Page Ref: 33

87) Briefly discuss three ways that public speaking differs from written communication.Answer: Public speaking uses more informal language than written communication; you use

shorter words and personal pronouns. Second, public speaking cannot rely uponbibliographies or reference pages to provide bibliographic information on the sources.Public speakers must state the source in the text of the speech. Third, because theaudience for a speech is listening, not reading, the speaker must be very clear, and userepetition. Information that is important, such as the main points, should be repeatedseveral times to help the audience understand and remember. It is also important to useoral organizational cues that help the audience follow along.

Diff: 2 Page Ref: 2

88) What does it mean to be an audience-centered presentation speaker?Answer: Being audience-centered means to keep the audience in mind at all stages of the speech

preparation process. When selecting a topic, narrowing it down, selecting supportingmaterial, etc. the audience must be taken into account. In addition, beingaudience-centered means to keep the diversity of an audience in mind. That meansbeing aware of cultural information that might not be comprehensible, and beingsensitive to stereotypes or terms that might be offensive to the audience.

Diff: 2 Page Ref: 4

89) List the questions that you should keep in mind when selecting a topic.Answer: Who is the audience? What is the occasion? What are my interests and experiences?Diff: 2 Page Ref: 10-11

90) If you are stumped and cannot think of an idea for a presentation the text recommends threeapproaches. List and briefly explain each of these.Answer: (1) Use silent brainstorming. Take three minutes and list as many topics as you can

think of, without evaluation. Then, go back and consider which of the possible topicslook promising. (2) Scan web directories and web pages. Look under generalcategories to see more specific topics. (3) You can listen and read for topic ideas. Youcan read the newspaper, listen to the nightly news, listen to friends, listen to topics inyour classes, etc.


91) List at least five of the recommended methods for dealing with speaking anxiety.Answer: (1) know how to prepare a speech, (2) be prepared, (3) focus on your audience, (4) focus

on your message, (5) give yourself a mental pep talk, (6) use deep breathing techniques.(7) take advantage of opportunities to speak, (8) get professional help if you need it


181

92) Explain the three types of general purposes for presentations. How are they different?Answer: To inform is to define, describe, or explain a person, thing, place, or concept. To

persuade is to change or reinforce audience membersʹ ideas or convictions, or to urgethem to do something. To entertain is to amuse an audience.


93) Pat had to give an informative speech for his public speaking class. He wrote as his centralidea, ʺWomen-you canʹt live with them, you canʹt live without them, who understands them?ʺExplain what is wrong with this central idea.Answer: Most likely this topic does not take the audience into account, as it is derogatory to

women. Secondly, it is written as a question, and a central idea must be written as adeclarative sentence that paraphrases one single idea. This possibly has more than oneidea.


94) Explain the use of oral citations.Answer: An oral citation is what a speaker should do when he or she uses information taken

from a source, unless that information is a widely known fact. A statistic, direct quote,or paraphrase from a source should be cited by giving the author, date of publication,and title.


95) Once you have decided on your central idea, how can subdivide it into main ideas. List thethree questions to ask .Answer: (1) Does the central idea have logical divisions? (2) Can you think of several reasons the

central idea is true? (3) Can you support the central idea with a series of steps or achronological sequence?


96) List the nine components of the audience-centered public speaking model.Answer: 1) select and narrow topic (2) identify purpose (3) develop central idea (4.) generate

main ideas (5) gather supporting material (6) organize presentation (7) rehearsepresentation (8) deliver presentation (9) consider the audience at every stage

Diff: 2 Page Ref: 4

182

97) For the following main points, write a specific purpose statement, a central idea, and giveexamples of three types of appropriate supporting material for the topic.

I. Low-carbohydrate diets are not well balanced.II. Low-carbohydrate diets have not been proven to be effective.III. Low-carbohydrate diets are not well balanced.Answer: Specific purpose: at the end of my speech, my audience should believe that

low-carbohydrate diets are harmful. Central idea: Low-carbohydrate diets are harmfulto your health. Supporting material might include statistics on such things as how manypeople are using the diet, or how much money is spent yearly on the diets. If statisticscan be found on how many people lose weight, how much, and how long they keep itoff, they would be effective. In order to make the speech more interesting to theaudience, the speaker might find illustrations that might consist of people who havestories about the diet, or maybe a hypothetical illustration of a person trying to stay onthe diet. Expert testimony of medical doctors or medical researchers might be effectiveto make the arguments believable. Lay testimony might help make the arguments clearor identifiable for the audience.

Diff: 3 Page Ref: 15-17, 30-35

98) ʺAt the end of my speech the audience will know more about television.ʺ Explain what iswrong with this specific purpose, and the steps one should take to write a more appropriatepurpose, and rewrite the specific purpose correctly.Answer: The topic has not been narrowed down. The speaker should make a list of subtopics on

the general topic of television, then, based upon his/her own interests and the interestand knowledge of the audience, narrow down to a sub-topic. For example, a moreappropriate topic might be ʺThe impact of the Internet on television,ʺ or ʺTherepresentation of Latinos on television.ʺ Then, the specific purpose might be written: ʺAtthe end of my speech the audience will be able to list three new programs that featureLatino actors.ʺ


99) List and explain the six criteria for evaluating a Web source.Answer: The Web source must be (1) Accountable: which means the Web page should include

information on who wrote it, who sponsors it, the date, etc. (2) Accurate: the Web pageshould document its facts with citations, just as a printed source should do. Ideally, thesource uses hyperlinks that allow the reader to visit the original sources. In addition, theWeb site should be free of mechanical errors; sloppiness in that area can indicatesloppiness in content. (3) Objective: is the purpose of the sponsor to support an issue?What are the biases of the author? Does he or she stand to gain from taking a slantedposition? (4) Dated: the Web site should include a date of when it was posted andupdated. As in other sources, recent data is usually preferable. (5) Usability: The Website should not contain so many complicated graphics that you cannot download it oruse it efficiently. (6) Sensitivity to diversity: free of bias against either gender, anyethnic, racial, or sexual preference sub group, and against people with disabilities.


183

100) Define statistics. Explain when they should be used in a presentation and the guidelines forusing them effectively.Answer: Statistics are numerical reporting of facts. They should be used to support arguments or

to make a point; they add believability to the speaker. When using statistics, round offlarge numbers (this helps listeners), use visual aids to help the audience comprehendthem, and cite your sources (author, title, date).


101) Differentiate between literal and figurative analogies, give an example of each, and explain therecommendations for using them.Answer: A figurative analogy is a comparison between two seemingly dissimilar things. For

example you could say, ʺMy motherʹs love washed over me like a wave.ʺ A literalanalogy is the comparison of two similar things. For example you could compare anapple to a pear. When using analogies it is important to remember to compare two verysimilar things when using a literal analogy. Also, make the similarity between the twoobjects very clear when using a figurative analogy.


184

VOLUME 4Chapter 4.2: Organizing and Outlining Your Presentation

1) What type of organizational pattern is reflected in these main points?

I. As a young child, J.R.R. Tolkien and his young cousins invented a language calledNebosh.II. As a college student, J.R.R. Tolkien invented several languages influenced by Welsh andFinnish.III. By the time he published the works of fiction for which he is famous, J.R.R. Tolkien hadinvented a number of Elvish languages.

A) chronological B) spatialC) topical D) problem-solution


2) If you want to inform an audience about three equally ʺriskyʺ behaviors related to contractingHIV, which organizational pattern would work best?

A) spatial B) topicalC) chronological D) problem-solution


3) Janine organized her three statistics on organ transplants according to their significance. Shesaved her ʺclincherʺ point about how easy it is to indicate your willingness to donate bysigning the back of your drivers license for the last point before her conclusion. Whatorganizational principle did Janine demonstrate in this speech?

A) complexity B) specificity C) primacy D) recencyAnswer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

4) Maxine develops a speech in which her main ideas include the following:

I. Fuel emissions from cars results in pollution.II. Driving alternative fuel vehicles will help decrease the pollution.

What type of organizational pattern is Maxine using?A) topical B) chronologicalC) spatial D) problem-solution


185

5) J.P. wants to develop a presentation about the five bases of interpersonal power (legitimate,reward, coercive, expert, and referent). His topic would be best suited for what type oforganizational pattern?

A) topical B) spatialC) chronological D) cause-and-effect


6) Nicole was planning a speech advocating the position that all students be required to take twoyears of a foreign language prior to graduation. She was fairly certain that most of the peoplein her class were against her position. She felt that the strongest argument she had for thisaudience was the value of this skill when seeking employment. She decided to present thatargument as her first main point. What principle is Nicole using?

A) recency B) complexity C) primacy D) specificityAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

7) Stephen was planning a speech on the environmental impact of the eruption of Mt. St. Helens.He planned to organize his speech by starting at the area immediately around the cone, moveto a discussion of the areas directly east of the mountain, then move counterclockwise to thenorth and west of the mountain. What type of organizational pattern was he using?

A) chronological B) spatialC) topical D) cause-and-effect


8) Laverne makes the claim in her persuasive speech that unregulated cars in major urban areascontribute to the depletion of the ozone layer, and depletion of the ozone layer contributes toglobal warming. Which type of organizational pattern is reflected in this example?

A) cause-and-effect B) topicalC) problem-solution D) spatial


9) Chris wants to give a speech on the life of Harry Truman. He wants his main points to discussTrumanʹs childhood, his college years, and his adult years. What type of organizationalpattern is Chris using?

A) topical B) chronologicalC) cause-effect D) problem-solution


10) For your persuasive speech on assisted suicide, you decide to first provide a hypotheticalexample of a terminally ill patient who requested assistance with bringing about his owndeath, then to talk about the current state of the laws covering assisted suicide. Whichorganizational strategy does this plan reflect?

A) complexity B) specificityC) primacy D) ʺsoftʺ to ʺhardʺ evidence


186

11) In his speech on varying explanations of how the earth came into existence, Eduardo beginswith opinions, moves to inferences, and uses scientific facts in support of his last point. Whatprinciple of supporting material organization is Eduardo reflecting in his speech?

A) primacy-recency B) ʺsoftʺ to ʺhardʺ evidenceC) complexity D) the specificity principle


12) In Darylʹs speech on football, he tells the audience in the introduction that he is going todiscuss the history of the sport, some of the rules, and the benefits of playing football oncardiovascular fitness. What type of signpost is Daryl demonstrating?

A) a transitionB) an initial previewC) an internal summaryD) an final summaryE) an external summary


13) Adrianna says, ʺNext, we will discuss the steps to become certified and remain certified inCPR: enroll in the course, attend the course, and keep your certification up to date by takingthe course again.ʺ This is an example of a(n) ________.

A) initial preview B) internal previewC) internal summary D) final summary


14) As Jerome reached his third and final point of his speech, he paused dramatically and movedabout three feet toward his left before continuing. This example describes Jerome using a/an________.

A) nonverbal transition B) verbal transitionC) internal preview D) final summary


15) After doing a survey of his class, Ryan decided his discussion of Teslaʹs death ray devicewould be difficult for his audience to follow. One of the ways he adapted to this was toparaphrase and repeat vital information at the end of each main point. What device was Ryanusing in his speech?

A) internal summary B) transitionC) preview D) final summary


187

16) In a speech, Rebecca said: ʺThus, you should now understand the three most-recommendedmethods for enhancing your ability to recall peopleʹs names: the repetition method, theword-association method, and the visual imagery method. I hope that you will put thesemethods into practice and that you will remember my name the next time you see me in thehall. Thank you.ʺ What device is Rebecca making use of in her speech?

A) a transition B) a preview statementC) an internal summary D) a final summary


17) Before moving to your next point in your presentation you say, ʺWe have discussed whatsleep deprivation is and why it can be a problem for college students.ʺ This is an example ofa(n) ________.

A) internal preview B) internal summaryC) initial preview D) final summary


18) Words or phrases such as ʺnextʺ, ʺfinallyʺ, ʺin conclusionʺ, ʺfirstʺ, ʺsecondʺ, ʺin additionʺ arereferred to as ________.

A) internal summaries B) internal previewsC) verbal transitions D) nonverbal transitions


19) You have gained your audienceʹs attention, introduced your speech topic, previewed yourmain points, and given your audience a reason to listen to your speech. Next you transitioninto your first point. What have you left out of this speech introduction?

A) Nothing; you have included all of the necessary elements of an effective introduction.B) You have overlooked the preview statement.C) You have not included the proof of your credibility.D) You have not included your specific purpose.


20) In Tedʹs speech on surfing, he is trying to decide whether or not to tell the audience in hisintroduction that he has been a surfer since he was just a kid. He wonders if this will help orhurt his credibility. What textbook advice applies here?

A) Ted should avoid describing his experience with the topic because he will appear to be aʺknow-it-allʺ and will sound condescending to his audience.

B) Ted should give a brief, credibility-building explanation of his experience with the topic.C) Ted should give a full explanation of his experience with the topic, including when he

started surfing, how many years heʹs surfed, how often he surfs, etc.D) For the sake of suspense, Ted should wait until his conclusion to describe his surfing

experience.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 56-58

188

21) A speech introduction that begins with, ʺDid you know that a light bulb has been inventedthat will last ten times as long as the ones we use today, but the government wonʹt let it bemarketed to the public?ʺ is employing a device known as a/an ________.

A) startling statement B) reference to a historical eventC) personal reference D) illustration


22) The statement, ʺToday I am going to explain to you the reasons why stretching your muscles isimportant during exercise, how to stretch, and what to avoid when you stretch.ʺ is an exampleof a/an ________.

A) final summary B) startling introductory deviceC) specific purpose statement D) initial preview


23) Denice is speaking about growing up in a single parent family. She begins her presentation bytelling her audience about her feelings when she was left out of the Father-Daughter Banquetand how her mom planned a special occasion for the two of them instead. This is an exampleof using a ________.

A) reference to the occasion B) reference to something personalC) rhetorical question D) startling statement


24) Meg has just finished covering her last main point in her presentation. She transitions into herconclusion by using a reference back to her introductory story and then she thanks theaudience for listening. Does this describe an appropriate conclusion?

A) Yes; Meg created a smooth bridge between her speech body and the conclusion.B) No; Meg forgot to add a summary of her points before concluding.C) No; a speaker should never thank an audience for listening.D) Yes; Meg provided closure by tying the introduction and conclusion together.


25) In the opening to her speech about eating disorders, Sheila told the story of her friend whoalmost died of anorexia. In her conclusion, she reminded her audience of what all her friendwent through and explained that her friend was currently doing well in her battle against thedisease. What strategy did Sheila use?

A) She provided closure to her presentation.B) She referred to the occasion.C) She issued a challenge to her audience.D) She urged her audience to take action.


189

26) In his speech about registering to vote, Dan explains the new legislation that allows voterregistration to coincide with drivers license renewal. He concludes the speech by stating thatany person who is not registered should go by several locations that he has listed on thechalkboard and register in time for the next election. Finally, Dan reiterates, ʺEveryone pleaseregister to vote; itʹs your right and your duty as a citizen.ʺ What aspect of effective conclusionshas Dan used?

A) A personal reference to his own experienceB) A challenge to the audienceC) An appeal to motivate the audience to respondD) An effective summary of main points in a speech


27) A verbal or nonverbal signal that indicates you are moving from one idea to the next is knownas a ________.

A) preview B) summary C) signpost D) delivery cueAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53

28) A delivery outline ________.A) is essentially the same thing as a preparation outlineB) should contain key words and delivery remindersC) should be written in complete sentence formD) should contain a purpose statement


29) What aspect of standard outlining procedure is NOT CORRECT in the following example?

1. The Ironman Triathalon includes three competitive events.1. Competitors must swim five miles.2. Competitors bicycle for 101 miles.3. Competitors run for over 26 miles.

2. Ironman competitions are held in many different locations in the U.S.1. Competitions are held in Atlanta.2. Two competitions are in New York City.3. Honolulu hosts a competition in November.

A) The use of standard numbering and lettering.B) The use of at least two subdivisions.C) The use of complete sentences.D) The use of logical divisions of an idea.


190

30) How do the three subpoints in the following outline violate standard outlining form?

A. The current status of our blood supply creates a bleak picture.1. There is a serious deletion of blood bank supplies.2. Potential donors have quit donating blood.3. Contaminated blood.

A) The subpoints in the outline are not all grammatically parallel.B) The subpoints in the outline do not follow correct indentation standards.C) The subpoints in the outline are not logically divided.D) Only Roman numerals should appear in outlines, not Arabic numbers.


31) ʺEvery I should have a II, and every A should have a B,ʺ is related to the principle of outliningconcerned with ________.

A) making headings parallel B) subdivisionsC) standard numbering D) using correct indentation


32) Your delivery outline should ________.A) use complete sentencesB) include an abbreviated form our your introduction and conclusionC) not include your sourcesD) include your purpose statement.


33) It is recommended that you transfer your delivery outline to notecards because ________.A) it will help you become more familiar with the informationB) notecards will not rustle like paper in case you are nervousC) note cards are easier to organizeD) notecards can contain reminders about deliveryE) All of the above are reasons.


34) For her presentation to the Board of Directors, Juanita decides that she will speak from anoutline that includes her purpose statement, an abbreviated introduction and conclusion,supporting material and signposts. According to the textbook, is this advisable?

A) No, because including supporting material can be overwhelming.B) No, because no signposts are included in this outline.C) Yes, because all the information she needs is included.D) No, because a delivery outline should not have a purpose statement.


191

35) Fred has always been a nervous public speaker, but this time heʹs going to prepare an outlinethat will really help him calm his nerves and build his confidence. When he prepares hisdelivery outline, he should include all the following EXCEPT

A) writing out his entire introduction and conclusion.B) the use of single words and short phrases.C) his supporting material and signposts.D) the use of a standard outline form.


36) Reminders such as ʺLouder,ʺ ʺGesture,ʺ ʺSlow down,ʺ written on the delivery outline in adifferent color of ink are known as ________.

A) signposts B) delivery cuesC) nonverbal transitions D) delivery procedures


37) What is the difference between a preparation outline and a delivery outline?A) Preparation outlines include sources; delivery outlines do not.B) Preparation outlines include signposts; delivery outlines do not.C) Preparation outlines are less detailed than delivery outlines.D) Preparation outlines include your specific purpose; delivery outlines do not.


38) Which of the following statements is true concerning delivery outlines?A) You may write out your first sentence word for word to make you feel more comfortable.B) Do not include your central idea.C) Include your purpose statement.D) Write your outline out exactly as you will say it so you wonʹt get lost.


39) Which guideline is NOT true for using notecards successfully?A) You should plan your notecards according to logical blocks of material.B) You should number your notecards.C) Your notecards can include delivery cues.D) You should write out your entire introduction and conclusion.E) You should write only on one side of your notecards.


40) What is recommended for providing closure in your conclusion?A) using verbal signpostsB) pausingC) slowing your speech rateD) Both A and BE) A, B, and C


192

41) When you organize a speech by explaining the steps of a process in terms of what occurs first,second, third, and so on, you are using a chronological organizational pattern.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 47

42) If your main points discuss something that needs to be changed, then offers a plan forchanging it, they are organized with a topical pattern of organization.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

43) Organizing your points by putting the most important one first is using the principle ofprimacy.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

44) If you are speaking to a hostile audience and you begin with a main point that you know willbe something they will agree with, you are making use of the primacy principle.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

45) When you support a main point by beginning with the complex ideas and moving to the moresimple ones, you are using the complexity principle.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

46) Describing the parts of a golf club from top to bottom is an example of a spatial pattern ofarrangement.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49

47) A speaker who discusses the consequences of binge drinking, then the contributing factors, isusing a problem-solution pattern of organization.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49

48) A delivery outline uses complete sentences throughout the outline.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 65-68

49) The idea that you have saved your best point to be used as your last point illustrates thetheory of primacy.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

50) Both your general and specific purpose can be used as guides for your choice of anorganizational pattern for your presentation.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49-50

193

51) An initial preview is usually given in the introduction.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53

52) Using both an internal preview and an internal summary is probably too redundant for mostaudiences and should only be used in very long speeches.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53-55

53) Phrases like ʺIn addition,ʺ ʺIn other words,ʺ and ʺIn summaryʺ are examples of verbaltransitions.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 54

54) If you have used internal summaries in your speech, it is not a good idea to also use a finalsummary.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 55

55) The textbook recommends writing the introduction of your speech before you begin writingthe body.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 56

56) According to the rules of subdivision, if you have an A on an outline, then you need a B.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 61

57) A startling statistic can be a good way to gain the audienceʹs attention in your introduction.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 56

58) The very first thing you should do in your speech is give the initial preview.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53

59) Do not refer back to the introduction in your conclusion; that only bores the audience.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 56-59

60) Direct quotes can be completely written out on a delivery outline.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 65-68

194


A. Cause-effectB. ChronologicalC. ComplexityD. PrimacyE. Problem-solutionF. RecencyG. SpatialH. Topical

61) Arranging ideas from the simple to the more complex.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

62) Ideas are arranged according to a logical or natural order, according to the speakerʹsdiscretion.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

63) Ideas are arranged by first discussing things that are unsatisfactory, then by offering a plan tocorrect them.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49

64) Ideas are arranged following a time sequence.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 47

65) Ideas are arranged from top to bottom, left to right, or some similar pattern based on location.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49

66) Ideas are arranged by talking about the situation and the resulting events.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 49

195


A. ClosureB. Hard evidenceC. PreviewD. PrimacyE. RecencyF. SignpostG. Soft evidenceH. SummaryI. Topical Organization

67) Starting with your most convincing or least controversial idea.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

68) Arranging ideas from the least to the most important.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

69) A recap of what has been said.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 55

70) A verbal or nonverbal signal that the speaker is moving from one idea to the next.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53

71) Factual examples and statistics.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 51-52

72) A feeling of completion, accomplished with the ending of a speech.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 59

73) Arranging ideas from the strongest or least controversial to the weakest, or most controversial.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

74) Supporting material such as hypothetical illustrations, inferences, and opinions.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 51-52

75) A statement of what is to come.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 53

196

76) When you select and organize the main points of speech according to the sequence of events inwhich they occur, you are using a(n) ________ organization pattern.Answer: chronologicalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 47

77) When you arrange your ideas from the least to the most important, you are using the principleof ________.Answer: recencyDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

78) Gary planned to discuss the medieval weapons by describing three types of swords usedduring that period. If he discusses each type of sword as a main point, he would be using a(n)________ organizational pattern.Answer: topicalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

79) The method of arranging ideas from the strongest or least controversial to the weakest or mostcontroversial utilizes the principle of ________.Answer: primacyDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

80) Developing a point by moving from the simplest ideas to the most complicated ideas utilizesthe principle of ________.Answer: complexityDiff: 2 Page Ref: 48

81) The ________ organizational pattern uses main points that are discussed in order as theyappear by location or position.Answer: spatialDiff: 2 Page Ref: 49

82) A speech that discusses the low percentage of voters turning out for the past local election andthen moves on to suggest the possibility of Internet voting is using the organizational patternof ________.Answer: problem-solutionDiff: 3 Page Ref: 49

83) A hypothetical story illustrating what life was like during the Great Depression would be anexample of ________ evidence.Answer: softDiff: 3 Page Ref: 51-52

84) A statistic illustrating the prevalence of the spread of Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome is anexample of ________ evidence.Answer: hardDiff: 3 Page Ref: 51-52

85) Words such as ʺlouderʺ , ʺslow downʺ written on your note cards are known as ________.Answer: delivery cuesDiff: 3 Page Ref: 68

197

86) Briefly define the three organizational patterns for informative presentations.Answer: A chronological pattern is one in which the main points follow a time sequence. The

main points are organized from what occurs first, to what occurs next, etc. The topicalorganization pattern follows a logical or categorical division; that is, the topic falls intonatural categories that do not follow a time or spatial sequence. The spatialorganization pattern follows a geographical space, such as top to bottom, north tosouth, etc.


87) Briefly explain the cause and effect and problem and solution organization patterns.Answer: The cause and effect organizational pattern discusses the situation and its causes or the

situation and its effects. The problem and solution organization pattern discusses theproblem then discusses how the problem can be solved.


88) Give three recommendations for gaining the audienceʹs attention.Answer: Answers will vary. The answers could be any of the following. Using an illustration

(hypothetical or actual), posing a rhetorical question, citing a startling fact or statistic,using a quote or a humorous story, reference to a historical event, using an analogy,referring to a personal experience, referring to an occasion, or referring to somethingsaid by the preceding speaker.


89) What is the principle of recency? How might it be used effectively?Answer: The recency principle is when the speaker uses the strongest argument last, with the

idea that he or she will leave the audience with the most important ideas to think about.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 48

90) What is the principle of primacy? When might it be used effectively?Answer: The primacy principle is when the speaker decides to present the best arguments first.

This might be done if he or she believes the audience will be unfriendly or hostile to hisor her proposition, and wants to develop common ground with the audience beforebringing up ideas they will be sure to disagree with.


91) Explain the principle of specificity.Answer: Specificity is a method of organizing supporting material in which you group your

support in one of two ways. Either you group your specific information and offer itfirst, followed by your general explanation or make a general explanation first andfollow it up with specific illustrations.


92) What should an introduction accomplish?Answer: An introduction should gain attention, introduce the topic, give the audience a reason to

listen, establish your credibility, and preview your main ideas.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 56-58

198

93) What should a conclusion accomplish?Answer: A conclusions should summarize the speech, re-emphasize a main idea in a memorable

way, motivate the audience to respond, and provide closure.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 58-59

94) Briefly explain the notion of credibility as it applies to public speaking.Answer: Credibility is how believable an audience perceives a speaker to be. It can be enhanced

by a speaker who is organized, well prepared, and who mentions personal expertise inthe speech, especially in the introduction.


95) List four of the five suggestions the text gives for writing your delivery outline.Answer: Use single words or short phrases whenever possible. Include your introduction and

conclusion in abbreviated form. Include supporting material and signposts. Do notinclude your purpose statement. Use standard outline format.


96) You have been asked to give a speech describing your college campus. Write main points(either phrases or full sentences) for both a topical and a spatial organizational pattern.Answer: Answers will vary. The topical outline might include places on campus (The library, the

union, the administration building) or points based on functions such as classes, studentlife, research, and sports facilities. The spatial outline might explain the campus fromnorth to south, or by entering in the main entrance (or any particular entrance) andmoving clockwise or counterclockwise.)


97) Explain the standard outline format and create an example. What advantages does it offer thespeaker?Answer: A standard outline uses standard numbering that uses Roman and Arabic numerals and

upper and lower case numbers followed by periods. For example, the first point is aRoman numeral I., followed by subdivisions of A., B., C., etc. These subdivisions can befurther divided using Arabic numerals of 1., 2., and 3., with their subpoints indicated bylower case letters of a., b., c., etc. An appropriate outline would look like this:

I. First main ideaA. First subdivision of I.B. Second subdivision of I.

1. First subdivision of B.2. Second subdivision of B.

II. Second main idea

Each point should have at least two subdivisions (not one). All points should begrammatically parallel.

The advantage it offers the speaker is to show the relationship among various ideas,subpoints, and supporting material in their presentation.


199

98) Discuss methods a speaker can use to assist his or her listeners by presenting the informationin the speech in a clear, organized manner.Answer: First, the main points can be organized by using a familiar pattern, such as

chronological, spatial, or topical. Most audiences find these patterns familiar and easy tounderstand. Second, the speaker can make use of previews, summaries, and signposts.These help the listener understand through repetition and clearly point to therelationships among the different parts of the speech. The use of previews andsummaries also helps simplify complex ideas.


99) What are the differences between a preparation outline and a delivery outline? Discuss specificitems that should be included on both.Answer: A preparation outline serves the purpose to help the speaker work through exactly

what he or she plans to accomplish, and how. In addition, the preparation outlineallows the student to test the speech for completeness, unity, coherence, and overalleffectiveness. In a classroom situation, this also serves the purpose of letting theinstructor better understand what the student plans to do. The preparation outlineshould include supporting material, standard outlining format (indentation, correct useof numbering, logical subdivisions, etc.) The purpose and the central idea should bewritten at the top of the outline. The preparation outline might also be used to initiallypractice the speech.

A delivery outline is the one the speaker will be using during the speech; it should beused for most of the practice sessions. The purpose is to enhance the speakerʹs deliveryby providing enough information to serve as a memory cue, but not so much to bedistracting during the speech. It should not include the specific purpose or central ideabut should include an abbreviated form of the introduction and conclusion. Key wordsshould be used rather than complete sentences. Supporting material and signpostsshould be included. Prompts or delivery cues may also be included.


100) Given the topic of obesity in the United States, develop problem-solution and a cause andeffect outlines which list your main points.Answer: Answers will vary.

Problem-and-Solution

I. The first part of the problem is that Americans consume a large amount of fattyfoods which leads to obesity.II. Secondly, obesity causes disease.III. In order to solve these problems people should consume a well-balanced diet andexercise.

Cause-and-Effect

I. People are eating unhealthy foods.II. People fail to follow a regular exercise regimen.III. This lack of activity and unhealthy diet leads to obesity which has manyconsequences.


200

101) Analyze the following introduction. Discuss the strong points and drawbacks of theintroduction as written. Rewrite the introduction to make it more effective.

I. Hi Iʹm Suzie and will be discussing the effects of T.V. violence on children.II. Someday, many of you will have children, and many of you have younger siblings, so thistopic will have a direct impact on children we know and love.III. I really donʹt know much about this topic, but I though it would be interesting to discuss.IV. We will discuss the problems with television violence and solutions to this ever growingproblem.Answer: The strong points are that she tries to relate the topic to her audience and previews the

problem and solution format. The drawbacks are that Suzie forgot to include anattention getting device. Next, she also did not create a sense of credibility with herthird statement. Answers will vary in the rewriting of the introduction.


102) How might culture have an influence on the way you organize your presentation?Answer: While most U.S. audiences will be familiar and comfortable with a linear and direct

organizational pattern, this will not be true for people of all cultures. A speaker must beaware and sensitive to other organizational patterns that may be familiar to audiencesof other cultures. These may include a more circuitous route of illustrations or parablesor a pattern of moving from basic principles to facts and illustrations that are graduallyrelated to a main point. By being aware of these differences, a speaker has the ability toadapt to diverse audiences and appreciate speakers from other cultures who may utilizea different organizational pattern.


201

VOLUME 4Chapter 4.3: Presenting Your Speech

1) Which method of delivery is a speaker using when he or she writes out their speech word forword and delivers it from that text?

A) manuscript speaking B) memorized speakingC) extemporaneous speaking D) impromptu speaking


2) Which of the following suggestions are made for using manuscript speeches?A) Use manuscript speaking when you donʹt have much opportunity to prepare.B) Use manuscript speaking when you have to speak on a sensitive, critical, or controversial

issue.C) Use manuscript speaking when you want to deliver a speech informally.D) Use manuscript speaking when you have little prior speaking experience.


3) A few minutes remain in the class period. The teacher assigns a student to stand before theclass and give a brief speech on effective study habits. What method of delivery is used in thissituation?

A) memorized speaking B) extemporaneous speakingC) manuscript speaking D) impromptu speaking


4) According to the textbook, the delivery style that is appropriate to most circumstances is________.

A) manuscript speaking B) memorized speakingC) extemporaneous speaking D) impromptu speaking


5) Kamala is well-prepared for her presentation. As she presents her first point, she notices theconfused looks from her audience members. She clarifies the confusing concept and quicklyadapts to meet her audienceʹs needs. She is most likely using what type of delivery method?

A) manuscript B) memorizedC) impromptu D) extemporaneous


202

6) Craigʹs teacher suggests that he use the word ʺbaritone saxophoneʺ rather than ʺmusicalinstrumentʺ in his speech. Which principle of effective verbal delivery is Craigʹs teacherpointing out to Craig?

A) use specific, concrete words B) use unbiased wordsC) use vivid words D) use correct words


7) Instead of simply saying, ʺThe dog slept on the chair,ʺ Emily said, ʺThe lethargic dachshundsnoozed contentedly on the overstuffed armchair.ʺ This best illustrates what principle ofeffective verbal delivery?

A) use unbiased words B) use vivid wordsC) use simple words D) use correct words


8) Which of the following is true of effective verbal delivery?A) Vivid, complex statements are best for communicating accuracy and power.B) The more general your words, the better everyone will be able to understand.C) Simple words can communicate accuracy and power.D) Use the thesaurus to find words, so you will sound well-educated.


9) Tomʹs persuasive presentation advocated increasing penalties for juvenile offenders. In hisconclusion, Tomʹs call to action for his audience was, ʺIf you think we should have stifferpenalties for juvenile offenders, then write your congressman.ʺ Which guideline does thisdisregard?

A) The language is too dramatic and is likely to incite a negative emotional response inlisteners.

B) Using the term ʺcongressmanʺ as a generic for all persons in congress is a biased, sexistpractice.

C) The language isnʹt vivid enough to arouse the attention of an audience, nor to move themto action.

D) The language isnʹt vivid, nor is it simple enough for an audience to understand.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 81

10) In his speech Bob said, ʺShe and me went to the movies.ʺ What could Bobʹs grammatical errorcommunicate to his audience?

A) Bob is unable to craft vivid, engaging language.B) Bob only knows how to use simple words.C) Bob may appear to be lacking credibility.D) Bob appears not to care about his audience.


203

11) In a speech about preparing oneself for the death of a loved one, Amber made repeatedreference to the ʺmarching of Father Time.ʺ She hoped to create a sense of drama for heraudience, while at the same time getting them to seriously consider her points. What figure ofspeech did Amber use in her presentation?

A) personification B) simileC) hyperbole D) alliteration


12) What figure of speech is reflected in the statement, ʺFamily loyalty is the very life blood, thevery backbone of our societyʺ?

A) metaphor B) hyperbole C) alliteration D) simileAnswer: ADiff: 3 Page Ref: 82

13) Rev. Jesse Jackson says, ʺWe must relate instead of debate; we must inspire instead of retire;and we must repair instead of despair.ʺ Rev. Jackson is using all of the following stylisticdevises EXCEPT

A) repetition. B) antithesis. C) parallelism. D) simile.Answer: DDiff: 3 Page Ref: 82

14) The stylistic devices of omission, inversion, and suspension are methods used to ________.A) achieve a sense of drama in a speech B) be more abstract in language usageC) create cadence in language rhythm D) avoid the use of biased language


15) To add a sort of poetic touch to his speech on inspirational teachers, Ralph described hisfavorite high school teacher as ʺan inspiration unequaled,ʺ ʺa genius unrivaled,ʺ and ʺacomedian unbridled.ʺ What stylistic, dramatic device did Ralph employ?

A) omission B) inversion C) suspension D) antithesisAnswer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 83

16) A commercial for an international airline uses upbeat music and vivid images of exoticanimals and beautiful scenery. It also includes the following statement, ʺThis home, this land,this Africa.ʺ Which element of dramatic language is effectively employed?

A) repetition B) inversion C) omission D) antithesisAnswer: ADiff: 3 Page Ref: 84

17) The statement, ʺNow is the time for determination, decisiveness, and dedicationʺ employswhat linguistic device?

A) antithesis B) alliteration C) repetition D) parallelismAnswer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 84

204

18) ʺIce cream is a sweet indulgence, but it has bitter consequences,ʺ is an example of ________.A) inversion B) a simile C) repetition D) antithesis


19) Parallelism, antithesis, and repetition can all be used to create ________ in a presentation.A) drama B) cadenceC) vivid description D) discourse consistency


20) All the following are recommendations on the use of gestures EXCEPTA) you should vary your gestures.B) with culturally diverse audience, use fewer gestures.C) when speaking to a large audience, use bold and more dramatic gestures.D) use as many gestures as possible so long as they are natural and not forced.E) your gestures should be definite.


21) Which of the following is a recommendation for eye contact?A) Look primarily to the center of the room.B) Memorize your speech, so you can maintain eye contact.C) Establish eye contact before you say anything.D) Look past your listeners if you are nervous.


22) What criteria does the text offer for using movement during your presentation?A) Move around as much as possible.B) No movement is better than random, distracting movement.C) Most American audiences expect a certain amount of distance, so stay back by the

lectern.D) Spontaneous, unmotivated movement is recommended


23) Which of the following is a recommendation for your posture when giving a presentation?A) Itʹs appropriate to slouch slightly if youʹre giving an informal presentation.B) If you are going to sit during a presentation, sit in a chair that does not elevate you above

your audience.C) Itʹs acceptable to lean on the lectern.D) Avoid sitting during a presentation.


205

24) Which of the following is a recommendation for improving your volume?A) Increase rather than lowering your volume to emphasize an important idea.B) Find your optimal volume for the room, and be consistent with it.C) Avoid using a microphone; it can make your voice sound unnatural.D) Important ideas can be emphasized by either turning your volume up or down.


25) Changing the pitch of your voice to help communicate the meaning of your words is called________.

A) gesturesB) rateC) inflectionD) articulationE) rehearsal


26) In using a stationary microphone, the textbook recommends that you ________.A) stand as still as possible so your voice will be picked up by the microphoneB) keep your mouth about the same distance from the mike at all timesC) move around as much as you need to; the microphone will pick up your voiceD) practice before you speak with the type of microphone you will useE) Both B and D are appropriate recommendations.


27) A speech style common to an ethnic group or a geographic region is known as a (n) ________.A) language B) accent C) dialect D) lingo


28) What does your textbook recommend regarding vocal rate?A) Maintain a constant, steady rate throughout you presentation.B) Speak at a rate of 200 to 250 words per minute.C) Vary your rate to add interest and emphasize key ideas.D) Speaking slowly is preferable to speaking too fast.


29) Tomas was asked to speak to his local Rotary Club. From what he could learn about the club,the membership was made up of professionals who attended on their lunch hour in betweenother business appointments. When Tomas went to speak, he wore his favorite sweater andsome jeans. What advice does your text offer when deciding if this was appropriate?

A) Always dress as formally as possible.B) Never dress more formally than the audience is dressed.C) Your dress should conform to the audienceʹs expectations for the occasion.D) Wear what you are most comfortable wearing.


206

30) Reginaʹs demonstration speech topic was ʺThree Ways to Improve Amateur Photography.ʺ Inthis speech, Regina showed a 35 mm camera, used a chart with an enlarged diagram of themain components of the camera, and then showed 4 × 6 photographs — some good and somewith errors — to the audience. Which of the following statements best summarizes Reginaʹsuse of visual aids in this speech?

A) Regina selected and handled all of her visual aids expertly in this speech.B) Regina should not have brought the camera; the diagram was sufficient.C) Regina showed good audience and environmental analysis in her use of visual aids.D) Regina should have enlarged the photographs so the audience could clearly see them.


31) Patricia showed a video clip from a popular movie to her class of 24 students at the beginningof her five minute presentation. The clip lasted approximately a minute and a half and wasshown on a television. Was this a good idea?

A) Yes; video creates audience interest in your presentation.B) No; she probably needed to project it on a large screen to accommodate people sitting on

the back row.C) No; video often breaks the flow of a presentation.D) No; the clip was probably too long in proportion to the length of her presentation.


32) Shawna planned to demonstrate the two-step for one of her informative speeches and neededa partner to make the demonstration be successful. Which important guideline should sheconsider when using people as visual aids?

A) Other people should not be used when you are giving a speech.B) It will be more effective to have a partner.C) If she wants to use a partner she should have them rehearse with her ahead of time.D) The other person will help take some of the attention off her, thus decreasing her

apprehension.Answer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 95, 103-105

33) On her way to public speaking class, Delaney decided to add one last visual aid to her speech.Was this a good idea, according to your textbook?

A) Yes; the more creative the visual aids, the better the speech will be.B) Yes, if Delaney were certain that the visual aid would make a difference.C) No, because Delaney didnʹt have a chance to rehearse with the new aid.D) No, because the extra visual aid would make Delaneyʹs speech run over time.


207

34) Howard taped pictures of rainbows all around the room, as visual aids for his speech. Henever referred to the pictures, but simply created an atmosphere for his presentation. Was thisan effective use of visual aids, according to textbook guidelines?

A) Yes; the pictures created the kind of mood the speaker wanted.B) Yes, but only because they were large enough for the audience to see.C) No; because you should explain your visual aids, not just show them.D) No, because there were too many of them to create any kind of effect.


35) In a persuasive speech on lowering tuition, Alvaro wanted to discuss the various sources forthe universityʹs operation budget such as tuition, state aid, federal aid, private donations, andendowments. In order to present the information as a percentage of overall income, which ofthe following visual aids should he choose?

A) a line graph B) a pie graph C) a bar graph D) a flip chartAnswer: BDiff: 3 Page Ref: 97

36) In a persuasive speech on lowering tuition, Alvaro wanted to compare the tuition paid bystudents at various state universities in his state. In order to present the information clearly,which of the following visual aids should he choose?

A) a line graph B) a pie graph C) a bar graph D) a flip chartAnswer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 97

37) In a speech on the characteristics of a diamond, Kelley used an easel and a series of largephotographs attached to a foam board to illustrate her points. When she began her speech, shehad the top picture turned over, so the audience could not see it. As she discussed eachcharacteristic, she uncovered the photograph appropriate to it. Which guideline for usingvisual aids was she using?

A) Keep your visual aids simple and to the point.B) Time your visuals to control your audienceʹs attention.C) Polish your visual aids.D) Use technology thoughtfully.


38) Delindus thought that he would be dramatic and impress his public speaking class with hisspeech on air pollution. He decided to use mice in a closed jar to illustrate how air pollution isslowly killing human beings. But during the speech, he noticed that audience attention was onthe jar of mice, rather than on him as the speaker. What guideline did Delindus ignore, withregard to using visual aids?

A) Use animals with caution as visual aids in a speech.B) Do not use dangerous or illegal visual aids.C) Time your visual aids to control your audienceʹs attention.D) Remember Murphyʹs Law.


208

39) Bernadette was giving a speech on hybrid cars. She decided to use the small, color brochuresshe had from the car dealer for her presentation because they had excellent pictures of thevehicles. What problem might this present?

A) None. She can practice with her visual aids just as she would use them in the speech.B) None. This is an effective method of showing the pictures.C) She should use them because they are professionally prepared.D) People in the audience will be distracted by passing the brochures around.


40) According to the textbook, the extemporaneous style of speaking is the appropriate style formost situations today.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 79

41) When using the extemporaneous style, the textbook recommends that you practice yourspeech enough times so that you can delivery it fluently.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 79

42) The word reggae is more concrete than the word music.Answer: TRUEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 80

43) ʺBefore the hurricane, the rush of people leaving New Orleans for Baton Rouge was as mightyas the storm surge that was approaching with the wind.This sentence is an example ofpersonification.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 82

44) Omission is a dramatic device in which the speaker leaves out a word or phrase the audienceexpects to hear.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

45) Parallelism is a dramatic device in which two sentences or phrases contrast with each other.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

46) The repetition of the initial consonants in a phrase or sentence describes the use of alliteration.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 84

47) According to your textbook, it is better for a speaker to use no movement than to use random,distracting movement.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 88

209

48) It is NOT appropriate to use movement and gestures when delivering a memorized ormanuscript speech.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 88

49) The textbook does not recommend practicing your speech with a video camera, as this tends tomake the speaker overly self-conscious.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 90

50) The lavaliere microphone requires a speaker to pay careful attention to where he or she stands.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 90-91

51) The term inflection. is defined as speech style common to an ethnic group or geographicregion.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 91

52) Most speakers average between 180 and 250 words per minute.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 92

53) When using a drawing as a visual aid, do not use too much detail, as it would becomedistracting to the audience.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 95

54) A bar graph is an effective way to represent how a set of data is divided proportionately.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 97

55) A line graph is a visual aid that is used to show trends over a period of time.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 97

56) As a general rule, adding numerous Power Point slides makes a presentation more interactive.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 99-100

57) Use computer generated graphics whenever possible to impress your audience.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 99-100

58) When you have an object that is too small to be seen, pass it around the audience so they canhave a closer look.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 100-101

210

59) It is usually best to arrange all your visual aids in full view of the audience before you beginyour speech.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 102


A. AntithesisB. CadenceC. DramaD. InversionE. MetaphorF. OmissionG. PersonificationH. SimileI. Suspension

60) A dramatic device in which the speaker leaves out a word the audience expects to hear.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

61) An overt comparison between two things that uses the word like or as.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 82

62) Withholding a key word or phrase until the end of the sentence.Answer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

63) Reversing the normal word order of a phrase or sentence.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

64) The attribution of human qualities to inanimate things or ideas.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 82

65) An implied comparison between two things.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 82

66) The rhythm of speech.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

67) Suspense created by phrasing something in a way that differs from the way the audienceexpects.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

211

Match these terms or concepts with their correct definitions.

A. AlliterationB. AntithesisC. ArticulationD. Concrete wordsE. Correct wordsF. ParallelismG. RepetitionH. Unbiased languageI. Vivid language

68) A two part parallel structure in which the second part contrasts in meaning with the first.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 84

69) Using the same grammatical structure for two or more clauses or sentences.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 83

70) The process of producing speech sounds distinctly and clearly.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 92

71) The repetition of initial consonants in a phrase or a sentence.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 84

72) Emphasizing a key word or phrase by using it more than once.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 84

73) Using colorful wordsAnswer: IDiff: 2 Page Ref: 81

74) Describes an action, object, or characteristic in the most specific way possible.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 80

75) A word that does not stereotype or discriminate against a sexual, racial, cultural, or religiousgroup.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 81

76) ________ speaking is a delivery style in which the speaker reads from a written text.Answer: ManuscriptDiff: 2 Page Ref: 77

212

77) ________ speaking is a delivery style in which the speaker uses an outline and has rehearsedthe presentation so that it can be delivered in a fluent manner.Answer: ExtemporaneousDiff: 2 Page Ref: 79

78) ________ speaking is a delivery style in which the speaker has little or no time to prepare, andsimply speaks ʺoff the cuffʺ.Answer: ImpromptuDiff: 2 Page Ref: 78

79) An implied comparison between two things is a(n) ________.Answer: metaphorDiff: 2 Page Ref: 82

80) An overt comparison between two things that uses the word like or as is a(n) ________.Answer: simileDiff: 2 Page Ref: 82

81) ________ is a figurative device in which a speaker attributes human qualities to inanimateideas or thingsAnswer: PersonificationDiff: 2 Page Ref: 82

82) Movements of the hands and arms are known as ________.Answer: gesturesDiff: 2 Page Ref: 87

83) The ability to vary your pitch is known as ________.Answer: inflectionDiff: 2 Page Ref: 91

84) A speech style common to an ethnic group or geographical area is a ________.Answer: dialectDiff: 2 Page Ref: 92

85) A visual aid that gives a pictorial representation of trends over a period of time, such as therelationship between two sets of data, is a(n) ________.Answer: bar graphDiff: 2 Page Ref: 97

86) What is cadence? Discuss the four ways suggested by your text for creating cadence in yourpresentation.Answer: Cadence is the rhythm of language. Stylistic devices that produce cadence help the

presentation be memorable for the listeners. The text recommends using parallelismwhich occurs when two or more phrases have the same grammatical pattern; antithesiswhich is when two similar sentence structures contrast with each other; repetitionwhich emphasizes a key word or phrase by using it more than once; and alliterationwhich is the repetition of an initial consonant sound several times in a phrase orsentence.


213

87) What is manuscript speaking? When should it be used, and what are three suggestions forusing it well?Answer: Manuscript speaking is reading a speech from a prepared text. It should be used when

the speaker is in a situation that requires careful wording of the speech, such as politicalsituations requiring sensitivity and tactfulness, or a formal situation that requires moreeloquence. Suggestions for giving manuscript speeches include(1) type your speech in short phrases on the upper 2/3 of the paper,(2) improve your eye contact by taking in an entire sentence at a time,(3) do not read the manuscript too quickly. Use a slash mark (/) or some other symbolto remind you to pause in strategic places.(4) vary the rhythm, inflection, and pace of your delivery so that the presentation doesnot sound read(5) and use gestures and movement to add nonverbal interest and emphasis.


88) What is memorized speaking? When should it be used, and what are three suggestions forusing it well?Answer: Memorized speaking is when the speaker writes out the presentation, then commits it to

memory. It should be used when exact wording is required, when the speaker has timeto commit it to memory, and if exact time limits are necessary. Suggestions include notto deliver your speech too rapidly, avoid repetitious patterns in your voice; practicevocal variety through the use of recordings, and use gestures and movement to addinterest and emphasis.


89) What is impromptu speaking? When should it be used, and what are three suggestions forusing it well?Answer: Impromptu speaking is when the speaker does not have much advance preparation,

and must speak off the cuff. Suggestions include to consider your audienceʹs interests,expectations, and knowledge; be brief (one to three minutes); organize-use anintroduction, body, and conclusion; draw upon your own personal knowledge andexperience; use gestures and movement; and be aware of the potential impact of yourcommunication.


90) What is extemporaneous speaking? When should it be used, and what are three suggestionsfor using it well?Answer: Extemporaneous speaking is the delivery of a prepared speech from a few notes in a

delivery outline. The speech itself, although prepared and rehearsed, will be wordedslightly different each time. To prepare, it is recommended that the speaker use afull-content outline when beginning to rehearse, then move to a delivery outline basedon fewer notes as you rehearse. Do not try to memorize the speech word for word butcontinue to vary the way you present. As you deliver your speech, adapt to youraudience; and make use of gestures and movements that arise naturally from what youare saying.


214

91) Explain the concept of using words well as part of effective verbal delivery.Answer: You want to carefully choose words, phrases, and sentences that accurately and

effectively communicate your message in a memorable and distinctive style. The mosteffective words are specific and concrete (words that refer to an object or action in themost specific way possible), unbiased (words that do not offend any group and creategoodwill, or avoid offending your audience), and vivid (words that add color andinterest to your speech). Words should also be simple and understandable andcertainly, correct words should be used to demonstrate a speakerʹs preparation andcredibility.


92) Explain the effective use of the three components of physical delivery.Answer: The three components are gestures, movement, and posture.

Gestures are hand and arm movements used during speaking. Gestures should beconversational and natural yet definite. It is important that your gestures be varied, notoverdone, and appropriate for the audience and situation.

Movement (the change of location during a presentation) should be purposeful andconsistent with the verbal portion of your message. Speakers can adapt to the physicalsurroundings to get closer to their audience and should also adapt to the culturalexpectations of audience members.

Posture, or the speakerʹs stance, is also important because it may reflect on yourcredibility. Speakers should avoid slouching, shifts in weight, or drooping their heads.In an informal presentation, it may be appropriate to perch on the edge of a desk orstool but not to sit or lean. Your posture should reflect your interest and attention toyour audience and your presentation.


93) What recommendations does your textbook make for the effective use of eye contact by aspeaker?Answer: In this culture, eye contact is encouraged. Studies have shown that speakers who use

direct eye contact have more credibility, and listeners learn more from them. It issuggested that you establish eye contact with your audience before you say anything,maintain eye contact during your opening sentence, and establish eye contact withpeople throughout your audience, not just in some areas. Do not look over the heads ofthe audience and do not break eye contact with your audience by turning away whenusing visual aids.


94) List five of the eight guidelines for using presentation aids effectively.Answer: (1) rehearse with your presentation aids (2) maintain eye contact with your audience,

not your presentation aids (3) explain your presentation aids (4) time your presentationaids to coincide with your discussion of them (5) do not pass around small objects,pictures, or items (6) use handouts effectively (7) use small children and animals withcaution (8) use technology to enhance your presentationnot for its own sake.


215

95) Explain the importance that facial expression can have in your delivery.Answer: Facial expression is the use of the facial muscles to communicate. It plays a key role in

expressing your thoughts, moods, and attitudes. Your facial expressions will set thetone for your presentation, even before you begin to speak. They should be appropriatefor your message. Facial expressions can be enhanced by rehearsing your speech infront of a mirror or by videotaping your rehearsal. Evaluate whether or not your face isreflecting the emotional tone of your ideas.


96) In a well-developed essay, name and define the four delivery styles recommended by thetextbook. What factors should be taken into account when a speaker considers which style touse?Answer: (1) The manuscript speech is a speech that is read from a text. Most people are not

skilled at this type of delivery and sound dull and monotonous, so it should only beused when necessary. The biggest reason for using a manuscript speech is that it allowsfor planning of exact wording. This is sometimes desirable in a very formal situation, orwhen the situation is tense or sensitive, and the speaker cannot afford to err. (2)Memorized delivery is similar to manuscript, except the speech is committed tomemory. It should only be used if the speaker has plenty of time to commit the speechto memory. It also allows for exact wording, and has the added benefit that eye contact,gestures, and movement may be enhanced. (3) Extemporaneous delivery is when thespeaker uses only brief notes, preferably in a delivery outline, for delivering the speech.It should be used under most circumstances; the delivery is more natural and ispreferred by most audiences. It also allows the speaker to adapt to the audience, (4)Impromptu speaking is speaking off the cuff and is used when a speaker has limitedtime to prepare. It requires a focus on the audience and the ability to organize a brief(one to three minute) presentation that draws heavily on the speakerʹs experience andknowledge.


216

97) Your friend, Vincent, asks for your advice on polishing his speech. He has researched andorganized his speech well, and practiced it enough to feel comfortable delivering it, but feelshe needs help with his language choices to make it more interesting and memorable. Whatadvice might you give him concerning figurative language, drama, and cadence? Explain atleast one device in each of those categories.Answer: Figurative language creates interest because it deviates from the ordinary, expected

meanings of words. To use figurative language, use metaphors, similes, orpersonification. A metaphor is an indirect comparison. A simile is a comparison usinglike or as. Personification is giving an object or idea the characteristics of a person.Drama creates interest in a speech through creating suspense by wording things in anunexpected way. Drama may be created through omission, inversion, or suspension.Omission is leaving out a word or phrase that the audience expects to hear. Inversion isreversing the word order of a sentence or phrase, and suspension is withholding a keyword or phrase until the end of the sentence. Cadence is the rhythm of the speech that iscreated through verbal devices. Cadence may be created through parallelism, antithesis,repetition, or alliteration. Parallelism is when the grammatical structure of severalphrases or sentences is consistent. Antithesis is a two-part parallel structure in whichthe second part contrasts in meaning with the first. Repetition is emphasizing a keyword or phrase by using it more than once. Alliteration is repeating the initial sound ofseveral words that are in close proximity to each other.


217

98) In a speech about developing effective study habits, your classmate George has consideredusing visual aids to enhance his audienceʹs retention of his information. Thus far he hasselected (1) a chart summarizing basic steps of creating an appropriate study environment; (2)a video of a study group working on preparation for an exam and (3) a book. In a welldeveloped essay, identify the guidelines for using each type of visual aid he has selected.Answer: Answers will vary. Possible answers include general guidelines for visual aids:

(1) select the right visual aid,(2) make your visual aids easy to see,(3) keep your visual aids simple,(4) polish your visual aids,(5) rehearse with your visual aids,(6) maintain eye contact with your audience, not your visual aids,(7) explain your visual aids,(8) time your visual aids to coincide with your discussion of them,(9) do not pass items through the audience,(10) use handouts effectively,(11) and use technology thoughtfully.

The goal is to get a more specific answer for the particular types of aids selected.

The steps could easily be outlined on a chart. The chart should be large enough to beseen by the entire audience. It could be transferred to an overhead or inserted into aPower Point slide. It should be simple and should be clearly typed or lettered.

The video might be useful to explain a concept or get the attention of the audience. Itshould be shown on a screen that is large enough to be easily seen by the entireaudience and he should only use brief clips or excerpts. It should complement ratherthan take over his presentation.

The book may not work. He may use it as a prop or hold it up to show if he is using itas a reference. Passing it among the audience members will be distracting.


99) After watching a videotape of her speech, Marisa concludes that her vocal delivery ismonotone and difficult to understand. Using the four aspects of vocal delivery in your text,give Marisa advice on how she might improve her vocal delivery.Answer: First, Marisa might examine the volume of her voice. Was she loud enough to be heard

on the back row? She might also consider softening or increasing the loudness of hervoice to emphasize important moments in her speech. Next, she should examine herpitch, which is the highness or lowness of your voice. She might ask whether or not shechanged her pitch at different moments in her speech, such as when she asked aquestion. She might practice exaggerating her change in pitch and then toning it downfor the actual presentation. She also needs to examine her rate. Was it too fast or tooslow? Did her rate vary? If her rate was too fast, she might consider adding in pausesto slow it down. She also needs to look at her articulation or enunciation of sounds.Were her words crisp and distinct or were they mumbled and slurred? Did shemispronounce any words. She could slow down and practice saying words clearly andcrisply and then speed up once she gets the hang of it. She could record her voiceseveral times, listening to and evaluating these areas. She can mark her note cards forher next speech with delivery cues that will remind her to incorporate these ideas.


218

100) Marcus delivers a presentation, but he fails to use any gestures. You have been asked to coachhim in order to improve this area. What suggestions would you give to Marcus?Answer: First, Marcus could simply focus on his everyday conversation. Does he gesture? If he

doesnʹt, he can begin to practice using gestures in everyday conversation. If he does, heshould simply start thinking of his presentation as a conversation. In focusing on hismessages, his gestures will naturally flow out of it. As he begins to gesture, he needs todo it with purpose and confidence. The gestures need to be big enough to be seen.However, they should not be so big that they become a distraction. Next, he should becareful of using the same gesture over and over again. He should practice usingdifferent kinds of gestures that clearly coincide with what he is saying. Finally, heshould consider his audience, the formality of the speaking situation, and theculture-based expectations of his audience so he can decide on the most appropriategestures for his specific audience.


219

VOLUME 4Chapter 4.4: Speaking to Inform

1) Satoshi gave a speech explaining three types of Japanese writing. This is example of a speechto ________.

A) inspire B) persuade C) entertain D) informAnswer: DDiff: 1 Page Ref: 114

2) A speech to inform is one in which ________.A) all of the supporting material consists of description and illustrationsB) you enhance the audienceʹs knowledge and understandingC) visual aids are the primary means of communicationD) your primary purpose it to amuse your audience


3) A presentation about ________ would be a speech about a procedure.A) types of surfboardsB) how to perform a search on the InternetC) three different breeds of dogsD) features on a digital camera


4) A speech that describes how something works, or a process of how a particular outcome isproduced, is a speech about a/an ________.

A) idea B) procedure C) object D) eventAnswer: BDiff: 1 Page Ref: 115-116

5) When teaching a process, it is helpful to follow the acronym T-E-A-C-H, which stands for thefollowing ________.

A) train, explain, administer, cooperate, helpB) teach, example, apply, communicate, hearC) tell, example, apply, coach, helpD) tell, explain, attribute, coach, hear


6) Tiffany presented an informative speech on the cognitive theory of stimulation. What type ofinformative speech was this?

A) a speech about an idea B) a speech about a procedureC) a speech about an object D) a speech about an event


220

7) One of the methods used to make your presentation interesting is to ________.A) build in redundancyB) reinforce key ideas nonverballyC) pace your information flowD) use attention catching supporting material


8) Masayuki gave a speech on ways the high context values are reflected in the Japanese culture.His three main points were the language, the gift-giving customs, and the visual arts. Whichpattern did he use to organize his speech?

A) topical B) spatial C) chronological D) complexityAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 118-119

9) An effective method for helping your audience relate new information to old is to ________.A) use analysis B) use analogiesC) use vivid language D) pace the flow of information


10) Each of the following is recommended as a method to make your presentation interestingEXCEPT

A) using an action packed story.B) using events and issues important to your audience.C) build in redundancy.D) presenting a clash of ideas.


11) Descriptions that appeal to your senses are ________.A) rhetorical statements B) presentation aidsC) word pictures D) metaphors


12) Matty was beginning her presentation by telling a funny story about a time she hadembarrassed herself. By using this approach, Matty was using ________.

A) vivid language to describe the eventB) a chronological organization of her topicC) adult learning principlesD) humor by making herself the butt of the joke


221

13) Kelly really prided himself on his knowledge of British royal history. He had three mainpoints in his informative speech, his first being the ancient lineage of Queen Elizabeth. By thetime he got through his first point, four minutes of his six-minute time allotment for thespeech had been used. What was Kellyʹs error in this situation?

A) not relating new information to oldB) not reinforcing his key ideas verballyC) not reinforcing his key ideas nonverballyD) not pacing the flow of his information


14) Melissa knew that most of her audience knew very little about creating a Power Pointpresentation, so she related her presentation to what her audience already knew about usingword processing programs, and the principles they had learned about creating visual aids.What technique is she using to make her presentation clear?

A) pace your information flowB) relate new information to old informationC) relate to your audienceʹs interestsD) use attention-catching supporting material


15) ʺLearning to ski is like learning to drive a car. At first, every motion seems awkward andself-conscious. Soon, however, the movements become habit and you begin to navigate theslopes with unconscious ease.ʺ This statement is an example of which informative device?

A) word picture B) analogy C) redundancy D) humorAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 125

16) Which of the following is recommended by the textbook when using an interpreter?A) Audiences in most cultures enjoy humor, so prepare some humorous stories.B) The speech will not take longer with an interpreter.C) Do not attempt to give statistics or detailed data.D) Even though an interpreter is needed, you should not assume that no one in the audience

will speak your language.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 123

17) Stewart was presenting information about the newest in MP3 players. In describing thefeatures, he covered the newest and most technical aspects of the new players. Whatchallenges might Stewart face in making sure his audience understands the information?

A) Keeping his ideas simple.B) Making his examples vivid.C) Including enough technical terminology.D) Including enough technical examples.


222

18) Beling was asked to make a presentation to a group of police officers. For her topic, Belingdecided to explain some techniques to help manage job stress. What tactic is Beling using tomake the presentation interesting?

A) using effective supporting materialsB) building in redundancyC) reinforcing key ideas verbally and nonverballyD) presenting information that relates to listeners


19) Courtney begins her presentation to a group of college students by saying, ʺHow would youlike to learn a technique that will cut your study time by 50%?ʺ What strategy is Courtneyusing to make her presentation more interesting?

A) using attention-catching supporting materialB) establishing a motive for her audience to listenC) using word picturesD) creating interesting presentation aids


20) Kira describes sitting by the fire on a cold winter day, ʺThe wood popped as the fire roared.ʺWhat type of word picture is Kira using?

A) describing what listeners would hearB) describing what listeners would smellC) describing what an object would feel likeD) describing an emotion


21) When he was giving his speech, Kevin referred to other students in the class by name andshared comments they had made to him personally about his topic. What strategy is Kevinusing?

A) referring to issues and events close to the audienceB) using redundancyC) using word picturesD) reinforcing the meaning nonverbally


22) Barbie was speaking to her audience about time management. As part of her presentation, sherelates the mid term exams that students are taking to the principles she is covering in herpresentation. Which principle is she using for making her presentation memorable?

A) using movement to ʺact outʺ part of the story you are tellingB) making sure ideas are simple and well definedC) connecting life experience with new informationD) using a humorous example


223

23) Tom gave a speech on Old Drum, a historical statue of a dog in the local town square. Whatstrategy is Tom using in his selection of topics?

A) building in redundancyB) establishing a motive for listeningC) presenting information that relates to his listenersʹ interestsD) reinforcing key ideas verbally and nonverbally


24) ʺWalking through Baton Rouge in August is like having a steamy washcloth draped over yourface.ʺ This statement is an example of a(n) ________.

A) word picture B) humorC) redundancy D) presentation aid


25) A word picture helps make your message more vivid and interesting by ________.A) using concrete wordsB) using words that the listener is familiar withC) using words that appeal to the senses of sight, smell, taste, touch, or soundD) using words that rhyme


26) What does the textbook say about the use of humor in a speech?A) Audiences have come to expect humor, so it should be used in every speech.B) Fictitious stories are usually better for making a humorous point than a personal one.C) Using yourself the butt of the joke will lower your credibility.D) Cartoons and quotations are good ways to introduce humor into your speech


27) Mark heard a great joke about a computer network administrator. He decided to use it in hisspeech on financial aid as a way to get the audience warmed up. When he gave hisintroduction, he noticed that his audience looked somewhat confused when he previewed hismain points. What tip for using humor did Mark fail to follow?

A) Use humor to make a point.B) Make yourself the butt of the joke.C) Use cartoons or quotes, but not stories.D) Use humor in the body, but not the introduction.


224

28) David is informing the audience about an impending tuition hike. In the introduction he tellsthe audience, ʺThis affects all of us in this room; it affects our attitudes about school, ourpocketbooks, and our stress levels. ʺThis statement was designed to ________.

A) indicate how the topic relates to the audienceB) build redundancy into the speech at the onsetC) pace the information flowD) reinforce key ideas nonverbally


29) ʺTell them what you are going to tell them, tell them, and tell them what you told themʺ is oneway to describe the informative technique of ________.

A) reinforcing key ideas nonverbally B) building redundancy into the speechC) motivating the audience to listen D) relating to the interests of the audience


30) Anders spoke on the mountain ranges in New Mexico. In his introduction he previewed hismain points. As he got to each main point he used an internal preview and an internalsummary. At the end of his speech, he summarized his main points. Which strategy formaking your speech memorable did Anders use?

A) motivating the audience to listenB) relating the information to the audienceC) reinforcing ideas nonverballyD) building redundancy into the speech


31) What does the textbook suggest about building in redundancy in presentations?A) It could potentially bore your audience because theyʹve heard it before.B) I really isnʹt necessary for speakers to repeat themselves.C) It gives the audience a chance to catch a point again if they happen to miss it.D) It should only include previews.


32) Margarite is giving a presentation on listening skills to a group of people who work for a largecorporation. She plans a presentation that revolves around activities that they can participatein and relates these activities to situations they encounter everyday at work. Margarite isusing which of the following to make her presentation memorable?

A) building in redundancy B) using adult learning principlesC) reinforcing key ideas verbally D) reinforcing key ideas nonverbally


33) Adapting your presentation to your audienceʹs ʺin-basketʺ relates to which of the following?A) building in redundancy B) using adult learning principlesC) reinforcing key ideas verbally D) reinforcing key ideas nonverbally


225

34) Enrique said, ʺListen carefully, this is the most convincing reason why life is likely to exist onother planets.ʺ He is using which of the following techniques to make his presentationmemorable?

A) simplifying ideas B) building in redundancyC) using adult learning principles D) reinforcing key ideas verbally


35) When Kiko reviewed the main points in her informative speech, she slowed down her rate ofspeech, decreased her volume, made sure to articulate each word clearly, and paused betweeneach point. What technique of making an informative speech memorable did Kiko effectivelyemploy?

A) establishing a motive for the audience to listenB) building redundancy into the speechC) reinforcing key ideas nonverballyD) pacing the flow of information


36) When giving a presentation to adults, it is important to ________.A) use abstract informationB) allow them to be passive learnersC) relate their life experiences to what they will be learningD) use humor so they will be amused


37) You can reinforce key ideas nonverbally by ________.A) gesturing to emphasize key phrasesB) using a phrase like ʺanother important point is...ʺC) establishing a motive for your audience to listenD) using an interpreter


38) When using a thesaurus, it is important to make sure you ________.A) know how to spellB) understand the alternative word wellC) have used the alternative word already in your presentationD) have the word in your active vocabulary.


39) When choosing an organizational pattern for your presentation, it is important to consider the________.

A) topic you have chosen B) type of presentation you are makingC) types of support you are using D) makeup of your audience


226

40) Lauraʹs presentation covered the newest models in hybrid cars. As part of her presentation,she had inserted pictures of the new models into her Power Point presentation. By doing this,Laura had used presentation aids to ________.

A) organize her material B) increase the audienceʹs retentionC) use humor D) make use of adult learning principles


41) John made a presentation at work in which he explained how to handle customer complaints.This would be an example of an informative speech.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 114

42) Although speaking to inform is an ancient skill, in current times we tend to have only speechesto persuade or to entertain.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 114

43) A speech that is about anything you can see or touch is a speech about an object.Answer: TRUEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 115

44) A problem-solution organizational pattern is a common pattern for an informative speech.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115-118

45) A speech on how coffee beans are processed is an example of a speech on a procedure.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115-116

46) According to the textbook, most presentations about procedures begin with the word ʺwhat.ʺAnswer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 116

47) In giving an informative speech about a person, the textbook recommends including as manydetails of the personʹs life as possible.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 116-117

48) Adult audiences prefer to know how the new information is relevant to their busy lives.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 130

49) If you use a humorous quotation from others, it is necessary to cite your source.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 128-129

227

50) ʺPace your information flowʺ means to spread the details out in your speech, rather thanpresenting a large number of significant details all at once.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122

51) People learn new information by associating it to what they already know.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122

52) An analogy helps clarify information for the audience by comparing the new information tosomething they already understand.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 125

53) According to research cited in the textbook, adult learners prefer to be actively involved in thelearning process.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 130

54) A word picture is a description that helps the audience imagine the sight, sound, taste, smell,or touch of what you are talking about.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 126

55) According to the textbook, making yourself the butt of a joke is not an effective use of humor.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 128-129

56) Landy gave a speech on making new friends. She began by asking, ʺWould you like to havetwo new friends by the end of the semester?ʺ This is an example of relating new information toold.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122-123

57) Repeating your main points three times throughout your speech is too trite and repetitious formost audiences.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 129-130

58) Pausing just before you make an important point in your speech is an example of reinforcingyour key ideas verbally.Answer: FALSEDiff: 1 Page Ref: 130

59) Adult learners prefer to deal with more abstract ideas that have indirect relevance to theirlives.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 130

228

Match the type of informative speech to the specific purposes given in the following questions.

A. Speech about an objectB. Speech about a procedureC. Speech about peopleD. Speech about an eventE. Speech about an idea

60) At the end of my speech, the audience should be able to describe three possible causes of thecrash of TWA Flight 800.Answer: DDiff: 1 Page Ref: 117

61) At the end of my speech, the audience should be able to explain five steps to artificiallyinseminating cows.Answer: BDiff: 1 Page Ref: 115-116

62) At the end of my speech, the audience should be able to describe three ways that mosques aredifferent from churches.Answer: ADiff: 1 Page Ref: 115

63) At the end of my speech, the audience should be able explain three events that affected thewritings of Mark Twain.Answer: CDiff: 1 Page Ref: 116-117

64) At the end of my speech, the audience should be able to describe three theories of the nature ofcreativity.Answer: EDiff: 1 Page Ref: 118

Match the informative speech strategies to the examples described below.

A. Build in redundancyB. Present information that relates to the listenerʹs interestsC. Reinforce key ideas nonverballyD. Reinforce key ideas verballyE. Relate new information to old F. Simplify ideasG. Use adult learning principlesH. Use effective attention-catching supporting materialI. Use humorJ. Use interesting presentation aidsK. Use word pictures

65) John creates colorful overheads with diagrams of an airplane wing.Answer: JDiff: 2 Page Ref: 128

229

66) Simplifying ideasAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 129-130

67) Use attention catching supporting materialAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122-123

68) Use humorAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122-123

69) Use adult learning principlesAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 130-131

70) Use word picturesAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122-123

71) Relate new information to oldAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 129-130

72) Build in redundancyAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 130-131

73) Jared previews his main points in his introduction, uses internal previews and summaries, anduses a final summary in his conclusion.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 129-130

74) Krista leans forward, stares directly at the audience, and audibly whispers a point she wants tomake.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 130

75) Anthony uses phrases such as ʺI have found this is the most important factor in selecting alaptop computer.ʺAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 130-131

76) Stana relates hang gliding to what people already know about flying kites.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 124

230

77) George discusses only the most basic concepts about the earthʹs crust; he knows too muchscientific information may overwhelm his audience.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122

78) Ken uses an analogy to establish the ʺbig pictureʺ for his audience.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 124-125

79) Dawn talks to her classmates about tuition increases on their campus.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 122-123

80) Michael relates conflict solving procedures that can be quickly implemented in his audienceʹsworkplace; he is aiming for their in-basket.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 130

81) Emma vividly describes what Hawaii smells, looks, sounds and feels like.Answer: KDiff: 2 Page Ref: 126-128

82) The general purpose for a speech in which you explain, teach, or enhance the knowledge orunderstanding of others is a speech to ________.Answer: informDiff: 1 Page Ref: 114

83) A(n) ________ is a comparison between two things in order to help the listeners relate a newidea to something that is familiar to them.Answer: analogyDiff: 1 Page Ref: 125

84) ________ are people who have a learning style who prefer practical, useful information that isrelevant to their busy lives; they seek information that can connect with their life experiences.Answer: Adult learnersDiff: 2 Page Ref: 130

85) A(n) ________ is the vivid use of words to describe a situation that invites listeners to drawupon their senses.Answer: word pictureDiff: 2 Page Ref: 126

86) A speech about a(n) ________ is one that is about something tangible or anything that you cansee or touch.Answer: objectDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115

231

87) A speech about a(n) ________ is a speech about how something works, or how a processproduces particular outcomes.Answer: procedureDiff: 2 Page Ref: 115-116

88) A speech about a(n) ________ is one about an abstract concept, theory, or principle.Answer: ideaDiff: 2 Page Ref: 118

89) A speech about a(n) ________ is one about a particular occurrence.Answer: eventDiff: 2 Page Ref: 117

90) To repeat important ideas several times in the speech, especially through previews andsummaries, is to reinforce your ideas through ________.Answer: redundancyDiff: 2 Page Ref: 129-130

91) When you add pauses to emphasize a point, you are reinforcing ideas ________.Answer: nonverballyDiff: 2 Page Ref: 130-131

92) Briefly explain the purpose of speech to inform. Give examples of at least 3 specific situations(other than student speeches in a speech class) in which informative speaking is commonlyused.Answer: A speech to inform is one that explains, instructs, or teaches. It gives the audience

knowledge or understanding. Speeches to inform are commonly used by teachers in theclassroom when they lecture, on the job when a supervisor trains a new employee, or insports when a coach shows players how to do a particular skill or improve theirtechnique.


93) What are the three suggestions for making your informative speech clear? Briefly explain each.Answer: (1) Use simple ideas rather than complex ones. Limit new ideas to a few, donʹt try to

give too much complex information. Follow a logical pattern of explanation to help thelistener understand. (2) Pace your information flow. Spread new information out. Donʹtcover a number of significant points in a short period of time. (3) Relate newinformation to old. We learn by associating what we already know to the newinformation. Think about what your audienceʹs knowledge of your topic is, and useanalogies to introduce new ideas.


232

94) Discuss any four of the six suggestions given in the textbook for making your speechinteresting. Briefly explain each.Answer: (1) Present information that relates to your audienceʹs interests. Present information that

that has a close relationship to your audience. Also knowing why you are interested inthe topic helps you to understand why they may be interested. (2) Useattention-catching supporting material. Give examples and analogies that give the bigpicture. (4) Establish a motive for your audience to listen to you. (4) Use words well. Usevivid language, such as word pictures, to help the audience imagine your topic. (5)Create interesting presentation aids. Use the best visual aids for accomplishing yourspecific purpose. Modern technology has given us many more choices for visual aids.(6) Use humor wisely by using it to make a point, making yourself the butt of the joke,using humorous quotations, and using cartoons.


95) What are analogies? What is the value of using them in your speech?Answer: An analogy is a comparison of two things, one of which is something already known

the listener and the other is something that is new. In informative speeches, analogiesare a good way to relate new information to the audience, by comparing it to somethingalready familiar.


96) Explain the concept and importance of using word pictures.Answer: A word picture is a phrase that vividly describes something by referring to the sight,

sound, smell, touch, or tastes of the audience. This gets the audience more involved andinterested by helping them imagine what you are discussing.


97) Explain the importance of redundancy in a public speaking situation, and what a speaker cando to build in redundancy.Answer: Because listeners do not have the opportunity to turn back the pages of your speech, the

speaker should use redundancy, or repetition of key ideas. This helps make the speechmemorable, because we are more likely to remember something if we hear it three timesthan if we hear it only once. Redundancy may be accomplished by telling them whatyou are going to tell them, tell them, and tell them what you told them.


98) The textbook gives four suggestions for the use of humor in a speech. Briefly discuss three ofthem.Answer: (1) Use humor to make a point. Your humor should be directly related to your specific

purpose. The connection should be clear to the audience. (2) Make yourself the butt ofthe joke. This is the best way to avoid offending audience members. (3) Use quotes:quotes, proverbs, or sayings that are humoroussince you didnʹt write it yourself, youcan give a more objective appraisal of the humor and the sensitivity. (4) Use cartoonsagood way to begin a speech.


233

99) What are three of the five preferences of adult learners? Briefly explain how these preferencescould be taken into account by a public speaker.Answer: (1) to be given information they can use immediately (2) to be actively involved in the

learning process (3) to connect their life experiences with the new information they learn(4) to know how the new information is relevant to their busy lives (5) to receiveinformation that is relevant to their needs. This points to the importance of audienceadaptation: discover their needs while researching your speech. Relate the speech to theinterests of the audience, use effective supporting material, use words well, and createinteresting visual aids. Relate to the audienceʹs ʺinbasketʺ by discussing topics that arerelevant and meaningful to your audience.


100) Briefly explain the three ways you can reinforce ideas nonverbally.Answer: (1) You can use gestures to emphasize key points. (2) Pauses can be used before or after

key points. (3) Moving just before a key point can add emphasis.Diff: 2 Page Ref: 130-131

101) Describe ways that you can motivate your audience to listen to you.Answer: You can ask a rhetorical question that stimulates the audienceʹs interest. You may also

use an anecdote, starting statistic, or another attention-grabbing device. Basically, tellyour audience how the information can be of value to them.


102) When giving a presentation about people, what two organizational patterns could youpossibly use and why?Answer: You could use a chronological or a topical pattern. You could use a chronological

pattern and talk about a personʹs life based upon a time line, or you could use a topicalpattern to discuss specific themes or experiences from a personʹs life.


103) Give examples of speech topics that correspond to these five types of informative speeches. (1)speeches about objects; (2) speeches about procedures; (3) speeches about people; (4) speechesabout events; and (5) speeches about ideas.Answer: Answers will vary on this question. An object should be a tangible item that can be

touched or seen. A procedure should explain a process. A person should be a humanbeing. An event should be a particular occurrence, and an idea should be an abstractconcept, such as a theory or philosophy.


104) Darin is speaking to inform his audience about car alarms. Describe one way he couldreinforce his key ideas verbally, then two ways he could use to reinforce ideas nonverbally.Answer: To reinforce verbally, use words to let the audience know what is important. ʺThe most

important thing to consider in purchasing a car alarm is...ʺ Do not overuse this. Toreinforce the ideas nonverbally, use gestures, pauses, and movement to indicatetransitions to important or different points in the speech.


234

105) It is critical to the success of an informative speech that the audience remember the speakerʹsinformation. Your textbook suggests four ways that a speaker can work to enhance audienceretention. In a well-developed essay, discuss how each can make an informative speech morememorable. Select examples from speeches you have heard in class (whether a good exampleof the technique or a failure to use the technique) to illustrate your answer.Answer: (1) Use adult learning principles to provide information listenerʹs can use immediately,

involve them actively in the process, connect their life experiences with the newinformation, and provide and explain the relevancy of the information. (2) Build inredundancy. Tell them what youʹre going to tell them, tell them, tell them what youʹvetold them. The use of previews and summaries helps accomplish this. (3) Reinforce keyideas verbally. Use phrases such as ʺthe key ideaʺ or ʺthe most important idea is...ʺ (4)Reinforce ideas nonverbally: use gestures, pauses, vocal inflections, and movement toemphasize major ideas.


106) The text suggests that you use the T-E-A-C-H model when teaching people how to dosomething (procedure). Choose a skill and explain how you would use the model to teach it toyour audience.Answer: Answers will vary. The T-E-A-C-H model includes the following steps:

1. Tell describe what you want your audience to know.2. Example show your audience an example of how to perform the skill.3. Apply Give your audience an opportunity to perform the skill themselves.4. Coach Encourage them by providing positive reinforcement.5. Help Correct their mistakes.


107) Describe the importance of relating information in a presentation to the interest of youraudience. Give examples of three strategies you can use to relate to your listenerʹs interests.Answer: Examples will vary.

It is important to relate to your listenerʹs interest because you want your audience tolisten and be interested in the information you are offering. If they are interested andare listening, it is more likely they will also remember your information.

Strategies include:(1) Use activity and movement. Listeners are more likely to listen to someone who tellsan action packed story that is lively and full of movement. (2) Discuss issues and eventsclose to an audience. In other words, relate to what is going on in your listeners lives.Also, use specific audience members names. (3) Create conflict in your presentation.People are more interested in hearing about opposing forces such as pitting goodagainst evil. (4) Think about why you are interested and establish common bonds withthe audience.


235

VOLUME 4Chapter 4.5: Speaking to Persuade

1) The process of changing or reinforcing attitudes, beliefs, values, or behavior is the process of________.

A) informing B) entertaining C) persuading D) refutingAnswer: CDiff: 1 Page Ref: 140

2) The primary difference between a persuasive speech and an informative speech is that apersuasive speech ________.

A) does not need to be as well organized as an informative speech needs to beB) needs more detailed and varied supporting material than an informative speech needsC) is delivered from a manuscript, an informative speech extemporaneouslyD) asks the audience to make an explicit choice; an informative speech offers information

about the optionsAnswer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 140-141

3) Frazier is listening to a persuasive speech on assisted suicide. With the new informationpresented in the speech, he is learning more about the problem and begins to question his ownopinion. What is the best term for what Frazier is experiencing?

A) values erosion B) cognitive dissonanceC) predetermined motivation D) credibility deterioration


4) Creating a sense of discomfort by pointing out inconsistencies, then offering a way to reducethat discomfort, is a persuasive strategy called ________.

A) values erosion B) motivating with positive appealsC) cognitive dissonance D) inductive reasoning


5) When Aaron tries to persuade his audience to install a smoke detector in their apartment, he isappealing to his listenerʹs needs for ________.

A) self-actualization B) physiological needsC) social needs D) safety


236

6) One of your classmates argues in his persuasive speech, ʺWhat starving people need first isfood and clean waternot counseling about the sad state of their governments, not adviceabout ways to attract new industry, and not pity over the loss of their self-esteem.ʺ Whatprinciple of persuasive speaking is this class member effectively using?

A) cognitive dissonance and negative motivationB) presenting more advantages than disadvantagesC) basic needs must be satisfied before higher-level ones are consideredD) creating gradual, rather than sudden, change in listeners


7) In her persuasive speech, Martha spoke about the alleged espionage by the Chinese, and thepossible theft of U.S. nuclear armament secrets. She got the audience to think about thepossibility that China could one day rise up and use high-tech nuclear weapons against theUnited States She challenged them to monitor Senate hearings on the problem and to getinvolved by writing or e-mailing their congress persons. What form of motivation did Marthasuccessfully employ in her speech?

A) an appeal to patriotismB) an appeal to basic self-esteem and self-actualization needsC) a positive visualizationD) a fear appeal


8) In her persuasive speech, Beatrice says the following: ʺSo, by using these simple steps, you willsave time, money, and energy.ʺ What form of persuasive appeal is this?

A) positive motivationB) negative or guilt-based emotionC) cognitive dissonanceD) an appeal to the audienceʹs self-esteem needs


9) ʺAt the end of my speech, the audience will prefer drinking water to drinking sodaʺ is anexample of a speech that targets a(n) ________.

A) value B) belief C) attitude D) behaviorAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 147

10) ʺAt the end of my speech, the audience will acknowledge that volcanoes contribute more toglobal warming than motor vehiclesʺ is example a speech that targets a(n) ________.

A) value B) belief C) attitude D) behaviorAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 148

11) A proposition is basically a ________.A) central idea B) specific purposeC) syllogism D) supporting illustration


237

12) Imelda wants to persuade her audience that driving hybrid vehicles is an effective method ofconserving fuel. You recognize this as a proposition of ________.

A) fact B) attitude C) behavior D) valueAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 149

13) The statement ʺThe administration should create a mechanism that would prevent absencesfrom school-sponsored activities from hurting studentsʹ gradesʺ is a proposition of ________.

A) fact B) policy C) value D) attitudeAnswer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

14) ʺFast food restaurants should be required to provide nutritional information about items ontheir menuʺ is a proposition of ________.

A) value B) fact C) policy D) beliefAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

15) Credibility is the audienceʹs perception of a speakerʹs ________.A) competence, trust, and pathos B) trust, competence, and ethosC) competence, trust, dynamism D) trust, dynamism, and logos


16) When Ramone spoke about the need for regular health check-ups, he provide clear, accurateinformation and was so knowledgeable that everyone responded quite positively to hisspeech. What aspects of speaker credibility did Ramone demonstrate?

A) competence B) trustworthinessC) dynamism D) initial credibility


17) Adapting your message to your audience, establishing common ground, and using goodevidence are all ways of developing ________.

A) initial credibility B) derived credibilityC) terminal credibility D) vicarious credibility


18) When students arrived for the speech by Joe Clark, they had already seen posters aroundcampus with his picture and the mention of a movie about him, Lean on Me, which many hadeven seen. In his speech of introduction, the student body president complimented Clarkʹsachievements and commented upon his awards and recognition. The publicity and theintroduction enhanced Mr. Clarkʹs ________ credibility.

A) initial B) derived C) terminal D) vicariousAnswer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 152

238

19) The process of drawing a conclusion from evidence is ________.A) proof B) evidence C) credibility D) reasoning


20) Jessica argued that in Europe, teenagers are allowed to drink, and alcohol abuse amongteenagers is lower than in the United States, therefore, lowering the drinking age woulddecrease alcohol abuse among teenagers in the United States. This is what type of reasoning?

A) non-sequitur B) deductive C) analogy D) bandwagonAnswer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 154

21) ʺAll ministers are honest people; Rev. Thompson is a minister; therefore, Rev. Thompson is anhonest manʺ is an example of ________.

A) inductive reasoning B) a syllogismC) a form of causal reasoning D) a fallacy known as ad hominem


22) Reasoning from a general statement to a specific conclusion is known as ________.A) inductive reasoning B) deductive reasoningC) toulminʹs model D) causal reasoning


23) In your speech to a group of high school students, you explain how you have seen people dostupid things at parties as a result of drinking, youʹve seen how drunken people putthemselves at risk, and youʹve heard of peopleʹs reputations being ruined because ofalcohol-related incidents. Because of what youʹve seen, you want to urge your listeners toavoid drinking in social situations so they will not suffer the consequences similar to those youdiscussed. What form of reasoning have you used in this speech?

A) deductive B) inductive C) causal D) syllogisticAnswer: CDiff: 3 Page Ref: 155

24) In a speech to the neighborhood watch group, Mr. Simmons made the following statement: ʺIfyou see someone running full steam down the sidewalk, you can safely assume that he or shehas committed some type of crime in that neighborhood.ʺ Some members of the audiencerecognized this statement as an example of ________.

A) a causal fallacy B) red herringC) deductive reasoning D) a bandwagon fallacy


239

25) When Judd said, ʺThe rights of students are being violated on other college campuses and itwill happen on our campus. Everyone sees it...everyone knows it.ʺ You recognized this asa/an ________.

A) reasoning fallacy known as a ʺred herringʺB) appeal to a misplaced authorityC) bandwagon fallacyD) appeal to misplaced authority


26) Thea is arguing against the bond proposal that would raise money to build a bike lane on themain avenue coming into the University. She dismisses the opposing argument, describingthe group that proposed the bonds as ʺliberal do gooders.ʺ By making this claim, she is askingthe audience to believe her based on which type of reasoning fallacy?

A) red herring B) ad hominemC) appeal to misplaced authority D) non sequitur


27) Tom used the Internet to check the showtime for a local movie he wanted to see. When hearrived at the theater at the time shown online, he found he was late for the start of the movie.Afterwards, Tom told his friend not to use the Internet because it was an unreliable source ofinformation. This is an example of a reasoning fallacy of ________.

A) non sequiturB) red herringC) causalD) either-orE) hasty generalization


28) Kevin argues that smoking marijuana must not be harmful because ʺeveryone does it.ʺ He isusing what sort of logical fallacy?

A) causal fallacy B) bandwagon fallacyC) either-or fallacy D) hasty generalization


29) A classmate asks Caroline about evidence that seemed questionable in her persuasive speech.Caroline evades the issue by quickly bringing up an irrelevant fact about another point in herspeech. What sort of logical fallacy does this illustrate?

A) non sequitur B) appeal to misplaced authorityC) red herring D) causal fallacy


240

30) Martyʹs persuasive speech was about gun control and school violence. He made the statement,ʺWe either get rid of the guns in our society or we get ready for more school violence, likewhat happened in Kentucky, Arkansas, and Colorado.ʺ This kind of argument represents a/an________.

A) bandwagon fallacy B) ad hominem fallacyC) appeal to misplaced authority D) either-or fallacy


31) Assuming that someone is an expert on a topic just because he or she is a celebrity is anexample of ________.

A) appeal to misplaced authority B) bandwagon fallacyC) either-or fallacy D) non sequitur


32) ʺPeople should not let their animals outside when it is a full moonʺ is an example of which ofthe following logical fallacies?

A) hasty generalization B) non sequiturC) post hoc D) ad hominem


33) In his persuasive speech about the Marines, Hal referred to ʺthe few, the proud, the braveʺ .He also showed a picture of a Marine on the battlefield raising a flag. What persuasivestrategy is Hal using?

A) positive imagery B) appeal to emotionsC) fear appeals D) appeal to logic


34) In his speech about the rise in terrorist attacks throughout the world, Hank showed enlargedpictures of the bombed out subway in London and the ruins of the Twin Towers in New YorkCity. From this description of his speech, which persuasive speaking strategy did Hankeffectively employ?

A) He used nonverbal behavior to solidify his reasoning and evoke audience emotions.B) He used concrete examples that appealed to audience membersʹ reasoning and logic.C) He resorted to logical fallacies to effectively arouse the passions of his audience.D) He used strong visual images to evoke the emotions of his audience.


35) The motivated sequence is a modified version of what organizational pattern?A) problem and solution B) cause and effectC) refutation D) topical


241

36) Sarah identifies common arguments as to why Bigfoot does not exist and systematically arguesagainst each of these objections. What organizational pattern is she using?

A) cause and effect B) problem and solutionC) motivated sequence D) refutation


37) In the motivated sequence pattern, which of the following is the best example of the need step?A) Students need to vote in the state primaries.B) Only 32% of college aged students vote in most primaries.C) If you vote, your voice will be heard!D) Just do it!


38) Visualization is a step that is included in the ________ organizational pattern.A) cause and effect B) motivated sequenceC) refutation D) problem and solution


39) In his speech, Warnie painted a picture for the audience of the grim future that will occur if thecurrent rate of child abuse continues. This is an example of ________.

A) a satisfaction step B) a positive visualizationC) a negative visualization D) a need step


40) In a speech about improved public safety, Stewie called for his audience to sign a petition tosupport current legislation that he felt would improve the situation. What type of audience isbest suited for this kind of appeal?

A) the uninformed audience B) the neutral or apathetic audienceC) the receptive audience D) the unreceptive or hostile audience


41) Based on her audience analysis, Kawtar knew that she needed to ʺhookʺ her audience with anespecially rousing introduction. She is probably facing a(n) ________ audience.

A) receptive B) unreceptive C) neutral D) hostileAnswer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 166

42) Which of the following is a recommended strategy for an unreceptive audience?A) provide a clear objectiveB) tell your audience what you want them to doC) acknowledge opposing points of viewD) save your strongest argument for last


242

43) According to Maslowʹs hierarchy, basic physiological needs must satisfied before we tend toothers.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 144

44) The idea underlying Maslowʹs hierarchy of needs is that the needs at the top of the pyramidmust be satisfied before one can concentrate on the needs at the bottom of the pyramid.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 144

45) For fear appeals to be effective, the speaker needs to convince the audience that the threat isreal.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 145

46) A health club ad showing sleek, well-toned bodies on an exercise machines is attempting tomotivate with positive appeals.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 146

47) An attitude is a predisposition to respond favorably or unfavorably to something.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 147

48) Generally speaking, attitudes are easier to change than values.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 147-148

49) ʺMaine is the most beautiful state in the countryʺ is an example of a proposition of policy.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

50) ʺDrinking too much caffeine is harmful to your healthʺ is a proposition of policy.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

51) Inductive reasoning argues from specific examples to reach a general conclusion.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 154

52) Aristotleʹs term for credibility was ethos.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 151

53) Letting the audience know about your personal experiences with your topic is a good way todevelop your credibility.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 151

243

54) The perception the audience has of you after you have concluded your speech, answered anyquestions, and left the area is your derived credibility.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 152

55) Credibility is the audienceʹs perception of the speakerʹs competence, trustworthiness, anddynamism.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 151

56) ʺLarge companies should not be allowed to merge together because everyone knows that it isbad for the consumerʺ is an example of an ad hominem attack.Answer: FALSEDiff: 3 Page Ref: 157

57) According to the textbook, using emotional appeals exclusively, without offering evidence orreasoning, violates standards of ethical public speaking.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 158

58) When you are addressing a receptive audience, be indirect in stating your objective.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 165-166

59) In the motivated sequence, the satisfaction step deals with the identification of a solution.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 161

60) Increasing the intensity of a fear appeal decreases its effectiveness.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 145

61) Dynamism is specifically determined by the organization of your presentation.Answer: FALSEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 152

62) Your audienceʹs perception of your credibility after you have finished is known as terminalcredibility.Answer: TRUEDiff: 2 Page Ref: 153

244

Match the following persuasive strategies to the definitions listed below in the questions below.

A. Cause and effectB. Motivated sequenceC. Problem and solutionD. ProofE. Proposition of factF. Proposition of policyG. Proposition of valueH. Refutation

63) Organization in which you answer objections your listeners may have to your position.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 161

64) A claim as to whether something is true or false, or whether it did or did not happen.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 149

65) A five-step plan for organizing a persuasive speech: attention, need, satisfaction, visualization,action.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 161

66) An example of this pattern would be the negative consequences of budget cutbacks and a planto resolve the crisis.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 159

67) A claim that calls for the listeners to judge the worth or importance of something.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 149

68) A claim advocating a specific action or change in a procedure or behavior.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

69) Organization that discusses a situation and what contributes to it, then what the consequencesare.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 160

245

Match the following fallacies in reasoning to the definitions given below in the following questions.

A. Ad hominemB. Appeal to misplaced authorityC. Bandwagon fallacyD. Causal fallacyE. Either-or fallacyF. Hasty generalizationG. Non sequiturH. Red herringI. Refutation

70) Reaching a conclusion without having adequate evidence to support it.Answer: FDiff: 2 Page Ref: 157

71) One idea or conclusion that does not logically follow the previous idea or conclusion.Answer: GDiff: 2 Page Ref: 158

72) Making a faulty connection between two events, saying that one is the consequence of theother.Answer: DDiff: 2 Page Ref: 156

73) Using irrelevant facts or information to distract someone from the issue under discussion.Answer: HDiff: 2 Page Ref: 157

74) Attacking irrelevant personal characteristics of someone, rather than addressing the idea itself.Answer: ADiff: 2 Page Ref: 157

75) Oversimplifying an issue as having only two choices.Answer: EDiff: 2 Page Ref: 157

76) Using someone without appropriate credentials or expertise to endorse an idea or a product.Answer: BDiff: 2 Page Ref: 157-158

77) Suggesting that because everyone else believes something or does something, it must be valid,accurate, or effective.Answer: CDiff: 2 Page Ref: 157

78) ________ ________ is the sense of disorganization or imbalance that prompts a person tochange when new information conflicts with previously organized thought patterns.Answer: Cognitive dissonanceDiff: 2 Page Ref: 142-143

246

79) A proposition advocating that something ʺshouldʺ be changed is a proposition of ________.Answer: policyDiff: 2 Page Ref: 150

80) A(n) ________ is a learned disposition to respond favorably or unfavorably to something.Answer: attitudeDiff: 2 Page Ref: 147

81) A(n) ________ is the sense of what is true or false.Answer: beliefDiff: 2 Page Ref: 148

82) A(n) ________ is an enduring conception of right or wrong, good or bad.Answer: valueDiff: 2 Page Ref: 148

83) ________ is the factor in a personʹs credibility that refers to his or her being perceived asbelievable and honest.Answer: TrustworthinessDiff: 2 Page Ref: 151

84) Aristotleʹs word for moving the audience using emotional appeals is known as ________.Answer: pathosDiff: 2 Page Ref: 151

85) The impression of a speakerʹs believability before the speaker begins to speak is his or her________.Answer: initial credibilityDiff: 2 Page Ref: 152

86) ________ credibility is the impression of a speakerʹs believability based on what the speakersays and does during the speech.Answer: DerivedDiff: 2 Page Ref: 152

87) ________ credibility is the impression of a speakerʹs believability after the speech has beenconcluded.Answer: TerminalDiff: 2 Page Ref: 153

88) What is cognitive dissonance? How might a speaker make use of it in a persuasive speech?Answer: Cognitive dissonance is a feeling of discomfort a person experiences when he or she

perceives there new information that conflicts with their previously organized thoughtpatterns. This feeling of imbalance may prompt a change in their attitudes, beliefs,values, or behavior. A speaker may make use of this by pointing out suchinconsistencies, for example, by pointing out that oneʹs wish for good health isinconsistent with oneʹs lifestyle. The persuader then offers a palatable way to reducethat inconsistency, in the form of a solution step.


247

89) Briefly discuss how a speaker might apply Maslowʹs Hierarchy of Needs to a persuasivespeech on getting students to volunteer for a charity. Discuss at least two specific ways itmight be used.Answer: First, the speaker must determine which needs on the hierarchy are relevant to the

topic, and which needs on the hierarchy are important to his or her audience. If it can beassumed that the lower needs (physiological and safety) are generally met, then thespeaker may look to a higher need, such as social or self-actualization. Then, thespeaker determines how his or her proposition can fulfill that need. For the topic ofcharity, an appeal to a safety need might emphasize the future possibility that thestudent or his or her family might some day need the services of that particular charity.This could be accomplished by pointing to other similar people who have needed it inthe past. An additional appeal might be to oneʹs self-esteem need, which might usepositive visualization to help the student feel good about him or herself throughvolunteering.


90) Briefly explain three of the four strategies for using fear appeals effectively in a speech.Answer: First, the fear appeal is most effective if the speaker shows its potential for affecting the

loved ones of the audience, as opposed to personal impact. Second, the fear appeal ismost effective if the audience has respect for the speaker: this implies attention ought tobe paid to oneʹs credibility. Third, the fear appeal is most effective if the audiencebelieves the threat is real; hence the speaker needs to demonstrate the likelihood of thethreat taking place, perhaps by describing illustrations of real people being affected byit. Fourth, increasing the intensity of the fear appeal increases the likelihood the fearappeal will be effective, particularly if the listener can take the action recommended bythat speaker.


91) Briefly discuss the difference between an attitude, value, and a belief. Give an example of each.Why are these differences important to a speaker?Answer: An attitude is a predisposition to act in a favorable or unfavorable way toward

something. For example, one might have a favorable attitude toward recycling. A beliefis the degree to which we think something is true or false: for example, the belief thatrecycling is an effective method of protecting the environment.. A value is an enduringconcept of right or wrong, or good or bad. For example, one may have the value thateach individual should enjoy the of privacy.

Knowledge of the nature of attitudes, beliefs, and values is important because they varyin their permanence. Attitudes change fairly easily, beliefs less so, and values areenduring and not likely to change. A speaker should take this into account whenplanning his or her proposition. If he or she wishes to affect to the values of theaudience, for instance, then only a modest change would be realistic. Likewise, if thespeaker can surmise the values of the audience, he or she might be able to link theproposition to their values.


248

92) Briefly explain inductive reasoning. Why is the use of statistics an example of inductivereasoning?Answer: Inductive reasoning is moving from the specific to the general. That is, the speaker looks

at a number of specific cases, and then draws a conclusion based on a generalization ofthose cases. Statistics is an example of inductive reasoning because statistics is asummary of a large number of specific instances.


93) Briefly explain the concept of a syllogism. What type of reasoning does this represent?Answer: A syllogism is a three part argument that consists of a major premise, a minor premise,

and a conclusion. Using deductive reasoning, the effective use of a syllogism will allowyou to move to certain conclusion. For this to be possible, both the major premise andthe minor premise must be valid and true.


94) What is reasoning by analogy, and what should the speaker consider when using an argumentfrom analogy?Answer: Reasoning by analogy is one in which the speaker demonstrates how an unfamiliar

thing, idea, or situation is similar to something the audience already understands bydrawing a conclusion between two things or situations. These things must share someessential common feature for the reasoning by analogy to be sound.


95) Briefly explain what the refutation organizational pattern is and give an example of it.Answer: Refutation is an organizational strategy by which you identify objections and then

refute each of these objections with arguments and evidence. This is an effectiveorganizational method if you know your listenersʹ primary objections to yourproposition. Since the audience will probably think of these objections anyway, it iseffective to recognize them and support your argument with credible facts and statisticsrather than the use of an emotional appeal.

Examples will vary depending on the audience and topic.Diff: 3 Page Ref: 161

96) Define causal reasoning and give an example.Answer: Causal reasoning is when you relate two or more events in such a way as to conclude

that one or more of the events caused the others. Examples will vary.Diff: 3 Page Ref: 156

97) Differentiate between the three types of propositions (fact, value, policy).Answer: A proposition of fact deals with claims as to whether something is true or false, known

or unknown. A proposition of value calls for a judgement of worth or value. Aproposition of policy advocates a specific action or change of policy, procedure, orbehavior.


249

98) In a well-defined essay, explain what a speaker can do to enhance initial credibility, derivedcredibility, and terminal credibility.Answer: All types of credibility require thoughtful planning. For initial credibility, the speaker

should be mindful of his or her dress and demeanor prior to the speech. Have notes andvisual aids prepared and ready to set up before entering the room in view of theaudience. Provide a summary of your credentials to be used in your introduction.Nervously running around trying to adjust various items will diminish oneʹs initialcredibility, whereas a calm, confident appearance will enhance it. When walking to thelectern, look poised and confident, pause before beginning, and look at the audiencedirectly while beginning your speech.

Derived credibility is created during the course of the speech, and is a direct result ofpreparation, creating common ground with the audience, and practice. Making use ofthe notions of competence, trustworthiness, and dynamism will enhance oneʹs derivedcredibility. For example, for competence the speaker might mention personalexperience, present the speech in an organized fashion, and use credible sources. Fortrustworthiness, the speaker needs to be sincere, and for dynamism, the speaker needsto show enthusiasm for the topic.

Terminal credibility is based upon the speakerʹs ability to prepare a conclusion anddeliver it well, maintain eye contact with the audience, and be prepared to answerquestions.


250

99) Your textbook provides some excellent strategies to adapt your message to appeal to theposition of your audience. In a thorough, detailed essay, first identify the three types ofaudiences. Explain two strategies that are recommended to enhance persuasion for each typeof audience.Answer: A receptive audience is one that is already basically in agreement with the speaker. The

speaker should identify with the audience and emphasize common interests. Thespeaker should be very clear about his or her objectives, and ask for an immediate showof support. As the audience is already receptive toward your topic, you can utilizeemotional appeals to move them to action.

A neutral audience is one that is largely indifferent to the topic. A speaker can ʺhookʺthe audience with an engaging introduction, refer to beliefs and concerns that areimportant to the audience, and show how the topic affects the audience and the peoplethey care about. It is important that the speaker be realistic about what can beaccomplished with a neutral audience. Getting them to take action on something theyare initially blase about is probably unrealistic.

An unreceptive audience is one that is in disagreement with the speakerʹs proposition.In order not to prompt the audience to ʺtune-outʺ the speaker, the speaker should notexplicitly state his or her purpose until a common ground has been achieved. Thespeaker should use the primacy principle, presenting the strongest argument first. Thespeaker should acknowledge opposing points of view, and then refute them or offeradditional information. Otherwise, the audience will be constantly thinking, ʺYeah, butwhat about...?ʺ Finally, the speaker should be realistic about his or her goals. Expectinga major shift in attitudes is unrealistic. Getting the audience to consider oneʹs position asa reasonable one might be a huge success.


251

100) Select one of the topics given below for this question. Using the topic, develop anorganizational plan using the motivated sequence. Include and explain each step in thesequence.

Topics:1. Audience members should volunteer to be a bone marrow donor;2. The Board of Regents should vote to lower the tuition at this university;3. Audience members should make a commitment to exercise at least thirty minutes eachday.Answer: Answers will vary. The steps of the motivated sequence are: (1) Attention: in this step,

the speaker gets the audienceʹs attention through use of interesting material, by usingan appropriate attention getting device as in any speech. An example would be telling apersonal story about how one improved oneʹs own health and appearance through anexercise program. (2) Need. This step involves demonstrating that an undesirablesituation exists. In this step, the speaker must use evidence to support the existence of aneed, and perhaps create cognitive dissonance in the audience. An example might bepointing to the susceptibility of the audience members to catching colds; the inability tohandle stress, the worn-out feeling, and perhaps a less than perfect body shape asexamples of problems caused by lack of exercise. (3) Satisfaction: in this step, thespeaker provides a solution, or a way to satisfy the need that was demonstrated in theneed step. Demonstrate how the solution satisfies the need. The speaker might outline asimple plan for exercising that would be appropriate for his or her audience. (4)Visualization: in this step, the speaker describes the future for the audience. A positivevisualization is one in which the speaker describes what will happen if the audiencefollows the solution (When you are fifty you will be as active as you are now). Anegative visualization is one in which the speaker describes what will happen if theaudience does not follow the solution. (When you are fifty you might be too out ofshape to enjoy a hike, or worse, you might have developed high blood pressure andhigh cholesterol.) (5) Action: here, the speaker offers specific behavioral steps for theaudience to follow. (The multi-purpose room is free to students and offers a variety oftypes of exercises. The recreation department sponsors a number of intramural events.They are....)


101) There are eight logical fallacies listed in your text. Identify, define and give an example of sixof the eight.Answer: Examples will vary.

(1) Causal fallacy is making a faulty cause and effect connection between two things orevents. (2) Bandwagon fallacy suggests that because everyone else is doing something,you should too. (3) Either or fallacy oversimplifies an issue by offering only twochoices. (4) Hasty generalization is when you reach a conclusion without adequatesupporting evidence. (5) Personal attack or ad hominem is attacking the person ratherthan the issues at hand. (6) Red herring is using irrelevant facts to distract someone forthe issue. (7) Appeal to misplaced authority is using someone without the appropriatecredentials or expertise to endorse an idea or product. (8) Non sequitur is when the ideaor conclusion does not logically follow the previous idea or conclusion.


252

102) Explain and give examples of the three ways to make emotional appeals in a persuasivepresentation.Answer: Examples will vary.

Use an emotion arousing verbal message. You can use emotional trigger words,patriotic slogans, etc. Second, you can use concrete illustrations and descriptions. Thesestories or descriptions of events can have a strong emotional impact. Nonverbalmessages can also appeal to audienceʹs emotions. These may include visual aids such asemotional photographs or video images. These can arouse both positive and negativeemotions.


253

Documents

Fundamental of Speech Test Bank